uuF CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY FROM The '■'.S.Army ''qr College ... Conwll Univwtlly Ubcsry UF403 .A2 1863 Instruction for field artlllei olln 3 1924 030 759 330 The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924030759330 INSTRUCTION FIELD AETILLEKY. liVSTIlUCTIOX FIELD AETILLEKY. PREPARED BY A BOARD ARTILLERY OFFICERS. PHILADELPHIA: J. B. LIPPINCOTT & CO. 18 6.!. f^-]'jl^^ll^ Entered, aooording to act of CongreBB, in the year 1860, by J. B. LIPPINCOTT & CO. In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States in and for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. Baltiuobe, Md., January 13, 1859. Colonel S. Cooper, Adjt. Oen. U. S. A. Sib: The Light Artillery Board, assembled by Special Orders No. 134 of 1856, and Special Orders No. 116 of 1858, has the honor to submit a revised system of Light Artillery Tactics, and regulations recommended for that arm. WM. n. FRENCH, J3t. Mg To reverse to the right or left I64 j^g To oblique X65 140 To rein back 166 149 To dismount leg j^^ To file off. 170 151 TABLE 0? CONTEKTS. xiii To unsaddle 171 151 To unbridle 172 151 Vaulting, the horse unsaddled 173 152 Marching 152 Riding-houie drill 174 152 19, Fig. 1 To march to the right or left hand 175 152 To halt and to move off. 176 153 To trot, and to resume the walk 177 163 19, Pig. 2 Changes of hand 178 154 To cross reins in marching 179 154 20, Fig. 1 To turn by cannoneer in marching 180 155 20, Fig. 2 Marching on the same line, to reverse by can- noneer 181 155 Marching in column, to reverse by cannoneer 182 156 To rest 184 156 To rest in marching „ 185 156 Vaulting, the horses saddled 186 16G The spur 187 157 19, Fig. 8 To mount in two ranks 188 157 19, Fig. 4 To conduct the cannoneers to the riding-house.... 190 168 20, Fig. 3 Change of direction in the length of the riding- house 194 159 21, Fig. 1 Change of direction obliquely by cannoneer 195 160 21, Fig. 2 To march in a circle 197 160 21, Fig. 8 To change hand on the circle 198 HU 21, Fig. 4 To reunite the cannoneers 199 161 21, Fig. 5 To form the cannoneers in line 200 162 19, Fig. 8 To dismount in two ranks 201 162 Eieroise with the stirrups 202 162 20, Fig. 1 To turn to the right or left by cannoneer 203 163 20, Fig. 2 The reverse by cannoneer 204 103 To pass from the head to the rear of the column.. 205 103 From a halt to move at a trot 206 163 To pass from the trot to the trot out, and to re- sume the trot 207 164 To pass from the trot to the gallop 208 164 To passage to the right or left 209 165 The curb bridle 212 160 Position of the bridle hand 213 166 Movements of the bridle hand 214 107 Principles of the gallop 217 108 Exercise at a gallop 213 1G9 Xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS. Manual of the sabre 221 170 Sabre exercise. 227 172 To leap the ditch and the bar 228 172 Article VI. — The Detacumest — Horse Artillery... 174 Forming and telling off the detachment 231 174 22 To mount and dismount in two ranks 232 174 To form in one rank 234 175 Alignments 236 175 To form in two ranks 241 177 To open and to close the ranks 242 178 To rein back the detachment 244 178 22 To march the detachment by file 245 179 Direct march in file 248 180 Change of direction in file 249 180 To halt and to move off 250 180 Oblique in file 251 180 To break into single file 253 181 To form in double files 255 182 To form the detachment in line 256 182 Direct march in line 260 183 Wheeling 268 186 Wheel in circle in single rank 269 187 Wheel in circle in two ranks 272 188 Wheel to the right or left 275 189 Half-wheel to the right or left 276 189 Reverse to the right or left 277 190 Oblique in line 279 190 Changes of gait 281 191 The platoon 283 191 Article VII. — The Driver 284 193 18 Nomenclature of the harness 285 193 To harness 286 194 To couple ; 288 195 To mount 289 195 Use of the coupling rein and whip 290 196 To march 292 196 To turn to the right and to the left 294 197 To reverse 296 197 To oblique 297 I97 To rein back 298 I99 TABLE OF CONTENTS. XV "-"" I.OS. PJOl To dismount ^99 jgg To file off. „ 300 198 To unharness 301 199 To harness and nnharncss in two motions 304-5 200 Marching 806 200 28, r■ Shells 112 would bo J Canisters 14 Total 210. The number of friction primers is fifty per cent, greater than the number of rounds furnished the battery. To provide for con- tingencies, a small supply of port-fires and slow-match is also furnished with the ammunition. 8 ORGANIZATION OF HELD BATTERIES. The iumpaign allowance of ammunition is double what has been here prescribed, or about 400 rounds per piece, of which about 200 rounds per piece accompany the battery, the remainder being with the reserve parks. FIELD PIECES. The pieces are cast in hrome or gun-metal, and are much less liable to burst than those made of iron. Bronze for cannon, (commonly called brass,) consists of 90 parts of copper and 10 of tin, allowing a variation of 1 part of tin, more or less. It is more fusible than copper ; much less so than tin ; is harder, less susceptible of oxidation, and much less ductile than either of its components. The specific gravity of bronze is about 8-70, being greater than the mean of the specific gravities of copper and tin; that of iron is about t"25. The tenacity of bronze is also greater than that of iron. The external forms of the pieces, and their nomenclature, are shown in Plates 6 and 'J. The howitzers only are chambered : the 6-pounder gun and 12-pounder howitzer have no handles. The preponderance, is the excess of the weight of the piece in rear of the trunnions over that in front ; it is measured by the lifting power, in pounds, which must be applied at the rear of the base ring, to balance the gun when suspended freely on the axis of the trunnions. The true windage, is the difi'erence between the true diame- ters of the bore and of the ball. OaOANIZATION OF WELD BATTEKIEB. PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS OP FIELD PIECES. Diameter of the bore True windage Length of bore, (exclusive of chamber,) Length of bore in diameters. Diameter of the chamber... Length of the chamber Length f^om rear of base ring to face of muzzle .... Whole length of the piece... Semi-diameter of the base ring Semi-diameter of the swell of the muzzle Distance between these two semi-diameters Natural angle of sight Distance from re.ir of base ring to rear ol' trunnions. Diameter of the base ring.. Distance between the rim- bases Length of the trunnions Diameter of the trunnions.. Distance from axis of trun- nions to face of muzzle... Weight pounds. Preponderance pounds. ^f^- ^^. s-"^- inehet. 4-62 0-10 Ti- le- 78- 85- 6-6 5'17 7r,-3 l" 80-7 13- 12- 8-5 4-02 44-99 1,757 60 inehet. ■ 4-62 010 63-6 13-70 66- 72-15 5-6 4-25 CI- 1°6' 25-4 11- n-6 8-26 4-2 1,227 123,5 inchei. 807 009 57-5 15-07 60- 65-6 5-15 4-125 58-7 1° 23-25 10-3 n-.-s 2-8 3-67 3491 884 33 St-rir. 21-iKlr. I2-piIr. inchet. 6-4 0-15 04- 10- 4-62 82- 6-9 5-6 74-75 l" .30-7 138 3-5 4-62 41-99 1,'.I20 125 inchet. 5-82 0-14 50-25 9-66 4-02 4-75 65- 71-2 6- 4-875 64-8 l" 13-8 n-5 8-25 4-2 35-4 1,318 112 mchfg. 4-G2 0-10 ■ifr-25 10- 8-67 4-25 53- 58-6 6- 4-1 52-85 l" 23-25 12- 9-6 2-8 3-07 27-91 78S 51 Ammunition. GUNPOWDER. Gunpowder is composed of nitre, Csaltpetre,) charcoal, and sulphur; the proportions of the ingredients and the size of the grain varying with the uses for which it Is destined. Powder for the military service is composed of 75 or 76 parts, by weight, of nitre, to 15 or 14 parts of charcoal, and 10 of Bulphnr. It is rjlazed, in order to enable it to resist the etfecls 10 ORGANIZATION OP FIBLD BATTERIES. of shaking in transportation, and of exposure to the moisture of the air. For sporting purposes there are 2 parts more of nitre, and 2 parts less of charcoal, and the grain is very small. Gunpowder burns at a temperature of from 575° to 600° Fahr. If made of pure materials, well glazed, and kept in proper casks in a dry magazine, it absorbs less than 1 per cent, of moisture in from 10 to 15 years. If freely exposed to air saturated with moisture, it will absorb 2 per cent, or more in 24 hours. DENSITY OF GUNPOWDER. Btzi or oSAiif. Speotflo griTity. Mo. of grains ofpowderin lOgra.Troy Weight of 1 oubio foot. Cnbio inches In lib. loose. Loose. Shaken. 1,912 1,983 150 1,100 6,000 73,000 oz. 929 896 900 1,047 02. 1,039 1,012 1,060 1,197 998,07 30- 30'8 30-7 26-5 Musket Rifle 2,012 1,000 Watke PROOF OF GUNPOWDER. The projectile force of gunpowder is ascertained by meana of the cannon pendulum, and the musket pendulum. The ap- paratus shows the initial velocity of a ball fired from a cannon or a musket with the ordinary service charge. In proving cannon powder, the initial velocity of a ball of medium weight and windage, with a charge of one-fourth its weight of powder, should be : — From a 24-ponnder garrison gun, not less than 1600 feet. From a 12-poQnder field gun, not less than 1550 feet. From a 6-ponnder field gun, not less than 1500 feet. In proving small-arm powder, the initial velocity of a musket ball, with a charge of 120 grains, should be : With musket powder, not less than 1500 feet. With rifle powder, not less than 1600 feet With fine sporting powder, not less than 1 800 feet. OBQANIZATION OF FIXLB BATT£SI£S. 11 CHARGES OF POWDER. KUTD. rOB OURS. ro> Hownzxu. U-pdn. g-pdn. Sl-pdn. M-pdn- IX-lidn. For shot U». 2-5 2-6 2- lb: 1-25 1-25 1- ».. »•. lb: 8-25 2-6 2-5 8-26 2-5 2- 2-5 1-26 1- 2-5 1- The same ammunitioQ is used for the 12-pounder and light 12-poQndcr guns. The charges are contained in cartridge bags, made of woollen material free from any mixture of cotton, and of safficiently close texture to prevent the powder from sifting through. PROJECTILES. (Plate 1.) There are four kinds of projectiles used in field service, viz. : the solid or round shot, the canister, the shell, and the spherical case shot or shrapnel The projectile is attached to a block of wood called a sabot. For the guns and the 13-pounder howitzer, the cartridge and the projectile are attached to the same sabot, making together a round of fixed ammunition. For 32-pounder and 24-pounder howitzers, the projectile is separate from the charge, and the cartridge is attached to a block of wood called a cartridge block. The solid shot is spherical, and its weight in pounds is used to designate the calibre of the gun to which it belongs. The canister consists of a tin cylinder, attached to a sabot and Jlled with cast-iron shot. These shot vary in diameter, and of course in weight, with the calibre and description of the piece. Canisters for guns contain 21 shots each ; those for howitzers ;ontain 48 shots each. They are packed in sawdust in four tiers : the lower tier rests on a rolled iron plate, which is placed on the 12 ORQANIZATIOX OF FIELD BATTEEIES. Babot ; and the canister is closed with a sheet-iron cover. The canister takes its designation from that of the piece for which it is prepared. The shell is a hollow shot, with such thickness of metal as enables it to penetrate earth works, wooden buildings, etc., with- out breaking. For service it is charged with powder, and bursts with great force. Fire is communicated to the charge by means of a faze, inserted in the hole through which the powder is in- troduced; the time of the explosion being regulated by the pre- paration of the fuze. The shell is designated by the weight of the solid shot of the same dianieter. CHARGING SHELLS. Cbarg«a. 32-pdr. 21-pdr. IZ-poundor. Oun, llowitxor p„„jo, ,„„.„Vo^ / 'o fill "^e she" Powder required j ^^^ ^^^^.^^ ^^^^^^ lb. 02. 1 5 1 lb. OZ. 1 12 lb. t,Z. 8 7 lb. OZ. 8 7 Rifle or musket powder is used in preference to cannon powder. The Shrapnel, or spherical case shot, is a hollow cast-iron shot forming a case which is filled with musket balls. Melted sulphur or resin is poured in to fill up the interstices and secure the balls in their positions. After this is solidified, a portion of the contents is bored out and the vacant cylindrical space filled with powder, the amount of the charge being only sufficient to rupture the case, which has less thickness of metal than the shell, and to disperse the contents. Fire is communicated to the charge by the means employed for exploding the shell. The Shrapnel shot, so called from the name of its inventor, an officer of the British artillery, produces the same effect as the canister, and can be used for much greater distances. It takes its designa tion from that of the piece. /.././.. V\M.- 1. OllQANIZATlON OF i'lJiLD KATT£K1ES. CHARGES FOR SPHERICAL CASE SHOT. 13 33-pdr. Z4-pdr. 12-p4r. e-pdr. Number of musket balls Bursting charge of powder oz. Weight of shot, loaded lbs. 245 1-4 32 175 1-2 24 76 1- 11-77 37 0-5 6-55 FUZE. (Plate 1.) The Bonuann fuze, so called from the name af its inventor, an officer of the Belgian artillery, is the only kind at present used in the field artillery service. This fuze is a circular metallic disc, about 1'5 inches diameter, and half an inch thick. On the exterior are several turns of a stout thread, which enables the disc to be screwed into the shell. The composition Glling (mealed powder) is compressed in a circular groove near to, and concentric with, the circumference of the disc. The end of the composition communicates by a canal with a small magazine in the centre of the disc. The magazine is filled with powder, and slightly closed on the lower side so as to yield in that direc- tion to the explosion. The composition is securely protected from moisture or accidental ignition by a covering of soft metal, on which is legibly marked the time graduations in seconds and parts of a second. Commencing at the entrance to the maga- zine, on the left end of the composition, the first mark, a short one, is for I of a secoud ; the next, one dot, or the figure 1, is for 1 second; the next, a short mark, for 1^ seconds; the next, a long mark, 1^ seconds; the next, a short mark, 1| seconds; the next, two dots, or the figure 2, is for 2 seconds ; and so on in suc- cession up to 5^ seconds, which is the longest time for which these fuzes are constructed. As the fuze exposes considerable surface to the shock of move- ment, it is sustained within the shell by a thick iron plate, per- forated through the centre so as to permit the passage of the flame from the fuze into the interior of the shell when the maga- zine explodes. This plate is screwed into an orifice prepared for its reception, and 14 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. closes the lower part of the fuze-hole. The metallic fuze is then screwed firmh- into its place, and the projectile is ready for service. The operation of the fuze in service is as follows : the thin covering of metal above the composition is cut at the desired point so as to lay bare the upper surface and expose it to the flame of the discharge. The combustion of the composition occu- pies the assigned time, and then, through the canal already men- tioned, communicates fire to the magazine. The explosion drives the flame downward through the orifice in the iron plate into the interior of the projectile, where it encounters the charge of the latter. The fuze-cutter, a small gouge with a wooden handle, is re- quired to cut the metallic cover and expose the composition. Two fuze-cutters should be supplied to each piece. FRICTION PRIMEKS. The primer is a .' ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. Fixed ammunition laid in two tiers across the box, the pro- jectiles alternating witli the cartridges at each side, those of the upper tier resting on those of the lower, and not on the cartridges. Spare stores in vacant spaces on the ammunition. All packed in tow. FIELD CARRIAGES. All field carriages consist of two parts — the body or main por- tion of the carriage, and the Umber or front part, to which the horses are attached. These parts are so connected as to be readily detached and separated from each other. Gun-carriages, (Plates 8 and 9.) There are three gun-car- riages for field artillery, viz.: — One for the 6-pounder gun and the 12-pounder howitzer. One for the 24-pounder howitzer. One for the 12-pi)under gun and tho 32-pouader howitzer. The 12-pounder light gun is for the present mounted on the 24-pounder howitzer carriage, modified slightly for the purpose. A special carriage will probably be adopted for it. The parts of these carriages are all similar, differing only in their dimensions. Caissons, (Plates 12 and 13.) All caissons are of the same external forms and dimensions. Battery wagons, (Plates 14 and 15,) are of the same ex- ternal forms and dimensions. The one which accompanies tho battery differs in its equipment from that of the field park, and also in its external arrangements and contents. Travelling forges, (Plates 16 and 17.) The remarks as to the forms, dimensions, and equipments of the battery wagons, apply also to the forges for the field batteries and parks. Limbers, (Plates 10 and 11.) The same limber is used for all field carriages. The limber chests of the gun-carriage and caisson contain ammunition and equipments for the service of the piece ; those of the forge and battery wagon contain tools and stores for shoeing and repairs. Wheels. There are two numbers of wheels for field carriages, OHOANIZATION OF FIELD BATTEHIES. 17 viz.: No. 1, for the ^-pounder gun-carriage, the caisson, the forge, the baltery wagon, and for the limbers of all field ear- riageB. No. 2, for the 1 2-pounder gun-carriage and ii-pounder hourilzer, or light l2-pounder gun-carriage. These wheels are of the same form and height, and they fit on the same axletree-arm ; they differ only in the dimensions of their parts, and consequently in strength and weight. Ammunition chests, (Plate 2.) The same aramanition chest is adapted to the limber and to the caisson. The interior ar- rangement varies with the calibre and description of the piece and the ammunition to be used. The principal divisions are desig- nated as the right half and the left half to a person facing the front, or lock-side of the chest. The smaller divisions in each half perpendicular to the sides are designated as the first, second, third, etc., from the principal partition, each way; the divisions parallel to the sides are designated as the front, middle, and rear divisions. Chest for %-poundertOun. Eight partitions, four in each half, perpendicular to the sides of the chest, and sliding in grooves made for the purpose. All the divisions of the right half, except the fifth, are provided with two bolsters each, for spherical case shot : the bolsters are attached to the partitions by screws ; the wooden strips which form the grooves, the linings, and the props, for sliells and spherical case, are secured with copper nails. One tray, for holding "equipments, rests on the partitions in the left half of the chest. Three finger holes are bored in the inside of the ends, to lift it by ; and a hole Is bored through the middle of the bottom to let the air pass when the tray is lifted out. Chest for light \2-pounder Gun. Six partitions, three in each half, perpendicular to the sides : four of the divisions are provided with bolsters for shells and spherical ease shot ; and one division is separated from the rest by partitions of sufficient height to suit that of the canisters. One tray, for equipments, in the left half, as in the 6-pounder chest. Chest for \'i-pounder Oun. Six partitions, three in each half, perpendicular to the sides. Four bolsters for spherical case 3 B 2 IS OROAXIZATIO.N OF FIKLD BATXEKIES. shut. One division is prepared for canisters, as in tbe light 1'2-pounder gun. One tray for equipments, in tlie left half. Oicst for 1-2-pounder Howitzer. Six partitions, three in each half, perpendicular to the sides. Twenty-one bolsters for the lower tier of shells and spherical case shot. They are cupped to receive the balls, and have holes bored through the bottom for the fazes to lie in. They are placed in the bottom of the c;.i;.'>t, three in each division, except the division prepared for the canisters. Tvpenty-eight props, for the upper tier of shells and spherical case, four in each division, except that for the canisters. 8ix props for canisters iu the iirst division, right half. (Jhcd for 2i-pounJer Howitzer. Eight linings, two in each of the front and rear divisions, fastened to the ends of the chest and to the principal partitions. Four long partitions, two in (.•ach half, parallel to the sides of the chest. Two short partitions for cantaltrti, in the rear division of the right half. Seven short partitions for shells and spherical case shot; two in each of the front divisions, two in the rear divisiun^f the left half, and one in the middle division of the right half: each of these partitions is formed of two pieces which slip into grooves, one over the other. Tliirly-three hohiers for shells and spherical case, in the two front divisions — the left rear division, and the right middle division : they are so placed as to support two tiers of shot and shell. Chest for S2-pounder Howitzer. Six long partitions, three in each half; one parallt 1 to the ends, and two parallel to the sides of the chest. Four short partitions, one in the front and rear divisions of each half, made in two pieces, and fastened as in the 24-pounder howitzer chest. Twenty-one holsters for sheila and Shrapnel shot in the front and rear divisions, left half; the rear division, right half; and on the right of the front division, right half; they are arranged as in the 24-pounder howitzer chest, so as to support two tiers of shot and shells. OHGANIZATION OP FIELD BATTERIES. 19 AMMUNITION CAEBIED IN EACH CHEST. XIHD. No. Weight. 1 Place. Fob 6-podndeb avs. Shot, fixed 25 20 5 2 / 'J 1-5 8- Ibt. 190 140 42 2-5 ■6 •4 ■6 In the left half. In Ist, 2d, 8d, and 4th di- visions, right half. In 5th division, right half. On the spherical case. In tube pouches, or bun- dles in the tray. "1 On the ammunition in / right half. Cftnisters, fixed Spare carlridges 1^ lbs. Friction primers Slow-match yards. Port- fires 876-1 Fob liqht 12-poundeb qun. Shot, fixed 12 12 4 4 2 48 2 4 184-8 176-4 48-7 67-6 5- -4 -5 •7 In 2.1, 3d, and 4th divi- sions, left half. In 1st, 2d, and 3d divi- sions, right half. In 1st division, left half. In 4th division, right half. On the spherical case. In tube pouches, or in the tray. \ On the ammunition, right / half. Shells fixed * Canisters, fixed Spare cartridges 2J lbs. Slow-match yards. Port-fires 484-1 Fob 12-poundeb qun. Shot, fixed 20 8 4 2 48 2 4 308- 117-6 67-6 5- -4 -5 •7 In left half, and 4th di- vision, right half. In 1st and 2d divisions, right half. In 3d division, right half. On the spherical case. In tube pouches, or in the 'ray. "1 On the ammunition in / right half. Oanistera. iixed ■•. Spare cartridges 2} lbs. Slow-match yards. 499 8 20 ORGANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. AMMUNITION CAERIED IN EACH CEESI— (Continued.) KINS. No ■Weight. Flue. Fob 12-pou Shells, fixed Spherical ca Canisters, fij- 1DEB HOWITZER. se, fixed 15 20 4 60 !■', a 12 rf 3 ^3 2 8B o 4 lbs. 157-5 278- 47-4 •5 -4 •6 In 2d, 3d, and 4th divi- sions, right half. In left half. In 1st division, right half. In tube pouches, or in bun- dles on canisters, etc. > On the canisters. rnd Slow-match. Port-fires ... yards. 479-4 Fob 24-pouNDEa howitzer. Shells, strapped Spherical case, strajpoJ Canisters.. .- 225-6 197-1 63-8 54- 5-4 •3 •5 •7 In left half. In front and middle di- visions, right half. In rear divisions of right half. 12 in mid. divis., left half; 9 in mid. divis., right half; 2 on canisters. On canisters I As for 12-pdr. howitzer. Cartridges.. • Friction prin Slow-match. 'small charge.... large charge.... aers vnrri J Port-fires 547-4 Fob 82-poc^ Shells, strap Spherical ca Canisters DEE HOWITZER, ped 6 1 T, I •.24 2 4 196-8 196-8 28-5 46-5 8-9 •2 •5 ■7 Front and rear divisions of left half. Rear divisions, and right front div. of right half. Left front division, right half. ■ 1st division in each half. In tube pouches, or in middle division. ■ In middle divisions. ie, strappcJ Cartridges.. |™''ll<=''"ee.... ° (.large charge.... Friction primers Slow-match yards. Port-fires 473-4 (J.PtLr: (ju.rt. P'.lrvniinti. .J J i)^ OTlJLJlljIppilfl /J /'f/r/j/,/1 E/t'i'iit/nfL . V l-tfJ-^J d j:i',Ii ii.'wiixii I 3 ^ I n ll'll: ,^j-j-ji :!>) -JTl' KMc:^^ ^" 2^^0 2-'tt:h:ILnv,tx,r B C L,F. B Bl^. ,V1' I'.hilli'Uitxri /•/ /// :dd)^ O, ■J; O : ; J J J .i^:^ ; ;j.y .^i;) B 6 "1 J J '^© OaOANIZATION OF FIELD BATTERIES. •21 In packing ammanition in the chests, care must be taken to place the rounds in their proper position, and then to secure them from movement by filling all the void spaces closely with packing- tow. The tow shonld be inserted in small portions, and packed down with a straight, smooth stick, prepared for the purpose. When ammnnition is not firmly secured, the shaking of the car- riage soon injures the powder, and renders the firing uncertain. IMPLEMENTS AND Enl'U^MENTS FUR FIBLD PIECES. KK'ID. No. Weight. Flut. FOR A GUN CABRIAQE. Sponges and rammers SoonfiTC covers 2 '> i 2 1 1 1 >> o 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 O 1 o 1 1 11.6 •28 3^6 14^5 10^ 18^ 1- 16- 8-72 1^90 •6 •08 •85 •60 •50 •02 •08 ■10 ■08 54 ■ For 6-pounder — 9 lbs. • On the carriage. On the limber. In the implement traya, or in the other vacant spaces in the ammunition chest. In the tube pouches. Strapped on the am'tion chest. Handspikes Sponge bucket Prolonffe Water buckets, leather Gunner's haversacks Tube Douches Ounners's nincers Tow hook Thumbstalls Gunner's gimlet POa A CAISSON. Felling axe 1 1 1 1 1 1 o 2 ] o 1 0- 4-75 6 50 7-25 25-30 180- ■5 1-2 ~' 1«- 54^ In the places provided for them on the caisson body. in limber chest. One in limber chest, one in rear chest. 1 On the limber. Strapped on limber chest. Watering buckets, leather. Tarpaulin, large 22 ORGANIZATION OP FIELD BATTERIES. WEIGHTS OF GUN CARRIAGES AND CAISSONS EQUIPPED FOR FIELD SERVICE. DK&taSATlOlf. rOK OOM. FOR HOWITZERS. 12-pdr, I2-pdr. (light.) e-pdr. 32-rdr. 21-p(ir. 12-pdr. OUN CABBIAQU. Gun lbs. 1,757 788 892 835 360 182 505 89 54 lbs. 1,227 736 392 335 360 182 490 89 54 lbs. 884 540 860 835 360 185 381 86 54 lbs. 1,890 783 392 836 360 192 480 89 54 lbs. 1,318 736 892 385 860 198 564 89 64 lbs. 788 640 860 836 860 206 486 86 64 Gun carriage without Two wheels Limber body without wheels Two wheels Implements and equip- ments Tarpaulin Total weight 4,457 3,865 3,185 4,575 4,086 3,214 Number of rounds on each limber 32 32 50 15 23 89 CAISSON. Two wheels lbs. 432 860 364 1,010 835 860 182 505 254 54 lbs. 482 360 864 980 335 860 182 490 254 54 3,811 lbs. 432 360 370 762 335 360 185 881 254 54 lbs. 432 360 384 960 335 860 192 480 254 54 lbs. 432 360 89G 1,108 835 360 198 554 264 64 lbs. 432 860 412 970 336 860 206 485 254 54 Two ammunition chests Ammunition packed in Limber Two wheels Ammunition chest Ammunition packed in Implements and spare parts, Total weight 3,850 3,493 3,811 4,051 3,868 Number of rounds on cais- 96 96 150 45 69 117 BQUIPMENT OF FIELD nATTEBIES. 23 EQUIPMENT OF TRATELLING FORGES AND BATTERY WAGONS. One forge and one battery wagon accompany each field battery. They are furnished with the tools and materials required for shoeing horses and for ordinary repairs and preservation of car- riages and harness. Other forges and battery wagons, equipped for the general ser- vice of the army, accompany the field park, which contains the general supplies of ordnance stores. The forge for the field battery ia designated by the letter A. The forge for the field park " " " B. The battery wagon for the field battery " " C. The battery wagon for the field park " " D. Equipment of a Forge for a Field Battery. INTERIOR ARRANGEMENT OF THE LIMBER CHEST. The chest is marked : Forqe A. There are five boxes for tools and stores ; one shoeing box, and one can for oil. The boxes are marked : A, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. They are made of white pine, -15 inches thick, with loose covers of the same thickness; the covers have three | inch holes bored in each end, to lift them by. Two handles of double leather are nailed on the inside of the ends of the boxes, so as not to interfere with the covers. The sides and ends of all the boxes for the forges and battery wagons are dovetailed together, and fastened with 8d. nails; the covers' are made with clamps on the ends. EXTEIUOR DIMENSIONS OF THE BOXES FOR FORGE A. DEStO.VATIO.y. Length. Width. Depth. Weight. Romarkj. in. in. in. lb,. A.Nos.l &8, 17-8 13-25 75 8-2.3 A, No. 2 17-8 i3:;5 7-6 9-75 A partition at 4-5 in. from one end. A, No. 4 28-5 8- G-5 8- A partition for oil can, at 5-25 in. from one end. A, No 5 39 8 9-8 6fi 14-5 Shoeing box.. 10-5 8- 65 4-7 2i EQUIPMENT OF llJiLD BATTERIES. The oil can is made of tin, to hold 1 quart; it is 5 inches square and 4 inches high, with a neck for a cork, 1 inch diameter and 5 inches high, near one corner. Weight 0'9 pounds. It is marked : A, Sperm oil. Boxes Nos. 1, 2, and 3, are placed in the bottom of the chest; !Xo. 1 against the left hand; No. 2 in the middle. No. 4 is placed on top of Nos. 1 and 2, against the left end and the back of the chest ; the division for the oil can on the left hand. No. 5 is placed on top of Nos. 1, 2, and 3, against the front of the chest. The shoeing box is placed on No. 3, against the right end and the back of the chest. The tools and stores in all the boxes, and in the forges and battery wagon.s, are securely packed with tow. CONTENTS OF THE LIMBER CHEST OF FORGE A. SHITQS TOOLS A.VD STORES. Horseshoes, Nos. 2 and 3 lbs. Horseshoes, Nos. 2 and 3 ..lbs. Horseshoe nails, Nos. 2 and 3 ..lbs. Washers and nuls, No. 2 Washers and nuts. No. 3 Washers and nuts. No. 4 Nails, No. 1, C lb. Nails, No. 2, C lbs. Tire bolts Keys for ammunition chests Linch washers Linch pins Chains, Nos. 1 and 2 ft. Cold shut /Slinks, No. 3 Cold shut Slinks, No. 5 Hand cold chisels Hardie Files, assorted, with handles Buttress Hand punches, round and square, Carried forward 100 100 50 30 10 4 1 1 20 6 8 12 2 5U 12 1 12 1 2 Weight. lbs. 100-00 10000 50-00 5-25 3-20 2-15 1-00 100 5-00 1-80 7-30 837 1-54 2-50 2 00 2-00 0-75 10 00 1-50 2-00 307-36 Box A, I. Box A, 3. Box A, 2 ; large div'n. In Box A, 2. 91-11 lbs. In Box A, 4. 28-52 lbs. EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTEEIES. 25 CONTENTS OF LIMBER CHEST— (Conrtn««rf.) BHtTII'S TOOLS AND 8T0BKS. Brought forward Screw wrench Hand screw-driver Hand vice Pair smith's callipers PafrBdies'.}NoB'.2.8.and4 Wood screws, 1 in., No. 14..gro8s. Quart can of sperm oil Fire shovel Poller Split broom Hand hammer Riveting hammer Nailing hammer Sledge hammer. Chisels for hot iron Chisels for cold iron Smith's tongs Fore punch Creaser Fuller Nail claw Round punch Tap wrench Die stock Nave bands, developed Tire bands, developed Shoeing hammer Pair pincers Rasps, (12 inches) Shoeing knife Toe knife Pritchel Nail punch Clinching iron Oil stone Leather aprons Iron square- Padlock Tar bucket Boxes Tow for packing. Total No. Weight. Ibt. 807-86 2-42 0-32 1-00 0-40 1-60 1-83 2-10 2-70 8 06 1-90 1-25 8-50 1-05 1-80 10-00 8 00 8-00 16-00 1-00 100 2-40 5-00 2-10 8-76 6-25 11-75 2-75 0-82 2 00 2-16 0-83 0-30 0-85 0-80 1-00 1-50 8 00 2-00 0-50 7-00 53 45 500 480-38 In Box A, 4. 28-62 lbs. In Box A, 6. 80-05 lbs. In shoeing box. 12 75 lbs. {Fastened on inside of the chest cover with two copper clamps. On the chest. On its hook. 26 EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES. CONTENTS OF THE FORGE BODY, A. Box A, 6, of the same dimensions as A, 1, is carried in the iron room. To pnt this box in, or take it out, loosen the thumb nuts and raise the rear of the bellows an inch. TOOLS ASJ> STOB£S. Water bucket, wood. Anvil Vice Watering bucket, leather Bituminous coal lbs. Coal shoTel Padlock Horseshoes, Nos. 2 and 3 lbs. Square iron, } in. and ^ in.... lbs. Flat iron, 1} in. X| in., 1 in.X Jin.andljin. X i in..lbs. Round iron, | in lbs. Cast steel, f in. square lbs. English blister steel lbs. Box Tow Total, exclusive of vice., 1 1 1 1 250 1 1 100 100 50 50 5 5 1 Weight.. lb>. 10-00 100-00 29-00 8-00 250-00 4-75 050 100-00 10000 50-00 50 00 5-00 5 00 8-25 2 00 693-50 On its hook. On the fire-place. Fixed on the stock of the carriage. On the vice. I In the coal box. On coal box. Box A, C, in iron room. In the iron room. The bars not more than 3 feet long; the square iron in 2 bundles. Note. — 100 lbs. of horseshoes, assorted, contain 90 shoes. 1 lb. horseshoe nails. No. 8, contains 140 nails. 1 lb. horseshoe nails. No. 2, contains 112 nails. To put the bellows in its place: Remove the coal box from the back of the bellows-house ; take out the two stay plates at the lower ends of the rabbets in the braces ; put the projecting ends of the upper bellows' arm in the rabbets, and slide them up until the ends of the lower arm come into their places ; put on the stay plates, and fasten them down with the thumb nuts. Screw the brass elbow pipe into its place, through the hole in the sheet iron front of the bellows-house ; put in the copper pipe, and screw up the collar which connects it with the elbow pipe. EQUIPMENT OP FIELD BATTERIES. 2T Equipment of a Battery Wagon for a Field Battery. INTERIOR ARRANGEMENT OP LIMBER CHEST. The chest is marked : Battekt wagon, C. The tools and stores are carried in four boxes, marked C, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively, and in one oil can. The boxes are made of white pine -75 inch thick, with leather handles inside, and loose covers, like those of the limber chest of Forge A. The covers of Nos. 1 and 2 are -75 inch thick ; those of Nob. 3 and 4 are '5 inch thick. EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS OF THE BOXES. DEBIQNATION. Length. Width. Depth. Weight C, No. 1 C, No. 2, C, No. 8 C, No. 4 inchet. 17-8 26-5 89-8 89-8 ineha. 18-26 17-8 9-8 8- meha. 7-5 7-6 6-25 6-25 Ibt. 8-25 17-5 12-6 11- No. 3 has a partition, at 5 '25 from one end for the oil can. No. 4 has two partitions perpendicular to the sides, making three divisions 15-8 inches, 10 inoheB, and 11 inches long, respec- tively. The oil can is like that for the limber chest of Forge A, and is marked : C, Sperm oil. Boxes Nos. 1 and 2 occupy the bottom of the chest; No. 1 against the left end. Nos. 3 and 4 are placed on top of Nos. 1 and 2; No. 3 against the rear of the chest. 28 EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES. CONTENTS OF LIMBER CHEST FOR BATTERY WAGON, C. TOOLS ASD STORES. carbiaoe-makee's tools. Hand saw Tenon saw, (14 in.) Jack plane Smoothing plane Brace, with 124 bits Spoke shave Gauge Plane irons Saw set Rule, (2 feet) Gimlets Compasses pair, Chalk line Brad awls Scriber Saw files, (4J in.) Wood files, (10 in.) Wood rasp, (10 in ) Trying square, (8 in.) Hand screw-driver Oil stone Broad axe Hand axe Claw hatchet Claw hammer Pincers, (small) pair. Table vice Framing chisels, (1 in. and 2 in.). Firmer chisels, (| in. and IJ in).. Framing gouges, (1 in. and IJ in.) Augers and handles, (^ in., f in., and fin.) Screw wrench ^with handles.. Felling axe 1 Adze J Frame saw Quart can of sperm oil.. saddleb's tools and stobes. Mallet Clam Carried forward- No. 12 Weight lbs. 4-00 1-50 4-15 1-80 4-35 0-30 0-30 1-05 0-25 0-14 0-95 0-18 0-10 17 0-15 0-87 1-12 0-40 0-60 0-32 1-50 6-00 5-00 2 00 1-50 1-06 3-80 3-00 1-00 2-60 2-35 2-42 6 00 3-30 4-50 270 1'75 5 00 Place. 7818 I Fastened to the in- J side of chest cover. In Box C, 1. 17-20 lbs. In Box C, 2. 32-23 lbs. In Box C, 8. 28-25 lbs. EQUIPMENT OP FIELD BATTERIES. 29 LIMBER CHEST OF BATTERY WAGON, C— {Continued.) — »0t» AlTD 8I0EIB. No. Weight PUce. Brought forward.. ■addhe's tools and 8 Hammer Ibt. 78-18 0-65 009 0-28 0-47 1-54 0-14 0-08 0-75 0-22 0-75 0-22 0-12 0-15 0-06 001 2-00 8-00 050 5 00 2-00 100 076 0-60 0-18 0-20 0-50 7 00 49-25 7-00 In Box C, 4. 20-66 lbs. On its hook. TOBXS. 1 1 1 1 1 1 100 12 2 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 8 8 6 2 8 8 1 2 2 1 1 4 Shoe knife Holf round knife Sand stone Rule, (2 feet) Needles Awls and handles Punches Pliers Claw tool Creoser Thimbles Strap awl Beeswax Blaok wax Bristles lbs. lbs. oz Shoe thread Patent thread , Buokles, (assorted, -75 in. in-) Taoks ....lbs. lbs. to 1-5 ....doz. M. Shoe knives 1 Scissors Padlock .pairs. Tar bucket Total 162-59 c2 30 EQUlrMKXT OF FIELD BATTERIES. INTEniOR ARRAXGEMENT OF WAGON BODY, C. A. TILL, 9 inches wide and 9 5 inches deep, is placed at the back or right side of the wagon body. An AXE RACK extends along the whole length of the body, on the left side, 11 inches from the bottom; it is 2 inches deep and 1-5 inches wide, and is fastened to the side by the middle rivets of the side studs, and by 5 wood screws. The rack has notches, to hold three axes, a hatchet, and three hand bills. Four boxes, for stores, marked: C, Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8. One box, marked : C, Candles. EXTERIOK DIMENSION'S OF BOXES FOR WAGON BODY, C. DESia NATION. C, No3. 5 & 6 C, No. 7 C, No. 8 Candle box. Length. Width. Depth, Weight. incha 2;3-5 inchet. 18-5 20-25 inches. 11-25 14- lb,. 17-5 28- 13- 13- 5- 6- i 2-85 11- G-5 5-5 No covers... \ or hard wood, 0-75 Loose cover, / ^^°^ thick. Div. into White pine, 0-625 Inch thick, with covers, parts I. hinges, and looks. Seven tin cans; 2 marked: C, Neat's-foot oil; 1 marked: C, Linseed OIL ; 1: C, Turpentine; 2: C, Olive paint; 1: C, Black paint. DIMENSIONS OF CANS FOR WAGON BODY, C. KI.VD. Capacity. Diam. Height. Weight. Remarks. in. in. Ibg. For neat's-foot oil. 2 gals. 8- 11-5 2-2 "I Rounded tops and For linseed oil and I necks for corks. turpentine. Igal. e- 10- 1-37 J f Flat tops ; opening For olive paint 25 lbs. 9-75 10-25 3- i covered with a piece For black paint.... 5 lbs. / - 8-5 1-5 ( of tin, soldered on. Two kegs, for grease ; exterior dimensions : Diameter at the bilge 10-5 inches Diameter at the heads 9-75 " Height 12-5 " Weight„ 6 lbs. EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES. 31 rONTKNTS OF THE WAGON BODY, C. Box C, No. 5, is placed on the bottom of the wagon, next to the pile of harness which occupies the rear part of the body. Box No. 6 is on the top of No. 5; No. 1 on the bottom of the wagon, in front of No. 5 ; No. 8 on top of No. 7. The candle box in No. 6. TOOLS ASB STORES. Linseed oil gal. Spirits turpentine.. ..gal. Olive paint lbs. Black paint lbs. Paint brushes Spm. or wax candles, lbs. Rammer heads Sponge heads Sponges Priming wires Gunner's gimlets Lanyards for friction tubes Cannon Spikes Dark lanterns Common lanterns Neal's-foot oil gals Grease lbs Nail3,('ta,Gd,8d,10d,)lbs. Felling axes.. Claw hatchet . Hand bills Caisson stock. Rammers and sponges . Spokes.., Fellies... Grindstone, 14 in.X -1 i°- Arbor and crank for do.. J Carried forward Weight. lb». 917 8-77 se- es 8 00 7-85 2-90 3-20 8 00 0-24 0-24 0-40 0-30 3- 4-60 32-80 60- 20- 35- 13-5 72- 160- 50- 6-5 576 97 In 1 tin can. " 1 do. " 2 do. " 1 do. In Box C, 6. 80-44 lbs. In candle box. In Box C, 6. 28-78 lbs. " 2 kegs.. Box C, 8. 92-80 lbs. - In the axe rack. Under the till, against the side and rear of the wagon. On the caisson stock, against rear end. On the bottom; piled lengthwise against tlie front end. On the spokes, crosswise. 'I On the fellies, against the left / side of the wagon. 32 EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES. CONTENTS OP THE WAGON BODY", C— [Continued.) TOOLS AND 8T0K£S. Brought forward., Screw jacks Wheel traces Leading traces. Collars Girths Whips , Bridles Halters Halter chains... Hame straps Spare nose bags , Sash cord pieces. Slow match yds. Elevating screw.. Pole yoke , Harness leather side. Bridle leather do. Prolonge Scythes Scythe stones. Pick axes and handles.., Corn sacks Tarpaulins, 5 feet square. Reaping hooks Scythe snaths.. Spare stock for battery wagon Padlock Watering bucket Forage Boxes Tow Total., Weight. lbs. 576-97 75- 47-5 67-5 27-5 11- 8- 18- 21- 15-5 4-5 18-5 10- 15-75 12-25 25- 18- 9- 6- 30- 13- 20- 18- 8-85 12- 90- 0-5 8- 69- 24-5 1288-82 On the fellies, against the front and the till. In a pile occupying 80 inches at the rear end of the wagon, between the left side and the caisson stock, and up to the top of the till ; the collars piled on each other, from the bottom. i. On the harness. On box No. 7, to the left of No. 8. > On the pile of harness. r Under the till, in front of the .j pile of harness, and against (, the caisson stock. On box No. 7, in front of No. 8. In the till, against the front end. In the curve of the scythes. In the till ; the bits against the rear end. Between the spade handles. On the scythes. On the corn sacks, against front end. Fastened to the ridge pole with a wooden clamp and u leather strap. Fastened to the ridge pole with two leather straps and buckles. In the spare stock stirrup. Tied to the forage rack. In the forage rack Exclusive of forage. EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERtES. 33 Spare gun-carriage stocks, splinter bars, axle-trees, etc. form parts of the equipments of Battery wagon D. When ordered on service beyond the reach of the field park, these articles, together with other spare parts which may be needed and cannot be readily made from ordinary material, such, for instance, as spare hounds, forks, middle and side rails, and cross-bars for caissons, assembling bars, spare lock chain, etc., should accompany the battery. (See Ordnance Manual.) For other than ordinary repairs, resort most generally be had to the field park. For these occasioned by battle, which may be extensive, such resort is gei erally imperative, as the battery must be put in immediate order for service either in pursuit of an enemy, or to cover a retreat. When separated from the park, it is therefore necessary that the captain should see not only that his battery is provided with these parts, but that they are ironed and fitted, so that no time will be lost in completing his repairs. COMPOSITION AND PREPARATION OF PAINTS. Paint is generally furnished to batteries, mixed and ready for use. When not supplied, and the materials can be procured, paints may be prepored as follows : The proportions are given for 100 parts by weight of prepared colors, etc., when not otherwise designated. A gallon of linseed oil weighs 7-5 lbs. Spirits of turpentine 7-26 " Japan varnisli 7- " Sperm oil 7-12 " Neat's-foot oil 763 " Black Paint. Lampblack 28 Litharge -. 1 Japan varnish 1 Linseed oil, boiled 73 Spirits turpentine 1 Grind the lampblack in oil ; mix it with the oil, then grind the litharge in oil and add it, stirring it well into the mixture. The varnish and turpentine are added last The paint is used for the iron-work of carriages. 3 34 EQUIPMENT OF FIELD BATTERIES, Olive Paste. Teliow ochre, pulTeriied 68- Lampblack 1'^ Boiled oil 37- Spirits turpentine 0-4 Make a thick paste with the ochre and oil, in a paint pot, and with the lampblack and oil in another ; grind them together in small portions, and keep the mixture in a tin vessel. Liquid Olive Color. Olive paste 61 '5 Boiled oil 29-5 Spirits turpentine 6-5 Dryings • 8-6 Japan varnish 2* Stirred together in a paint pot. QUANTITY OF PAINT REQUIRED FOR A CARRIAGE. KIND or OXaRlAOX. Field gun-carriage and limber, with implements.. Caisson, with limber and implements,, etc Forge, with limber Battery wagon, do Casemate carriage and chassis, with implements., Barbette carriage and chassis, with implements.. color. ""»"• lbs. 6 8 6 7 7 6 Ibi. 10 15 10 13 14 11 Iba. 0-75 0-8 1- 0-9 0-75 1- A priming of lead color and 2 coats of olive color are applied to new wood-work, and 1 coat of lead color and 1 of black, to the iron-work. Paint for Tarpaulins. A square yard takes 2 pounds for 3 coats. 1. — Olive. — Liquid olive color 100 Beeswax 6 Spirits turpentine 6 Dissolve the beeswax in the spirits of turpentine, with a gentle heat, and mix the paint warm. 2. — Add 12 ounces of beeswax to 1 gallon of linseed oil, and boil it two hours ; prime the cloth with this mixture, and use the same, in place of boikd oil, for mixing the paint. Qive 2 coats of paint. EQUIPMENT or FIZLB BATTERIES. 35 WEIGHTS OF FOKGES AND BATTERY WAGONS EQUIPPED FOR FIELD SERVICE. DUiaHATIOll, For the battery. FOBOK. Bod; complete, without wheels Two wheels Anvil and water buckets Stores in iron room Stores in coal box Limber body, without wheels Two wheels Limber chest, empty Stores and tools on the limber Total weight battehy waqon. Body complete, without wheels Two wheels Stores in wagon body Limber body, without wheels Two wheels , Limber chest, empty Stores and tools on the limber Total weight, (exolusive of forage,) a,. 997 860 118 820 256 885 860 158 480 8,888 Ibi. 910 860 1,289 835 360 158 162 8,674 Vor tha park. lb: 997 860 118 465 255 83S 860 158 832 8,370 Ibt. 910 360 2,688 886 860 158 209 4,915 HORSES. The number of horses required in a battery varies with the description of the battery and the nature of its service. Under ordinary circumstances, when horses can be procured from the country in which the operations are conducted, or supplied from ihe depots, no greater number should be attached to the battery than experience has proved to . be necessary to keep it efficient The carriages should be kept fully and well horsed; for when one of a team is injured or inferior in strength, additional labor is thrown object, artillerymen should be frequently practiced in estimating distances by the eye alone, and verifying the estimate afterwards, either by pacing the distance, or by actual measurement with a tape-line or chain, until they acquire the habit of estimating them correctly. Shells are intended to burst in the object aimed at : spherical case shot are intended to burst from fifty to seventy-five yards short of it. Shell or spherical case firing, for long ranges, is less accurate than that of solid shot. At high elevations a solid shot will range farther than a shell or spherical case shot of the same diameter fired with an equal charge. But at low elevations, the shell or spherical case will have a greater initial velocity, and a longer range. If, however, the charges be proportioned to the weights of the projectiles, the solid shot will in all cases have tlie longest range. The velocity or range of a shot is not affected in any appreciable degree by checking the recoil of the carriage, by using a tight wad, or by different degrees of ramming. The principal causes which disturb the true flight of the pro- jectile may be simply stated as follows : 1st. If the wheels of the carriage are not upon the same hori- zontal plane, the projectile will deviate towards the lowest side of the carriage. 2d. If the direction of the wind is across the line of fire, devia- tions in the flight of the projectile will be occasioned, and in pro- portion to the strength of the wind, the angle its direction makes with the line of fire, and the velocity of the projectile. D 2 42 POIXTlffO AND RANGES. 3J. If the centre of gravity of the projectile be not coincident with the centre of figure, the projectile will deviate towards the heaviest side, that is, in the same direction that the centre of gravity of the projectile, while resting in the piece, lies with re- gard to the centre of figure. Therefore, if a shot be placed in the piece so that its centre of gravity is to the right of the centre of the ball, the shot will deviate towards the right; and vice versa. If the centre of gravity be above the centre of figure, the range will be increased; if below, it will be diminished. Should an enemy's cavalry be at a distance of 1000 yards from the battery it is about to charge, it will move over the first 400 yards at a walk, approaching to a gentle trot, in about four and a half minutes ; it passes over the next 400 yards at a round trot, in a little more than two minutes; and over the last 200 yards at a gallop, in about half a minute, the passage over the whole dis- tance requiring about seven minutes. This estimate will gene- rally be very near the truth, as the ground is not always even, nor easy to move over. Many losses arise from the fire of the artil- lery and from accidents, and the forming, and filling up of intervals create disorder; all of which contribute to retard the charge. Now a piece can throw with sufficient deliberation for pointing, two solid shot or three canisters per minute. Each piece of the battery, therefore, might fire nine rounds of solid shot upon the cavalry whilst it is passing over the first 400 yards; two rounds of solid shot and three of canister whilst it is passing over the next 400 yards; and two rounds of canister whilst passing over the last 200 yards — making a total from each gun of eleven round shot and five canisters. To this is added the fire of the support- ing infantry. Care should be taken not to cease firing solid shot too soon, in order to commence with canister. If the effect of the latter be very great on hard, horizontal, or smooth ground, which is with- out obstruction of any kind, it is less in irregular and soft ground, or on that covered with brushwood ; for, if the ground be not favor- able, a large portion of the canister shot is intercepted. A solid shot is true to its direction, and, in ricochet, may hit the second line if it misses the first. POINTtNO AND RAXaES. 43 Solid shot shoald be used from 350 yards upwards : the use of canister should begin at 350 yards, and the rapidity of the fire increase as the range diminishes. In emergencies, double charges of canister may be used at 150 or 160 yards, with a single cartridge. Spherical case ought not, as a general rule, to be used for a less range than 500 yards; and neither spherical case nor shells should be fired at rapidly advancing bodies, as for instance.cavalry charging. The fire of spherical case and of shells on bodies of cavalry in line or column, and in position, is often very effective. To the destructive effects of the projectiles are added the confusion and disorder occasioned amongst the horses by the noise of their ex- plosion; but neither shells nor spherical case should be fired so rapidly as solid shot. In case of necessity, solid shot may be fired from howitzers. RANGES OF FIELD GUNS AND HOWITZERS. The range of a shot or shell in this table is the distance from the piece to the point at which the first graze of the ball is made on horizontal ground, the piece being mounted on its appropriate field carriage. The range of a spherical case shot is the distance at which the shot bursts near the ground in the time given, thus showing the elevation, and the length of fuze required for certain distances. DE80RIPTI0N Of PIECE. Charge. ProjootUe. Elevation. Rftoge. Bemuki. lb>. o / yards. 6-PDR. QUN 1-25 Shot. 1 820 675 %/ A M^ V^9 \JI1J*^ «>>>«••« ••••• i( o 870 " 3 1,140 " 4 1,250 " 5 1,625 1.26 Sph.case 1 600 Time 2 seconds. shot. 1 45 700 '• L'i " ■ . o 800 • ' 3 " " 2 45 900 .. 3i .. 11 3 1,000 •• 3J '■ ■ 1 8 IS 1,100 " 4 " " 4 1,200 " 5 44 POINTING AND BANQES. RANGES OF FIELD GUNS AND HOWITZERS— (Conrtnu«rf.) DBSOBimON or PIEOK. Charge. Projectile. MoTatlon. Bauge. Romarka. Ibt. o / yards. LI08T 12-PDB. QUN.. 2-5 Shot. 1 325 620 li 2 3 875 1,200 it 4 6 1,820 1,680 2-6 Sph. case 30 800 Time 1 Beoond. shot. 1 560 " If " " 1 30 700 " 2j " " O 730 " 8 " ti 3 960 .. 4 a 8 45 1,130 " 6 " 2-5 Shell. 800 Time J second. II 30 425 " U 11 1 626 " l| " II 1 30 700 ** 2i '* It 2 775 " 2J " If 2 3,0 925 " 3J " If 8 1,075 <( 4 ft II 8 45 1,300 " 5 " 12-FDS. QTJN 2-5 Shot. II 1 850 660 II II 1 30 2 780 900 11 3 1,270 II 4 1,450 (( 6 1,660 2.5 Sph.case 1 600 Time 1| seconds. shot. 1 45 700 " 2| " (1 2 800 " 2| " •' 2 15 900 " 3 (( 2 80 1,000 " H " It 8 1,100 .< 4 .< '* 3 30 1,200 " 4} .. POINTING AND HANQE8. 45 RANGES OF FIELD GUNS AND HOWITZERS— {Con (( (( 1 2 3 4 290 530 780 1,030 1,200 *i 5 1,500 Time 2 seconds. 3-25 Sph. case 1 30 600 1 45 700 (( 21- ** ■2 15 800 <• 8 " 2 -lo 900 " 8 " 8 1,000 " 3 " 8 30 1,100 " i\ " 46 MANAGEMENT OF A BATTERY. ARTICLE FOURTH. INTERIOR ECONOMY AND MANAGEMENT OP A BATTERY. ARTILLERY HORSES. ARTiiiLERT officers should make themselves thorongbly ac- qaainted with the natural history of the horse, and the effects of different modes of treatment, changes of diet, etc. on his system, and powers of endurance. In the field the horse is subjected to so many privations, exposures, changes of food and water, etc., that an officer deficient in such knowledge will either have his battery constantly lacking in efficiency and reliability, or else make large expenditures necessary to provide remounts. Officers should also make themselves acquainted with the best methods of breaking and training horses. Artillery horses are required for quick draught; they should move the carriage, ordinarily, rather by the weight thrown into the collar than by muscular exertion. Description. Age at date of purchase 5 to t years : height, 15 hands 3 inches, allowing a variation of I inch. They should be well broken to harness, free from vice, perfectly sound in every respect, full chested, shoulders sufficiently broad to support the collar, but not too heavy : full barrelled, with broad deep loins ; short coupled, with solid hind quarters ; and their weight as great as is consistent with activity, say from 1100 to 1200 pounds when in good condition. In purchasing, special attention should be directed to the feet, to see that they are perfectly sound, and in good order, with hoofs rather large, and that the horse submits willingly to be shod. Long-legged, loose-jointed, long-bodied, or narrow-chested horses should be at once rejected, as also those which are restive vicious, or too free in harness. MANAOKME.NT OF A BATTEEY. 47 A draaght horse can draw 1600 pounds 23 miles a day, weight of carriage included. Artillery horses should not be required to draw more than 600 pounds each, including the weight of the carriage, bat excluding that of the cannoneers. A. horse travels the distance of 400 yards at a walk, in 4^ minutes; at u trot, in 2 minutes; at a gallop, in 1 minnte. He occupies in the ranks a front of 40 inches, and a depth of 10 feet; in a stall, a front of 5 feet ; at the picket, a front of 3 feet, and a depth of 9 feet. Stalls for artillery stables shoald be 6 feet wide. FORAGE. The daily allowance of oats, barley, and com is 12 pounds; that of hay, 14 pounds; that of straw for bedding, 100 pounds per month. The average weight of good oats is 40 pounds to the bushel ; of barley, 48 pounds; of corn, 50 pounds. The standard bushel of the United States contains 2150'4 cubic inches. A cubic yard contains 21 '69 bushels. A box 16X16-8X8 inches, contains 1 bushel. A box 12X 112X8 inches, contains half a bushel. A box 8 > : 8 -4 X 8 inches, contains 1 peck. Pressed hay weighs 1 1 pounds per cubic foot. Captains of batteries ordered for service on the plains should endeavor to secure daily issues, however small, of grain forage for the draught horses. The labor is excessive, particularly when there are no beaten roads, and is destructive to harnessed horses, which cannot, like saddle horses, be relieved by being dismounted and led for a portion of each day's march : neither can they graze during short halts for rest. Their daily marches are often longer than those of cavalry horses, as they must make detours to head ravines, and avoid other bad grounds which led horses can readily pass over. In a country Intersected by steep hills and ravines, teams must often be doubled, thus doubling their labor and con- suming time, where cavalry finds no difficulty. Average daily marches at the natural rates are, for infantry, 15 miles, performed 48 MANAGEMENT OF A BATTERY. in six hours: for cavalry, 17 miles in six hours: for artillery, 16 miles in ten hours. These distances are given for bodies of troops on the march, each arm moving at its natural rate, in an ordinary country; and the disadvantages of the artillery, as compared with the other arms, are of course greatly increased when troops oper- ate on plains destitute of roads. If a battery is made to con- form its movements to those of infantry or cavalry marching freely, its horses are greatly fatigued by moving at an unnatural gait. If it marches at its own rate, the horses are much longer on the road for equal distances, and have less time for grazing. Besides, if a horse breaks down, more labor is thrown on the rest of the team. Yet, in case of action, the movements must be rapid if the guns are expected to keep up with mounted Indians. Grain should therefore be issued regularly to them, and their strength preserved and economized so far as the nature of this species of service — which is foreign to the object, and unsuitable to the cha- racter of artillery duties — will permit. WATER. The daily allowance for a horse is 4 gallons. Pure, soft running water is the best. When drawn from wells in warm weather, it should, if practicable, be allowed to stand until the chill is taken ofiF before being given to the horses. If this is not practicable, a handful of meal or bran, if it can be procured, should be thrown into each bucket of water. Leather buckets are provided for watering horses on a march. When the water is drawn from wells, or has to be dipped from a stream, much time is consumed in the operation ; it would there- fore be well to have one bucket for each pair of horses. These buckets form part of the equipment of the carriages, and the chief of each carriage is responsible to the chief of the piece that they are returned and properly secured after being used. GENEEAL RULES FOR STABLE MANAGEMENT. The following general rules having been tested by experience, and found to be convenient, are recommended : MANAC.EMENT OF A BATTERY. 49 1. The stable guard will consist of not less tlian three men and a non-commissioned officer. This guard is responsible for the police and order of the stables between stable calls. 2. The stable guard and the stable duty are under the direction of the battery officer of the day, the first sergeant, and the stable sergeant. 3. The men habitually groom their own horses, superintended by their chiefs of pieces. Supernumerary horses may be groomed by recruits, carefully supervised and instructed. The horses of chiefs of pieces are groomed by men of their commands. 4. The horses should be stalled according to their positions in the battery, the teams nearest the doors to be led out first. Their places at the picket rope will be in accordance with the same rule. 6. The grooming should always be. at the picket rope, unless in stormy weather; if done in the stalls, the wisp and brush alone should be used. 6. To strike a horse whilst at the picket rope, or in the stall, is apt to make him vicious; it is strictly prohibited. 7. Horses require gentle treatment. Docile, but bold horses, may be excited to retaliate upon those who abuse them, whereas l)ersistent kindness has often reclaimed vicious ones. 8. Each horse of a team should be groomed about twenty minutes, then at the signal " Lead up," the chief of each piece inspects his horses successively, exacting that the rules laid down under the head of "Grooming" shall have been strictly complied with ; if not, the horse is to be taken back to the picket. 9. At morning stable call, the stable guard, assisted by super- numerary men, police the stables, take up the bedding, (separating that which is soiled for the manure heap,) the remainder to be put out on racks to dry. The stalls are then swept out and the mangers cleaned. 10. The grain may be put in each bin by the stable guard. A box on wheels for the oats is moved in front of the stall, and two allowance measures enables the distribution to be made with rapidity. The hay is fed by the stable men after their horses are led in, receiving it from the stable sergeant. If practicable, the 4 E 60 MANAGEMENT OF A BATTERY. oats are to be fanned and the hay shaken before being given to the horses. 11. At the afternoon stable call, when the horses hare left the stalls, the stable is policed and the bedding laid down, fi-esh clean straw being spread on the top of the old. Great care should be taken that the bed be not in ridges, but soft and even, the thickest part towards the head of the stall. The feeding to be the same as in the morning. 12. The watering is usually done from troughs ; but after severe exercise and at noon in hot weather, buckets are preferable, it then being necessary to limit the horse's allowance. The horses are to be led at a walk to and from water. 13. Should it be found that a horse has neglected his feed, or refuses his water, it will at once be reported to the stable sergeant. 14. A uon-commissioncd officer of the stable guard should in- spect the stables at least once in every two hours during the night; any appearance of sickness in a horse should be immediately made known to the stable sergeant. 15. The sickness of a horse, and the treatment he receives, should constitute part of the report of the battery officer of the day, to be recorded in a book kept for that purpose. GROOMING. The wisp, the curry-comb, and the brush are the implements used. 1. The wisp is to be used when the horses come in warm from exercise, and the horse is rubbed until dry, from his hind quarters against the hair up to his head. 2. The curry-comb is used when the horse is dry, beginning always on the near side at the hind quarters, its application being in proportion to the length and foulness of the coat; that is, if the coat is close, long, full of dust, and very filthy, use it freely to loosen the coat or the sweat that is dried and fast on the skin and roots of the hair, appearing like a white saltish dust. In the spring of the year the curry-comb should, whilst the eoat is changing, be used judiciously, as a removal of the hair MANAGEMENT OF A BATTERY. 51 too rapidly, exposes the horses to the sudden changes of tempefA- ture. Proceeding from the hind quarters, descend to the quarters, minding not to scratch or injure the horse. The legs below the houghs ate not to Vje touched with the curry-comb unless the dirt is matted on the joints of the hough, which may be carefully loosened with the curry-comb. The comb works unpleasantly on that part, and must be handled lightly. Next proceed to the fetlocks, back, loins, flank, belly, shoulders, arms, chest, and neck, omitting no part that the curry-comb can be conveniently applied to ; but tender places, thin of hair, or ruhljed by the harness, need not be touched ; they should be rub- bed with the wisp. Observe, therefore, to begin with the curry- comb on the near hind quarters and finish with the head, keeping the comb in the right hand. After currying the near side, pro- ceed with the off side : here use the left hand. This done, wisp off those places not touched by the curry-comb; then use the brush. Begin first at the head on the near side, taking the brush in the left hand and the curi'y-comb in the right; brushing more particularly those parts where the dust is more apt to lodge, pro- ceed down the neck. The scurf of the neck next the head, and the scrag next the mane are difficult to clean. Apply the brush backward and forward on these places, finishing by leaving the coat smooth. Clear the brush from dust after every two or three strokes with the curry-comb. Proceed in the reverse order used by the curry- comb, taking in those parts not touched by the curry-comb, viz., under the chest between the forelegs, the inside of the elbow or arm, and the parts about the fetlocks. The skin under the flank and between the hind quarters must be free from dust, soft, and so clean as not to soil a white cloth. The curry-comb begins at the hind quarters, and ends at the hcnd. The brush begins at the head, and, taking in all parts of the horse, ends at the qiinitcrs. 62 FIELD SERVICE. ARTICLE FIFTH. FIELD SEEVICB. MARCHES. The front of a eolamn should not be frequently diminished and increased on a long march, as it unavoidably increases the fatigue of the column, particularly the rear of it : when, therefore, the front is diminished, it should not be increased until there is a probability that it will not be necessary to diminish it again for some time. The detachments should be told off into two parties, one for the piece, the other for the caisson, in order to give their assist- ance in holding on, or whenever it may be required on the march, etc. The officers commanding sections, in order to preserve them in place, will, without waiting for express instructions, give such orders as may be necessary for holding on in descents, for assist- ing horses out of difficulties, for the passage of obstacles, etc. Artificers should always be carried on a march, as their duties commence when that of the other men may be said to end, and, if fatigued with marching, they cannot be expected to work with alacrity or efficiency, however willing. An intelligent non-commissioned officer should be sent to re- connoitre the road or ground that artillery is to pass over, and, when necessary, to report the state of it. When the march is connected with military operations, an officer should be employed for this duty. The distance of two yards between the carriages should always be maintained on the best roads, to prevent fatigue and unneces- sary stoppage to the horses. In bad or difficult roads, it may be necessary to increase the distance to four yards or more, accord- ing to the nature of the ground. Even infantry, under such FIELD SERVICE. 53 circarastanccs, open ont and lose distance; with artillery it is unavoidable, and the horses suffer much from being alternately checked and urged on. The strictest attention, however, shonld be constantly paid to llie preservation of distances ; not opening out more than is abso- lutely necessary. The loss of distances with small bodies of artillery may be made up; but with large bodies, or when acting with infantry, this cannot be done without serious disadvantage, particularly to the infantry ; therefore, this point cannot be too strongly insisted upon, as being one of essential consequence. Officers commanding sections should frequently halt to see that their carriages are well up, and marching in proper order. When an accident happens to a carriage, it should, if possible, be drawn out of the column, so as not to interrupt the march of the other carriiiges or troops. The carriages in its rear must pass it by the most convenient flank, and close to proper distance. The disabled carriage resumes its position as soon as the damage is repaired ; when the road is narrow, it must fall into the first interval it finds, and use every opportunity afforded by a wider space to regain its proper place. A caisson belonging to a disabled piece must remain with it; a piece, however, should not remain with its disabled caisson, but merely leave a sufficient number of men to repair it. WheH-it is necessary to move a carriage along a slope, where a small jerk may overturn it, a drag rope should be fastened to the lowest side of the carriage, passed over the top of it, and held by two or three men, marching on the upper side of the slope ; a small effort by these means will prevent a carriage from overturning on a very steep slope. Whenever the ruts are very deep, the carriages must quarter the road ; when however the road is narrow and sunk between banks, the horses should be left to themselves and not hurried. In such circumstances a skilful driver will save his horses much, particularly the wheel horses. In passing over deep furrows, or small ditches or drains, the e2 51 FIELD SERVICE. iiarriages sJionId cross them obliquely; when they are crossed perpendicularly, the horses not only encounter greater difficulty, but they, as well as the harness, suffer much from the jerks. The former line of march should be resumed as soon as they are When the roads are good or even tolerable, the artillery is always obliged to wait for infantry, which is attended with much additional fatigue to the horses, from having the harness so much longer upon them. "When, therefore, there is no danger, the artil- lery should be allowed to regulate its own rate of marching. On ordinary marches the detachments may be in front, rear, right, or left of their respective pieces ; or they may all be in front or rear of the column of carriages, as the circumstances may require. But when the detachments are thus separated from their carriages, one man should march with each. The preservation of horses is an important duty of an artil- lery officer. The greatest care should be given to the fitting of the saddles and collars. Sore backs and galled shoulders arise chiefly from neglect on the march. By prompt attention on the part of the officers, many horses may be preserved for service which would otherwise be disabled for months. The drivers must never be suffered to lonnge or sit uneven on their saddles. A folded blanket under the saddle, is the best preventive of sore backs, as it adapts the shape of the saddle to any loss of flesh in the horse. Every driver should have attached to his harness a pair of pads of soft leather, about six inches by four, stuffed with hair; basil leather is the best for this purpose. The moment any tenderness is perceived in a horse's shoulders, the pressure must be removed by placing the pads under the collar above and below the tender part When a battery arrives in camp, quarters, or a cantonment, each non-commissioned officer will immediately examine every part of the carriage under his charge, especially the wheels, to the greasing of which he must attend: he will report to the FIELD SERVICE. 55 officer of bis section, who reports to the commander of the bat- tery. All damages must be repaired without delay. The best grease for wheels is coarse sweet oil and tallow, (iu equal parts melted together;) next to that, old soft lard. When these cannot be procured, slush may be used. Black-lead should be mixed with the grease. The drivers must immediately report to the non-commissioned officers of their carriages any loss or breakage of their harness, and also any gall or other hurt which may have happened to their horses; any neglect on this point must be punished. In camp, greasy heels are the most common disability with which horses are affected ; as these proceed from cold, occasioning hnmors to settle, the best preventive is hand rubbing and exercise to keep up a circulation. Unless for some particular purpose, the elevating screws should never be raised higher than half their length : on a march they must be covered with a piece of canvas, or old flannel cartridge bag, to prevent their being clogged with dirt. The pintle hooks and lunettes should be greosed previous to marching. If a battery is parked in hot weather, the naves of the wheels must be protected as much as possible from the effect of the sun, by sods, tarpaulings, or other covering. ASCENTS. If the ascent be long and steep, the road in a bad state, or, if from any other cause, the exertion of the horses is likely to be great, a part of t he carriages should halt, the leaders of them be hitched on to those in front, and, when they arrive at the top, be sent back with as many more leaders as may be necessary. Whatever may be the difficulties of the road, not more than ten horses can be hitched with effect to the same carriage; beyond this number, and even with it, it is difficult to make the horses pull together. It may be sometimes necessary to make the detachments assist with bricoles or drag ropes. 56 FIELD SERVICE. After going np a sliort steep hill the horses should be haltetl ; but when that cannot be done, they should be made to move slowly to allow them to recover their wind. In going up a hill, carriages may be halted to rest the horses by bringing them across it, and locking the limbers or chocking the wheels. For this purpose it may be advisable to divide the carriages into portions of three or four each, starting them from the bottom in succession, with an interval of twenty or thirty yards, or more, between each portion. DESCENTS. The drivers should never dismount in going down hill. The wheel driver holds his near horse well in hand, and his off horse very short ; the other drivers barely stretch their traces. In descending steep hills the cannoneers must hold on. For this purpose, previous to marching off, the end of a drag rope is passed twice round the tulip of the piece, and the running part passed into the hook and pulled tight; the rope is then wound round the muzzle, or formed into a small coil and hung on it. At the caisson the drag rope is fastened to one of the hind irons, or to the hind axletree. With a light battery, holding on will generally be sufiScient ; but, if necessary, the wheels must also be locked. In steep and difficult descents the wheel horses only are left in the carriage, the others being taken out and led in rear; the can- noneers hold on with drag ropes. When it is necessary to lock, the middle driver, or with four horses the leading one, dismounts for that purpose. Should there be a ditch, or other dangerous part on the side of the road, the wheel towards that side is locked in preference to the other. TO CROSS SWAMPY GROUND. Each carriage should preserve a distance of ten or twelve yards from its file leader, to prevent its being halt«d. An officer or non-commissioned officer should be posted where the ground pre- FIELD SERVICE. 51 Bents the greatest difficulty, to instruct the driyers how to conduct their teams. The horses must be made to draw freely and quicken the gait. If the ground is very miry it may be necessary to assist with drag ropes, or even to nse them alone, crossing the teams separately. TO PASS A DITCH. The prolonge must be fixed and the handspike taken out. If the ditch be a difficult one, the horses are halted at the ed^e of it, and the piece is run by hand close to the limber, which then proceeds gently rfDtil the- piece is at the bottom of the ditch, when it moves quickly until the piece is out. Should the ditch be nar- row it may be necessary to cut down the edges and hold on with drag ropes. If in passing over, the trail sinks into the ground, it must be disengaged by a drag rope fixed to it, or by the hand- spike. Cl'.OS.SING FORDS. .When the water is deep and the current strong, great attention must be paid in fording. The person conducting a column over a direct ford, should keep his eyes steadily fixed on some object on the opposite bank, which marks the place of going out. He must not look at the stream, which would deceive him by appear- ing to carry him down. All those in rear should keep their eyes on those in front. In order to resist the power of the stream, it is necessary to wade rather against it. When the bottom of the ford, or the bank on the opposite side is bad, the leaders of the rear carriages should be hitched to those in front, and an officer stationed at the entrance, and another at the place of going out. The former causes the distances to be observed, and directs the drivers as to the manner of crossing the ford, and the latter directs them in their leaving it. The management of the horses and the regulation of their gaits, are the same as prescribed for crossing swampy ground. Above all things, the horses must not be allowed to drink, halt, or trot either in passing the ford or in leaving it. If, however, the 68 FIELD SERVICE. stream to be forded is small, and neither deep nor rapid, and there are no troops immediately in rear, this opportunity of watering the horses,- or, at least, of giving them a mouthful of water may be embraced. , The passage should be effected with as large a front as pos- sible. After reaching the opposite bank, the leading carriages should move on to such distance from the ford as not to impede thosp in rear. If the ford is not well known, it must be examined, and the dangerous places well marked, before the carriages attempt to cross. Artillery carriages can pass a ford three feet and one-third deep ; and this depth may be attempted when the ammunition boxes are perfectly water tight, or means have been taken to raise them suiEciently high ; although much depends upon the bottom and the strength of the current. Wlicti the ammunition boxes are not water tight, and are at their usual height of two feet ten inches above the ground, the depth attempted should not exceed two feet four inches. PASS.VGE OF MILITARY BRIDGES. At the entrance of the bridge all but the wheel drivers dis- mount; the dismounted drivers march at their horses' heads, holding the reins of the near horse with the right hand near the bit. A distance of twenty yards is kept between the carriages. The gait must be free and decided, and the drivers should conduct the carriages as near the middle of the flooring as possible ; if the flooring is wet, they must attend particularly to keeping the horses from slipping. Battens should, in this case, be nailed across the bridge. It may sometimes be necessary to pass the carriages and horses separately. There should be no halt on the bridge. Whenever it is per- ceived to rock, the passage of the troops must be stopped. If the bridge cracks under a carriage, it should increase its gait and pass as quickly as possible. In passing over a flying bridge the drivers hold the horses, FIELD SEEVICE. 59 facing towards them ; it may occasionally be advisable to take the horses out ; and in boisterous weather, or at night, the wheels Bhoold be locked. PASSAGE ON ICE. Ice 2 inches thick will bear infantry. 4 " " cavalry or light guns. 6 " " heavy field guns. 8 " " 24-pounder gun on sledges; weight not over 1000 pounds to the square foot. REVERSING A BATTERY IN A NARROW ROAD. All the carriages should be drawn close to one side of the road, and the pieces and caissons unlimbered and reversed. The limbers are then brought in front of their carriages, which are then to bo limbered up. If there is not room to reverse the limbers, the horses must be taken out. Should this road be so narrow that the limbers cannot pass their carriages, the trails of the pieces and stocks of the caissons must be Drought into a direction perpendicular to the road ; if it has a bank on either side, the wheels must run close to the bank, and the trails and stocks made to rest upon it. On a dyke, or road with a ditch on each side, the carriages must be run as close to the edge as possible, and the trails and stocks held up while the limbers pass. Great care must be taken not to run the car- riages too far, and the wheels must be scotched or locked at the edge of the dyke or ditch. Remarks. — When a battery is in stationary quarters, there must be a weekly inspection of every part of it, and, when cir- cumstances permit, a parade in marching order ; at which parade every part of the harness, carriages, and appointments of the cannoneers is expected to be in the best order. Particular atten- tion should be given to the state of the ammunition, which must bo frequently aired. The battery should frequently take out a day's forage, secured and arranged as for service ; the detachments being in marching order, and their blankets, etc. properly fixed. 60 FIELD SERVICE. It should bf; made to go over all sorts of ground, op and down steep slopes and across ditches. The intrenching tools should be occasionally taken oflF, and used in filling up holes and making ramps, to enable the carriages to pass over difiBcult ground. INSTRUCTION FOR THE PRESERVATION OF HARNESS. The preservation of harness requires two kinds of attention: one, that of neatness, which must be continual ; the other, strictly that of preservation, which consists in oiling the leather parts two or three times a year. To keep the harness neat, the men should wipe and carefully clean it whenever it has been used. Collars, which it is important to keep soft and supple, must be carefully attended to. Airing and beating with a rope or small mallet, the stuffing of the collars and saddles, are important duties, which must not be omitted on continued marches. In giving the second kind of attention to harness, that of pres- ervation, the oiling should be done oftener in summer" tlian in winter. The best oil for this use is neat's-foot oil, the unctuous pro- perty of which is particularly suitable for preserving the supple- ness of the leather. This oil contains no siccative part, and may be used unpurified. As a maximum, four pints and a half will answer, each time, for oiling the harness of a team of six horses. Before using the oil, every part of the leather must be perfectly cleaned and washed, without, however, allowing the water to penetrate deeply into the leather. While still damp, blacken those places which have become red, with hatter's dye, ink-ball, or acetate of iron ; and when the leather begins to dry, oil it, spreading the oil on with a sponge, or thick and soft brush. When neat's-foot oil cannot be obtained, fish oil, if pure, may be used. This is veiy good for preserving black leathers; but it must be carefully ascertained not to contain any siccative matter, as that would render it injurious. Other oils may be usefully employed, as whale oil, when they FIELD SEEVICE. 61 can be obtained pure ; this is not easily done, and it is difficult to detect the fraud. Vegetable oils are Tery injurious. On campaigns, good oils can rarely be procured ; under these circumstances a mixture of three-quarters of melted lard and one • quarter of whale oil may be used : it should be spread over the leather with a piece of woollen cloth, and rubbed in well. TRANSPORT OF BATTERIES BY SEA. Transports for horses should be prepared specially for the pur- pose. The stalls should be, preferably, between decks; never, if it can be avoided, in the hold ; and there should be a sufEcient number of ports for light and ventilation. Stalls should be about 6^ feet long, 28 inches wide ; tail boards, fastened to the rear posts, and padded as low a.s the hough ; breaiat boards and side boards fitted in grooves about 4 feet from the floor, the first padded on the inner side and upper edge; the latter on both sides: the floors of the stalls set on blocks, that the water may pass under them; four slats across each floor to give the horses foot hold. Troughs should be made to hang with hooks so as easily to be disengaged. Before the embarkation, the side boards are removed, and re- placed as each horse is put in his stall. Should horses be stalled on the spar deck, on no account should anything be stowed upon the sheds. TO EMBARK THE II0R8E8. If the embarkation can be made from a wharf, the horses are slung; or, if the height of the vessel's side will permit, they are led by ramps to the deck, and then lowered. If the transport cannot lay at a wharf, the horses are brought alongside in lighters and transferred by slings; the ascent and descent of the horse are regulated by two guys, attached to the halter ; one to be held on the lighter; the other on the transport. In a sea way the horses must be run up rapidly to avoid injury. The sling is made of stout canvas, two feet in width and about F 63 FIELD SERVICE. four in length, doubled on the edges one inch, and hemmed down, The ends are separated by pieces of wood of sufficient strength, to the extremities of which the ropes are attached. Breast straps and breeching of rope complete the sling. TO EMBARK THE BATTERY. The pieces and caissons are brought to the wharf or shore and unlimbered; the ammunition chests, and wheels taken off; each set of implements is strapped together, the washers and linen pins are put in a box ; the harness is tied and labelled in sets. The forge and battery wagon are unlimbered, and the front boxes taken off, as well as the spare parts outside of the wagon. All of the chests are to be distinctly marked, so that it can im- mediately be seen where they belong. Too much care cannot be observed to separate and distinguish the ammunition of the howitzers. The place for dismounting the guns depends upon the manner of embarking, as they can readily be lifted from their carriages. In the transport, the guns are the first to be lowered to their places between decks ; then the carriages, limbers, implements, and wheels; the harness is placed (regard being had to its preserva- tion) where it may be of easy access. The box of washers and linch pins is in the especial charge of a non-commissioned officer. The battery wagon and forge, with their limbers and limber- chests, are stowed away from the battery, but where they will be accessible. TO DISEMBARK. When the transport is at a wharf no especial directions are necessary. Generally, the debarkation is in the inverse order of the embarkation. At a distance from the shore, lighters are employed upon whose decks the horses are lowered ; when these have approached as near the shore as possible, the horses are backed over theii sides. The battery may be landed in surf-boats or flats, according to the nature of the shore. TTELD sr.RVICE, 63 In the face of the enemy the" guns should be mounted, and when the boat has beached, it can be dismounted overboard, and hauled up by drag ropes, and the carriages brought ashore by hand. IN ACTION, OR PREPARING FOR ACTION. In those formations in battery in which the pieces or sections are brought up successively on the right for action front, each piece should reserve its fire until the one on its right is un- limbered, and its limber reversed : by not attending to this, the horses become so frightened as not to be brought up to the piece without difficulty. No positive rule can be laid down with respect to the caissons in presence of an enemy. This must depend upon a variety of circumstances ; but, in general, it will be found expedient to place them under charge of an officer, who will conform to the move- ments of the main body, in such a manner, and at such distance, as to enable him to supply the pieces with ammunition before that which is in the limbers is expended. In a hilly road, when any obstruction is expected from the enemy, the leading gun should always be twenty-five or thirty yards in advance of the others, in order to leave room for the limber to take its place in rear when it comes into action, without the necessity of running back the rest of the column. This might be avoided in some cases, by running the piece forward, but cases may arise where it would not be advisable to do so. When pieces are in position on the brow of a hill, they should be retired from it as far as they can be without losing the com- mand, in order that the men may be covered as much as possible. If it is necessary to place them close to the edge, it should not be done until the firing is about to commence. Should a battery be ordered to come into action to a flank upon a dyke, or road which is entirely open, with a ditch on 'each side of it, the carriages must take double distance from each other, and the caissons turn so as to bring their rear towards the enemy. When the piece is unlimbered, the limber moves ncai the caisson and turns its roar also towards the enemy If the road is too 6-1 FIEI-D SERVICE. narrow to allow tbe caissons to change their direction, they remain in the same line with the pieces, and in the middle of the interval between two of them ; the limbers do not reverse, but move forward to the caisson of the preceding piece. When pieces are placed on the edge of a considerable slope, they may be run down by hand, the limbers backing so far as to allow the pieces, when the prolonges are stretched, to fire with effect, and command the whole slope. The pieces should, how- ever, be only run down sufficiently to effect this purpose, that the limbers may be as far as possible from the edge, and, consequently, in some degree covered. Should there be anything at hand, the wheels may be scotched ; or, if there is time, a small cut may be made across the hill. By these precautions pieces may bo fired down a slope so considerable, that they would otherwise run down themselves. Should there be any fear of a piece running forward, when un- limbered for action on the brow of a hill, the wheel should be locked with the lock chain, prolonge, or drag rope. It must be applied to the top felloe, or spoke of the wheel, instead of the lower one. In passing a defile or bridge with the enemy on the other side, and likely to oppose the advance, the pieces alone should move forward, leaving the caissons to follow in rear by themselves. In retiring through a defile or over a bridge in the presence of an enemy, the caissons should be sent to the rear; one or two may be kept nearer than the others for supplying ammunition. The prolonge should be generally used when artillery is retiring slowly. When the rear of the column retires with the prolonge along a road, cavalry will hesitate to attack it, if its flank be secure. After firing, either on drill or in action, the bore of the piece should be washed and the piece depressed. FIELD SERVICE. 65 RErLAflN'G KILLED OR DISABLED UORSLS. The teams of the pieces must always be kept complete at the expense of those of the caissons. A disabled horse, in the first instance, is replaced by the corresponding one at the caisson, leaving the caission to refit with a spare horse and the harness of the disabled one. After all the spare horses have been used, those of the caissons should be taken in succession, so that they may be gradually and regularly reduced. ORDER OP ENCAMPJIENT FOR A BATTERY OF ARTILLERY. Plates 3 and 4 represent the ordinary modes of encampment. Other modes or combinations of these two are adopted when the circumstances require. FIRST MODE. In this mode the pieces are parked with diminished intervals ; and the tents and horses are placed upon the flanks in lines parallel to each other and perpendicular to the front, so as to give the encampment a front of the same extent as the battery in line. The horses of each half battery are picketed together upon their appropriate flank. The team of the flank piece is placed at the end of the picket rope in front, and that of its caisson ne.xt. Then come the teams of the next piece and caisson, and so on in the same order. The horses of the chiefs of pieces are with their appropriate teams. The teams of the other carriages are after- wards picketed in the same order with reference to their positions in park ; and finally the horses of the ofiScers near the end of the rope. When two or more batteries are encamped together, the interval between the camps is equal to that between two batteries in line ; anil the captain's tent is between those of his lieutenants. In horse artillery, the front of the encampment would be 97 yards, and the interval between the pieces 1. The horses of each detachment would be picketed after the teams of its caisson. F 2 •*> I'T) fieTjD service. SECOND MODE. In this mode the pieces are parked with full interrals, and the horses and tents are placed in parallel lines in rear. When a single line of picket rope is not sufficient for the horses, a second is placed 4 yards in rear of the first, and the horses made to face e;i'h other. The teams of the pieces and caissons are placed in tlie order of their pieces along the centre of the first line, and those of the other carriages are placed upon their flanks opposite the half batteries to which they belong. If necessary a part of ill cm are placed in rear of the second line. The horses of the officers are at the extremities of the line. In horse artillery, in which the second line is always neces- sary, the horses of the detachments are picketed together in their proper order along the centre of that line ; and the officers' horses at the extremities of the same. In this mode of encampment the intervals between two adjoining batteries and the position of the captain's tent are subject to the same rules as in the other. Instead of placing the harness in lines as represented in the plates of the preceding modes of encampment, it may be placed upon the carriages and covered by tarpaulings when it is possible to do so. The saddles and bridles of the riding horses may also be covered by placing them in the tents with the men. The number of lines upon which a battery is parked varies ac- cording to the number of spare carriages attached. The battery of manoeuvre, which is composed of the pieces and their appropriate caissons occupying the two front lines. 11 ale ' for CL JJounlcd BaUciy rarftgf .3 A 5 B ffip fg ^h 4+ +i+ 4+ '-^ +f g ■*^ Lint' Hi' //ti.fynn.r S 1 1 ' ' i I I ^ a 44jt o O .O +J-+ *> 4<^ ^i 53 I'Voiit :&2 _>-ds. 3 Fitriff . Jiiitffty U'i'if'ff/ X cl-j 5^ 4iL -kU Urt -lYi Y Y -s-i^j-i •hV *lif -hV «1» -kS* V» 'C'^N fH 5 id J ■'|iD'f'f^"*-n .s;il„ili.-r„.,' r,-i,i '" •'IM A'lVn^iriifJj] .S-uh,il(,iruTnit rfipt^tir»'s\\^ Triit IhYircr^ [7. j-T Jutchcn. s /„/ . M. ,wif:n^-. rin.U' /. J,. /hr CI 31ouJLfff7 /if f f^/'ry. ('■nurd y Trnt . n^ria^e ; ■ - 16 f i s /,///*' iH' I'lu.fxorw. k i 4. 4 i ^ lie i 1 /•;./;,/, . /;„// ■/■I' W.iqin, . l!:',/^/,i,J,- ir.;. (/r/i- ftr. i V 4* 1 J/firrvesn 4* ■lot i f|')05' %%%%%m %w% Mwm wm ^'iL LU LU LQ 1 i m m ijj jj .li .Soldiffv* : ■/;■/ /.v. An LiJ u J ^ ^ ^1 UJ m^ J lU lid 'W]Kitchen.. t - -1 i . ■^ Subaitcma'Jinis. IT] VlT/'r/l r-/f [JT 11) t ^/WffrjQ-' Kitr/irn. s I'-A.K.T II. INSTRUCTION FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. TACTICS. BASIS OP INSTRUCTION. THE COMPANY. The text applies especially to companies serving mounted bat- teries. Such Tariations as are required to adapt it to horse artil- lery are noted, and the portions applicable to that branch alone are so indicated. In the artillery, as no two men of a piece, cannoneers or drivers, perform the same duties, each should be specially as- signed to that position for which he is best fitted. The men, whether cannoneers or drivers, are permanently attached to pieces, and will not be transferred except by order of the captain, or temporarily to equalize detachments on drill or parade. The cannoneers assigned to the service of a gun constitute a gun detachment, and are commanded by the gunner. Wlieu the company is paraded, dismounted, these detachments fall in each on the right of the men of its own piece — the cannoneers taking their places according to their numbers in the detachment. When the cannoneers and drivers attached to a piece are as- sembled in rank and file formation, they constitute a, platoon, which is commanded by the sergeant who is chief of the piece. The drivers form on the left, and the platoon is divided into detach- ments of the same size as the gun detachment, the men being numbered in the same manner. (67) 69 BASIS OP INSTUICTION. Two platoons constitute a section, whieli is commanded by a lieutenant. The company is composed of two, three, or four sections. The instraetion laid down is applicable to either case, but is given for three sections. When there are four sections, the company is further divided into divisions, each composed of two sections, and commanded by its ranking chief of section. The company will not be manoeuvred by divisiuns unless circumstances require it, the section or platoon being the most convenient subdivision for manffiuvring. The company is commanded by a captain. A subaltern, in addition to the chiefs of sections, is attached to it. He performs the staff duties of the battery, and commands the line of caissons in the battery formations. In addition to the platoons, there should be attached to the company one sergeant-major or first sergeant ; one quartermaster-sergeant ; two buglers or trump- eters; one guidon; and such number of artificers as the service of the Isattery may require. In the absence of the lieutenant chief of the line of caissons, he is replaced by the first sergeant FORMATION OF THE COMPANY. (Plate 5.) The platoons form when in line in the order of their pieces in park, and touching each other. The two forming a section are designated as the right and left platoons, according to their actual positions with reference to each other in the sections. When necessary, surplus men may be transferred from one platoon to another, so that there shall be but one incomplete detachment in the company, which should not be on the flank. When an incomplete detachment consists of an odd number of men, the vacancy is left in the rear rank, in the next file but one from the left, that number being omitted in calling off. To prevent the formation of incomplete detachments, artificers may be assigned as Nos. 8 ; or the permanent chiefs of caissons may be assigned as gunners to detachments, other than the gun detachment, and posted ] yard behind their right files. □ * Is- If /□ a □ \ - 3 D>. a>. p3r- p= :pg 'G /a :-— :pf/ " '■ ■cn u \^ ^ a>. Ll> /a .. ./.,v,a rai '§ BASIS or INSTRUCTION. 69 when tlio company is formed for parade purposes, and it is not desired to mancenTre by detachments, the platoons may be equal- ized and regarded as the units. They are then formed as single detachments, the chiefs of caissons being posted as the front rank men of the left iiles of the platoons. The men call off from No. 1 to No. 8, as if divided into detachlnents of eight men each. The sections are designated according to their actual positions in line, as the right, the centre, and the left sections. If there are four, they are designated according to actual position, as the right, the right-centre, the left-centre, and the left sections. When the company consists of four sections, the right and right-centre sections constitute the right division ; the left and left-centre sections, the left division. None of the designations of the platoons in a section, nor of sections and divisions in the company, are permanent. They shift from one to the other, according to the actual positions of the subdivisions with reference to each other. POSTS OF THE OFFICERS, NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS, Etc. (Plate 6.) The captain commanding goes wherever his pres- ence may be necessary, or his commands best heard. His posi- tion is, in the order in line, 4 yards in front of the centre of the company ; in the order in column, or when faced by a flank, 4 yards outside the marching flank, opposite the centre of the company. The lieutenants commanding sections, in line, or in column of sections, are 2 yards in front of the centres of their respective sections ; in columns of platoons or of detachments, or when faced by a flank, they are 2 yards outside the marching flank, and opposite the centres of their respective sections; except that when faced by a flank, the chief of the leading section takes his jilace at the side of the leading file. In column of divisions, the ranking chief of section in each division is 4 yards in front of the centre of his division ; the other chief of section keeps his position of 2 yards in front of the centre of his section. in BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. The lieutenant, cbief of caissons, is, in line, 4 yards beliiud the centre of the company ; in column, or faced by flank, he is 4 yards outside of the pivot flank, and opposite the centre of the company. The sergeants, chiefs of pieces, when in line, in column of sec- tions, or faced by a flank, are on the right of the gun detach- ments of their respective platoons, in the front rank. In column of platoons, or of detachments, they are 1 yard in front of tlie centre of their platoons or of their gun detachments. The corporals, gunners, when in Une, or column of sections, are 1 yard behind the right files of their respective gun detach- ments. In columns of platoons, or detachments, they are on the right of the gun detachments. When the column has a detach- ment, other than the gun detachment, at its head, the gunner of the platoon to which it belongs will place himself 1 yard in front of its centre, unless the chief of caisson of that piece is acting as its file-closer ; in which case the latter leads the column. When faced by a flank, they face with the company, and keep their relative positions. The corporals, chiefs of caissons, are in their places in the ranks as Nos. 8 of the gun detachments, or as the front rank men on the left of their platoons, or they may be assigned as gunners to detachments, other than the gun detachments, in the case already provided for to prevent the formation of incomplete detachments. The first sergeant, in line, is on the right of the company, in a line with the front rank, and 1 yard from it ; in column, he is on the marcliing flank, 1 yard outside the section, or other sub- division, nearest to him when in line. When faced by flank, he faces with the company. The quartermaster-sergeant occupies positions on the left of the company, corresponding to those of the first sergeant on the right, whether ia line, in column, or faced by a flank. The buglers or trumpeters, in line, are on the right of the first sergeant, in one rank, and 2 yards from him ; in column, they are 6 yards in front or rear of the subdivision next them in line, BASIS OF INSTEfCTION. fl according as that subdivision forms the head or rear of the column, ^^'hen the company faces by flank, they face with it The artificers occupy positions on the left of the company cor- responding to those of the musicians on the right, whether in line, in column, or faced by a flank. The guidon forms with the musicians, and on their left, or takes such position as the captain may prescribe. When in the movements or manoeuvres, the subdivisions origin- ally on the right and left become those of the left and right, the non-commissioned staff, musicians, and artificers remain with the subdivisions near which they were originally formed, and take corresponding positions in line, etc. If, for instance, the line sliould be formed faced in the opposite direction, by a reverse of the sections, to the right or left, they would reverse at the same time, and the line would then be formed as follows — from right to left: the artlDcers; quartermaster-sergeant; company; first sergeant ; gnidon, and musicians. The proper distances being taken from the company. THE BzVTTERV. The manoeuvres of infantry, cavalry, and artillery are regulated by the same general principles ; but as the infantry constitutes the main body of an army, its movements necessarily control those of the other arms. In this work the infantry forms of com- mand have been adopted for the artillery as far as the difference between the two services would permit. A battery executes nearly the same manoeuvres as a battalion of infantry, but with less precision. For its elements cannot bo moved with the same accuracy as platoons of well-instructed in- fantry. In some respects the exercises prescribed for field batteries exceed those required for the purposes of war. But they should be regarded as a study which it is advantageous to extend beyoud its ordinary applications ; so that the most difficult circumstances may not present anything that is unknown, or that may lead to the commis.sion of serious errors. No rides are hiid down for the application of field battery 72 BASIS OF IN'STRDCTION. InaTloea^Tes to the evolutions of troops of di£Ferent arms. Although all arms are governed by the same general principles, each has an appropriate code for its own manoeuvres, which is not extended to the general movements of other troops. The best, and perhaps the only way, for an artillery officer to manage his battery pro- perly, when manoeuvring with other troops, is to understand the infantry and cavalry manoeuvres ; so that he may at once compre- hend the command of the general officer and determine the posi- tion which the artillery should take. No rules can be laid down for conducting batteries to the positions they are to occupy ; for the order, gait, and direction of each battery are modified by the configuration of the ground to be passed over, as well as by the march of the infantry and cavalry. The artillery, without being obliged to follow step by step all the manoeuvres of the infantry and cavalry, proceeds to the execution of its orders in the easiest and most e.\])editious manner. The proper employment of this arm, according to the situation of the ground and the circum- stances of the case, must ever be kept in view in all orders issued to it. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. The battery of manoeuvre is divided into sections, each being composed of two pieces and two caissons. The column of sections is not only found to be sufficient for the purposes of manoeuvre, but mnch more convenient than the column of pieces or half bat- teries. The column of pieces requires too great an extension of the battery and too much time for its evolutions. In the column of half batteries one chief of section is deprived of his command ; and, when formed at full distance, the depth of the column is essentially the same as in that of sections. Moreover, when this column is used for manoeuvre, the pieces of the same section cannot be kept long together in any part of the battery. These objections to the column of half batteries do nut, however, apply to the eight-gun battery, which can be manffiuvred by half bat- teries without depriving a chief of section of his command, or separating the pieces of the same section. Habitually this battery BASIS OF INSTRLCTION. 73 will be manoeuvred by sections, Ijut when necessary, or expedient, it may be manoeuvred by half batteries. Each piece and its caisson are kept in a fixed relation to each other, and may be said to constitute a unit. They are separated only in the formations in battery. This principle simplifies the manoeuvres greatly, and renders it generally unnecessary to give separate commands to the caissons. Xo notice is taken of inversions in any of the orders, either in column, in line, or in battery. The most simple and rapid forma- tions are always adopted. The passage of carriages is used as an elementary principle in the manoBuvres. In the formations in battery it is indispensable for changing the front of a lino; and when executed seasonably, as a preparatory movement, it greatly facilitates all the formations. It may be executed with the same, or an increased gait. But one wheel is admitted. The pivot carriage preserves its gait, while the others regulntf theirs according to their distances from it; the guide being always on the pivot flank. No general or spceial guides are used. The chiefs of pieces, and in horse artillery the chiefs of caissons also, are the guides of the carriages to which they are attached. And each becomes the guide of the line or column whenever his carriage occupies the position to which the movements are referred. The cautionary command Attention is not embraced among those required for the manoeuvres, bnt may be used at the discre- tion of the captain. The commands of the chiefs of sections are more numerous, and those of the captain are more frequently repeated than in other arms of service, on account of the noise of carriages and extent of command. As a general rule, the cannoneers should mount the ammunition cliests only for rapid movements ; and when within range of the enemy's guns they should dismount, unless important considera- tions require a continniilion of the rapid gait. The explosion of a caisson when the cannoneers are mounted might destroy many men. The throe orders, in column, in line, and in battery, are so o 74 BASIS OP INSTRUCTION. established as to occnpy the least possible space, and to require the least ground for their formations. In both kinds of artillery, whether in column or in line, the distance between two carriages, or between a carriage and detachment, is 2 yards. The interval is so calculated that the column may be readily formed into line. The intervals thus resulting are different in the two kinds of artillery; but when they manoeuvre together, the carriages of foot artillery take the intervals and distances belonging to those of horse artillery. In the order in battery the distances are the same for both kinds of artillery. This order presents an arrangement which the exigencies of war habitually vary. But the rule requiring the limbers and caissons to face towards the enemy, should be departed from only while firing in retreat. In that formation in battery which requires the caisson and detachment of horse cannoneers to pass the piece, the detach- ment does not pass until after the caisson ; and the cannoneers do not dismount until the detachment has reached its place in battery. The first part of this arrangement arises from the fact, that the passage of the caissons is a preparatory step, which should be completed before the command In battery is given. The second part is intended to avoid the difficulty which would be experienced by the horse holders in leading their horses, and the inconvenience and danger of halting near the piece, and thus grouping all the horses together at the moment of coming into battery. Two methods have been adopted for the formations in battery to the front : one requiring the pieces to be thrown forward, the other requiring the caissons to be thrown to the rear. The first method is equally adapted to light and heavy batteries. By this method the pieces and caissons are rapidly separated ; and the commands may be given while the battery is moving, so as to leave the caissons at their proper distance in rear of the line on which the pieces are to form. The second method is not adapted to heavy batteries, on account of the difficulty of turning the pieces about by hand. But with light pieces it is advantageous BASIS OP INSTETJCTION. 75 when the battery is already formed upon the line of battle, or when the head of a column which is to be formed into battery is very near that line. In horse artillery the first method of coming into action is considered the best; for, while the cannoneers are dismonnting, the pieces are moved forward and wheeled about by the horses, so that nothing remains for the cannoneers but to nnlimber and commence firing. Moreover, when the command for this formation is given, the detachments halt at once on the ground which their horses are to occupy in battery. COMPOSITION OF THE BATTERY OF MANCEUVRE. (Plates 28, 29.) The Battery of Manoeuvre is composed of six field pieces and six caissons, properly manned, horsed, and equipped. It is sometimes reduced to four or increased to eight pieces. The tactics is adapted to either number, but six pieces are supposed. Each carriage is drawn by four or six horses, and the officers and men are as follows : — One captain, who commands the battery. Three lieutenants, each commanding a section ; the section of the junior lieutenant should be in the centre. One lieutenant commanding the line of caissons. When half batteries are formed, they are commanded by the two lieutenants highest in rank. Six mounted sergeants, each charged with guiding and super- intending a piece. Twenty-four, or thirty-six drivers, being one to each pair of horses. Six detachments of cannoneers, each containing nine men in mounted batteries, and eleven in horse batteries. This number includes two corporals, one of whom is chief of the caisson ; and the other the gunner, has charge of the gun and its detachment. In each detachment of horse artillery two of the cannoneers are hnrse holders. Two trumpeters or buglers. One guidon. 76 BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. The battery is divided into three sections, denominated the right, left, and centre sections. Should there be four sections, they are denominated the right, right-centre, left-centre, and left sections. A section contains two pieces and two caissons, and in each section the pieces are denominated right piece and left piece. The battery is also divided into half batteries, denominated right half battery, and left half battery. The word piece applies to the gun or howitzer, either with or without its limber; and sometimes to the piece and caisson together. The front of a battery, in the order in battery, is the front of the line of pieces. lu all other formations it is the front of the first line of drivers. The right or left of a battery is always that of the actual front, whether the pieces or caissons lead. The interval is a space measured parallel to the front. The distance is a space measured in depth, or perpendicular to the front. The measures of intervals and distances are given in yards, and express the vacant spaces between the component parts of the battery. (Pl.\te 25.) The object of a right or left wheel is to give the carriage a direction perpendicular to the one it had before. In executing it, the leading horse on the pivot flank describes a quadrant (5 yards) of a circle whose radius is 3-25 yards, and then resumes the direct march. The horse coupled to him increases his gait and conforms to his movement, resuming the direct march at the same time. The centre and wheel horses follow in the tracks of their leaders. (Plate 25.) The object of a right or left oblique is to give the carriage a direction inclined 45° to the right or left of the one it had before. In executing it the leading horse on the pivot flank describes the eighth of a circle whose radius is 3 25 yards, and then resumes the direct march. The horse coupled to him in- creases his gait, conforms to his movement, and resumes the BASIS OF INSTRUCTION. T7 direct march at Ibo same time. The other horses follow in the tracks of their leaders. The oblique of a carriage ia in fact one- half of a right or left wheel. (Plate 2.5.) The passage applies to two carriages in file, and its object is to pass the rear carriage to the front. To execute it the rear carriage inclines to the right, passes the one in front, and takes its proper distance in front by inclining to the left. The reciprocal gaits of the carriages are regulated by commands. (Plate 26.) The object of an about is to establish the carriage on the same ground, but in the opposite direction, having the heads of the leading horses where the hinder part of the carriage was before. For the easy execution of this movement at all gaits, and with a carriage of four wheels, all the horses incline at once to the right as they advance, and so move, according to their dis- tances from the pole, as not to interfere with the wheel horses which really govern the carriage. (See No. 420.) In horse artillery the detachment of cannoneers follows the piece, which advances 7 yards after finishing the about, in order that the heads of the leading horses may reach the position occu- pied by the rear of the detachment. (Plate 26.) The countermarch applies to two carriages of different kinds in file. Its object is to make them both perform the about and to establish them on the ground they occupied before, but in the opposite direction and with the same carriage in front. In performing it the carriage of the front rank executes an about at once, and moves to the place which was occupied by the other carriage. The latter follows the track of the former, executes the about on the same ground, and takes its place. (Plate 25.) There is but one kind of wheel, which is that with a moving pivot. The carriage on the pivot flank wheels in such a manner as to unmask the ground where the movement com- menced. When the wheel is made with a section front, the pivot carriage describes a quadrant (5 yards) of a circle whose radius is 3-25. With a battery front the pivot carriage describes a quadrant (22 yards) of a circle whose radius is U. (Plate 4'.).) If the wheel be ordered from a halt, the pivot carriage moves at a 2 73 BASIS OF INSTRUCTIOV. a walk ; if on the march, it preserves its gait. In all cases the marching wing regulates its gait in such a manner as to remain the shortest possible time in rear of the line, without urging the horses unnecessarily. In all wheels the guide is on the pivot flank, and the intervals are preserved from that flank. In monnted batteries the chiefs of pieces act as guides, march- ing for that purpose with the leading carriages. In horse artillery they are also guides, except when the caissons lead and their chiefs are mounted ; these chiefs becoming the guides in that case. The guide of the battery is that of the carriage to which the movements are referred. The alignment is made on the drivers of the wheel horses, except in battery, when it is made on the hind wheels. In giving commands the strength of voice should be propor- tioned to the length of the line. When a chief of section does not hear the commands, he regulates his movement by what he sees executed by an adjoining chief. The command Attention is given by the captain at the commencement and at each renewal of the exercise ; but afterwards it is given only when he thinks it necessary to fix attention. Trumpet or bugle signals are used instead of commands when ever they can be advantageously introduced. The signals and calls in use will be found in their appropriate place at the end of the work. (Plates 81 to 88 inclusive.) t»j^:rt III- 8CH00L OF THE PIECE. ARTICLE FIRST. METHOD OP INSTEUOTION. 1. The object of this school is the regular and progressive instruction of the artilleryman in his duties at and connected with the piece, from the period of his joining as a recruit. This instruction is given by the non-commissioned officers, under the supervision of the chiefs of sections. The instructor should never require a movement to be per- formed until it is exactly explained and executed by himself. It should be left to the recruit to take the positions, and execute the movements directed, and ho should be touched only to rectify mistakes arising from want of intelligence. Each movement should be perfectly understood before passing to another. After they have been properly executed in the order laid down, the instructor no longer confines himself to that order. The instructor allows the men to rest at intervals during drill, and for this purpose he commands Eest. At this command the recruit is no longer required to preserve immobility. At the command Attention, the man takes his position, and remains motionless. To dismiss the men, the command is given, Break ranks. March. Great patience and the utmost precision are necessary on the part of the instructor. He should especially endeavor to excite a spiriied and active deportment at every military exercise ; and above all not to disgust the men by too long an application to any one point in the drill. (79) 80 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. THE CANNONEER DISMOUNTED. Elementary Instruction. 2. This part is taught to each recruit individually, or at most to four at a time. In the latter case, they are placed on the same line, 1 yard from each other, without being required to align themselves. POSITION OF THE CANNONEER DISMOUNTED. 3. The heels on the same line, and as near each other as the conformation of the man will permit ; the feet turned out equally, and forming with each other something less than a right angle ; the knees straight; body erect on the hips, inclining a little for- ward ; shoulders square ; arms hanging naturally, with the palms of the hands turned a little to the front ; head erect ; chin slightly drawn in, eyes to the front; the position of the whole body without constraint : when the sabre is worn, the left hand hangs by the side and over it. EYES RIGHT— EYES LEFT. 4. The instructor commands : 1. Eyes — RIGHT. 2. Front. At the command right, turn the head gently to the right, so that the inner comer of the left eye may be on a line with the buttons of the jacket, the chin well drawn in. At the command Front, turn the head gently to the front. The command Eyes — left, is executed on the same principles. FACINGS. 5. To the right or left. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers right, (or left.) 2. Face. At the command Face, raise the right foot slightly, turn on the left heel, and replace the right foot by the side of the left. 6. To the rear. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers rear. 2. Face. SCnOOIi OF THE PIECE. 81 At the command rear, make a half face to the right, tnrning on the left heel, place the right foot square behind the left, the hollow of it opposite to and 3 inches from the left heel. At the command Face, turn on both heels to face to the rear, and bring the right foot by the side of the left. 7. Half-face. The commands are : 1. Cannoneers right (or left) oblique. 2. Face. At the command Face, raise the right foot a little, turn upon the left heel, making a half face, and replace the right foot by the side of the left. The instructor will take care that in executing the facings the position of the body is not deranged. MARCHING. 8. The length of the marching step is 28 inches ; its quick- ness at the rate of 110 steps a minute. For the elementary instruction of recruits, the quickness of the step is reduced to 90 a minute. When the command Double-quick is given, it is in- creased to 165. To explain the principles and mechanism of the step, the instructor, placing himself 8 or 10 yards in front of and facing the men, describes and slowly executes it himself. He then commands : 1. Cannoneers— forward. 2. March. At the command forward, throw the weight of the body on the right leg. At the command Maech, carry the left foot briskly forward 28 inches, the toe a little depressed, and, as well as the knees, turned slightly out; the upper part of the body inclining slightly forward; plant the left foot without a shock on the ground, throwing the whole weight of the body upon it; carry forward the right leg smartly and evenly, the foot near the ground; plant it at the same distance, and in the manner de- scribed for the left foot, and continue the march, keeping the face and shoulders square to the front. The instructor marks the cadence of the step, from time to time, by the commands right, or left, or both; given at the Qioment that the foot indicated should be planted. 6 82 SCITOOL OF THE PIECE. TO HALT. 9. The iDstractor commands : 1. Cannoneers. 2. Halt. At the. command Halt, which should be given as one foot comes to the ground, bring the one in rear to the side of it without shock. TO MARCH BACKWARDS. 10. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers backwards. 2. Maech. At the command March, carry the left foot 14 inches to the rear, then bring the right foot likewise to the rear of it, and • so on, successively, until the command: 1. Cannoneers. 2. Halt. At the command Halt, bring the foot which is in front by the side of the other. The instructor requires only a few steps to be taken. He observes that the men step straight to the rear ; that they do not hollow the small of the back by throwing back the shoulders ; and that they always preserve the equilibrium, and the position of the body. TO MARK TIME WHEN MARCHING. 1 1. The instructor commands : 1. Mark time. 2. March. At the command March, bring the heels by the side of each other, and mark the cadence of the step by raising the feet alternately, without advancing them, until the commands are given : 1. Forward. 2. March. At the command March, given as one foot is coming to the ground, the cannoneers resume the step of 28 inches with th& other. TO CHANGE STEP. 12. The instructor commands: 1. Change step. 2. March. SCUOOL OF THE PIECE. 83 At the command MAacn, given at the moment one foot is coming to the ground, bring the other to its side, and step off again with the first. The men are thus taught to take the step when they have lost it. TO FACE WHEN MARCHING. 13. To the right. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers by the right flank. 2. Maech. At the command March, given at the moment the left foot is coming to the ground, turn the body to the right, and step off with the right foot in the new direction, without losing the cadence of the step. 14. To the left. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers by the left flank. 2. Makch. At the command March, which is given as the right foot is coming to the ground, turn the body to the left, and step off with the left foot. 15. To the rear. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers to the rear. 2. March. Which is executed as directed for facing to the right, excepting that the body is turned to face to the rear instead of to the right. 10. Half-face to the right or left. The instructor com- mands : 1. Cannoneers right (or left) oblique. 2. March. At the command March, make a half face to the right, (or left,) and step off in the new direction, with the leg on the side towards which the turn is made. It. To resume the primitive direction. The instructor commands : Forward. At this command, make a half face so as to move in the original direction, and march straight to the front in the manner orescribed for the oblique. 84 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. MANUAL OP THE SABRE. 18. To show the mechanism, the execution of each command is divided into motions, with pauses between them. The last word of a command should be followed by the prompt execution of the first motion, and the words two, three, etc., by that of the other motions. When the words of execution are to be so given, the instructor intimates that the manual is to be by detail : this rule is general. After the different motions are perfectly understood, they are executed without stopping at each one ; care being taken that none of them are slighted, and that the manual does not derange the position of the body. 19. From four to eight men are placed in one rank, 1 yard apart. They will be exercised for a portion of the time in the facings and marchings, wearing their sabres sheathed and hooked up. 20. The instructor points out and names the different parts of the sabre — Hilt: gripe, guard, sword-knot; Blade: back, edge, point; Scabbard: rings, springs. He then commands : 1. Draw. 2. Sabre. At the command Draw, turn the head slightly to the left without deranging the position of the body ; unhook the sabre with the left hand, and bring the hilt to the front; run the right wrist through the sword-knot, seize the gripe, draw the blade 6 inches out of the scabbard, pressing the scabbard against the thigh with the left hand, which seizes it at the upper ring; and turn the head to the front. At the command Sabre, draw the sabre quickly, raising the arm to its full extent, and throwing forward the point; make a slight pause, carry the blade to the right shoulder, edg;e to the front; the wrist resting against the hip ; the little finger on the outside of the gripe. This position is the same when mounted, except that the wrist then naturally falls upon the thigh. SCHOOL OP THE PIECE. 85 Present — sabre. 21. At tbe command sabbe, carry the sabre to the front, the arm half extended, the thumb opposite to and 6 inches from the neck; the blade perpendicular, the edge to the left; the thumb extended on the side of the gripe ; the little finger by the side of the others. Carry — sabre. 22. At the command sabre, carry the back of the blade against the hollow of the shoulder; the wrist resting against the hip, the little finger on the outside of the gripe. Inspection of — sabre. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. 23. At the command sabre, take the position of present SABRE. Two. Turn the wrist inwards; show the other side of the blade ; and turn the wrist back. TuREE. Carry the sabre to the shoulder. On parade, the last motion is not executed until the inspector has passed the next man. 1. Return. 2. Sabre. 24. At the command Return, bring the sabre to a present. At the command Sabre, carry the wrist opposite to and 6 inches from the left shoulder; lower the blade, and pass it across and along the left arm, the point to the rear; turn the head slightly to the left, fixing the eyes on the opening of the scab- bard; return the blade; free the wrist from the sword-knot; turn the head to the front; drop the right hand by the side; and hook up the sabre. This is done by seizing the upper ring between the thumb and fore finger of the left* hand, back of the hand up, raising the scabbard, whilst turning the hilt towards the body, until it points to the rear ; and passing the ring over the hook attached to the waist-belt. 25. When the cannoneer is dismounted, the sabre, when II 86 SCHOOL OF THE ri£CE. worn, is hooked up. In batteries of foot artillery, when serving the gun, the belt is worn without the sabre. 26. If the instructor wishes to rest the men, the sabre being drawn, he commands : Parade — rest. At the command rest, carry the right foot 6 inches to the rear, the left knee slightly bent, the body upright on the right leg ; the back of the sabre resting in the hollow of the right arm ; the hands being crossed in front, the left hand over the right. At the command Attention, resume the proper position with eabre drawn. When the sabre is not drawn, the cannoneer, at the command Parade — rest, assumes the same position as with sabre drawn, except that instead of crossing the hands in front he folds the arms over the chest 27. After the manual of the sabre has been taught, the men will be exercised in the facings and marchings with the sabre drawn. BCnoOL OF THE PIECE. 87 ARTICLE SECOND. THE GUN DETACHMENT. 28. The cannoneers of a piece when united for tbe ser- vice of the gun, or for the prelimiuary instruction, constitute a detachment, which is composed ordinarily of eight men, com- manded by the gunner. 29. A rank is composed of men abreast ; a file, of men placed one behind the other. 30. The cannoneers fall in in two ranks, 18 inches between the ranks; elbows slightly touching; and in such manner that they may be told off to the duties at the piece for which they are best fitted. This of course does not apply to recruits ; each of whom must be taught the duties of every number under all cir- cumstances. The gunner tells the detachment off from the right, 'So. 1 being on the right of the rear rank; No. 2 on the right of the front rank ; No. 3 on the left of No. 1 ; No. 4 on the left of No. 2, and so on, the even numbers being in the front, and the odd numbers in the rear rank. He then takes post on the right of the front rank. The chief of caisson, who, as well as the gunner, should be a corporal, is told off as No. 8 of the gun detachment. When the detachment is composed of more or less than eight men, he should be the highest even number. ^Vhen the chief of the piece is present and not the instructor, he performs the duties and takes the position of the gnnner, who then takes post 1 yard in rear of the right file, and acts as file closer, except when the chief of piece is out of ranks, when the gunner resumes his post. 31. Movements of breaking and formation are first executed from a halt, that they may be better understood. The men should change ranks every day, that they may become equally accustomed 88 SCHOOL OF THE riECE. to both, and each movement should be repeated by the loft after being properly executed by the right. TO FORM IN ONE BANK. 32. The instructor commands: 1. Detachment, left into single rank. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Right-viv.'zss. 5. Front. At the first command, the even numbers face to the left ; and, at the command March, step off. At the command Halt, given when the man on the right of the front rank is opposite the left elbow of the man on the left of the rear rank, they all halt and face to the front. At the command dress, the odd numbers step forward, and all align themselves on the gunner, who has remained in his position. At the command Front, all cast their eyes to the front. ALIGNMENTS. 33. To the front. Two or more files of the right are moved forward 3 yards and aligned by the commands Two (or — ) right files forward — March — Halt — Right-iiVi'Eiss. The in- structor then commands : 1. By file, Bighl-BKEsa. 2. Front. At the command dress, the men move forward successively, casting their eyes to the right as prescribed in No. 4, halt short of the line, and dress forward until standing squarely to the front and touching the elbow of the man on the right, they see the breast of the second man on that side. Each executes the move- ment when the preceding one arrives on the line, so that but one file aligns itself at a time. The command Front is given when the last file is aligned. 34. To the rear. Two or more files are moved backwards 2 yards and aligned by the commands Two (or — ) right files backward — March — Halt — Bight-BR^ss. The instructor then commands : 1. By file, right backward-BREBS. 2. Front. At the command dress, each file takes the backward step in senoni, of TnE pieck 89 succession, casting his eyes to the right, passes a little to the rear of the new line, and then dresses forward as prescribed in No. 33, The detachment is aligned to the left on the same principles. 35. The detachment being in line, to dress it forward, the instructor places one or more files on which he wishes to align ii in position, and commands : 1. Detachment, right (or le/l) dress. 2. Front. At the command dress, all the cannoneers align themselves promptly in the direction indicated. The detachment is dressed to the rear upon the same principles at the command : 1. Detachment, right (or left) backward-OREsa. 2. Front. DIRECT MAUCII IN SINGLE FILE. 30. The command is given : 1. Detachment, right (or left) iaoe. 2. Column Forward. 3. March. At the command face, the cannoneers face to the right, (or left,) and at the command March, they step off together. Each man keeps his distance from the one who precedes him, and re- mains exactly behind him. The men must not turn their heads, nor look at the feet of the men in front, or they will lose distance. The shoulders should be kept square, and a swinging motion avoided. 37. To halt, when marching by file, the command is given : 1. Column. 2. Halt. At the second command, all halt in their positions. The instructor will point out to those who have lost distance the evils it creates, and cause them to resume their proper places. 38. To face to the proper front, the instructor commands : 1. Front face. 2. Bight (or left) dress. 3. Front. At the command face, each man faces to the front — ^by a left face, if the detachment has been faced to the right; and by a right faee, if it has been faced to the left. h2 90 SCHOOL or the pieck. COANGE OF DIRECTION IN FILE. 39. The detachment marching by file, in single rank, the instructor commands: 1. By file, righl (or left.) 2. March. 3. Forward. At tbe command March, the leading man turns in the direc- tion indicated without changing the step ; and at the command Forward, given as soon as he turns, moves to his front. He is followed by the others in succession, who turn upon the same ground. OBLIQUE MARCH IN FILE. 40. The detachment marching by file, the instructor com- mands : 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. March. The movement is performed as prescribed in No. 16; the men keeping in such position in regard to those in front of them that the command Forward will cause them to move accurately in file in the primitive direction. The oblique march is practised from a halt before being exe- cuted whilst marching, the commands being : 1. Cannoneers, riglit (or left) oblique face. 2. Column — March. DIRECT MARCH IN LINE. 41. The detachment being correctly aligned, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or left.) At the command March, all step off, taking care to keep the touch of the elbow towards, and to dress on, the guide ; to yield to pressure coming from, and to resist all pressure towards him. If the touch of the elbows is lost, it must be regained gradually. The guide will be the gunner, or the man on the flank indicated. 42. To halt the detachment, the instructor commands : Detachment — Halt. The detachment is then aligned by the appropriate com- mands. SCHOOL OP THE PIECE. 91 WHEELINGS. 43. There is but one wheel, that on a movable pivot. la wheeling, the pivot man describes an arc of a circle, clearing the pivot 18 inches. The conductor of the marching flank lengthens the step as much as possible, the others taking steps according to the positions they occupy, and touching with the elbow towards the pivot. The conductor should measure with his eye the arc he is to pass over, so that the files should not be too open nor too close ; for this purpose he turns his head occasionally towards the pivot, the cannoneers turn theirs slightly towards the marching flank to keep aligned, yield to pressure coming from the direc- tion of the pivot, and resist that from the opposite direction. When they have opened or closed too much, they will regain dis- tances gradually. 44. The detachment being in line, at a halt, or in march, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, in circle, right wheel. 2. !March. At the command March, the cannoneers take the wheeling steps. They turn the head slightly towards the marching flank, taking care not to open or close the files too much, and to keep aligned. The pivot man, clearing the pivot 18 inches, regulates himself on the marching flank. The instructor sees that the men avoid all pressure in the ranks, and regulates the steps of the different files. After several wheels have been executed, he com- mands : 1. Detachment — halt. 2. ie/Z-DRESs. 3. Front. lu the first lessons to recruits, an instructed man will be placed on the outside of the pivot flank. At the command March, lie wUl turn upon his ground in marking time, so as to serve ao a guide to the pivot man. The wheel in circle to the left is executed on the same princip'«!S. THE WHEEL. 45. The detachment being in line, at a halt or in march to 92 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. place it in a position perpendicular to the existing front, tbe instroctor commands : 1. Detachment, right (or left) -wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Left (or 7-ight) dress. 5. Front. Which is executed as in the wheel in circle, the instructor giving the command Halt, when the wheel is nearly completed. In the wheel to the right, when the gunner is on the pivot flank, he marks time in turning to the right on his own ground at the command March. THE REVERSE. 46. The detachment being in line at a halt or in march, to place it faced to the rear, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, right (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Left (or right) dress. 5. Front. Which is executed as prescribed in No. 44, the detachment describing only a half circle, and the command Halt being given when the reverse is nearly completed. 47. lu all wheelings, when it is desired to move forward at their completion, instead of the command Halt, etc., the com- mands will be Forward, Guide right (or left.) The command Forward is given as soon as the detachment is in the new direc- tion, and is followed by the command for the guide. All resume the alignment without too much precipitation. TO FORM TUE DETACHMENT IN TWO RANKS. 48. The instructor commands : 1. Bight into two ranks. 2. March. . 3. Bight-DREBs. 4. Front. At the first command the odd numbers take two steps to the rear; the even numbers face to the right, and at the command March, move forward until opposite the rear rank men of their files, when they halt and face to the front. At the command Bight-J)ViiS8B, the detachment is aligned to the right. BCnOOL op THE PIECE. 93 49. The detachmeDt having been formed m two ranks, the foregoing movements are executed. In wheeling, the rear rank men cover and conform their movements to those of their file leaders. 50. When the detachment marches by a flank, that is, when the men of each rank are formed in file, the even numliers are guides ; they preserve the proper distance and keep io the direction of those who precede. The odd numbers touch lightly the elbows of their proper file leaders, and dress on thein. In the clianges of direction, the man on the side towards which the turn is made executes it as already prescribed ; the mai. on the opposite side lengthens the step in turning, and keepb up the touch of the elbow. In the oblique, the men on the side towards which the oblique is made are guides ; the men of the opposite side regulate their movements accordingly, each following the guide in front of his own and keeping in such position with regard to the latter, that at tlie command Forward, they will be abreast, elbows touching. In marching in line, the guide is the gunner, or the front rank man of the flank indicated ; the rear rank men will carefully cover their file leaders, and when the distance between the ranks is lost regain it gradually. They will be practised, whilst marching in line, in marking time, and changing step. When they lose the step, the means prescribed in No. 12 are used to regain it. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 51. To the right or left. The detachment marching in line, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, by the right (or left) flank. 2. jNIarch. 3. Forward. At the command March, each man turns in the direction in- dicated and steps oEF. The march in line in the primitive direction is resumed at the commands : 1. Column, by the left (or right) flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide right (or left.) 94 SCHOOL or THE PIECE. 62. To the front. The detachment marching in line, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, by the right Jlank by file left. 2. jNIarch. 3. Forward. At the command March, each man faces to the right, and the column then turns to the left. The instructor commands For WARD as soon as the leading file has turned. The movement is executed with the left in front at the com- mands : 1. Detachment, by the left flank by file right. 2. March. 3. Forward. the detachment marching by a flank to form line. 53. The column marching with the right in front, the in- structor commands : 1. Cannoneers, into line. 2. March. 3. Ouide-maivr. At the command March, the first man of the front rank con- tinues to advance. The first man of the rear rank shortens the step, and places himself behiiid him by obliquing to the left; the other men oblique immediately to the left, quicken the step, and form in succession in line on the left of the first, each in the rank to which he belongs. The instructor then gives the command, Ouide-RiGUT. When the column marches with the left in front, the movement is executed on the same principles at the commands : 1. Cannoneers, into line. 2. March. 3. Ouide-iSESi. The cannoneers obliquing to the right. OBLIQUE IN LINE. 54. The detachment marching in line, the instructor com- mands : 1. Cannoneers, left (or right) oblique. 2. March. At the command March, the cannoneers oblique in tho direc- tion ordered. The man of each rank on the flank towards which the oblique is made is the guide of that rank, the guide of the rear rank governing himself by that of the front as prescribed in 8CH00I. OF THE PIECE. 95 No. 40. The other men, no longer keeping up the touch of the elbows, glance towards their guide, and keep in such position that their shoulders may be in rear of those of the next man of their rank in that direction. The primitive direction is resumed at the command Forward. At this command, if the oblique has been properly executed, the detachment will move accurately in line in its original direc- tion. The guide reverts, without further orders to the side on which it was when the oblique was ordered ; but the instructor may add the command Guide right, or Guide left, at his discretion. TO MARCH TO THE REAK. 65. The detachment being in march, in line, or m column, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, to the rear. 2. March. 3. Forward. Which is executed as prescribed in No. 15. When the detachment is marching in line, the instructor adds the command for the guide. If the detachment is at a halt, the cannoneers are first faced to the rear, and then put in motion by the commands : 1. Forward. 2. ;Marcii. When tlie desired distance to the rear has been gained, the de- tachment is halted and resumes its primitive front at the command : Cannoneers, rear-FAOE. If, whilst marching to the rear, the instructor wishes to march to the front again without halting, he commands : 1. Cannoneers, to the rear. 2. jMarch. 3. Forward. And, when marching in line, adds the command for the guide. TO MARCH BACKWARDS. 56. The detachment being in line at a halt, the instrnctor commands : 1. Detachment, backward. 2. March. 3. Guide-RiOTsr (or left.) 96 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. At the command March, all take the backward step, dressing on the guide, until the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, halt. 2. Right (or left) dress. 3. Front. As this movement is seldom used, the men will not be required to move more than 12 or 15 steps at a time. ro OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS. 57. To open the ranks, the instructor commands : 1. To the rear open order. 2. March. 3. iJigr/l<-DRESS. 4. Fbont. At the command March, the rear rank briskly marches back- wards 5 yards and halts, each cannoneer accurately covering his file leader. At the command dress, the rear rank is aligned to the right. 58. To close the ranks, the instructor commands : 1. Close order. 2. March. At the command March, the rear rank closes ou the front. 59. After the foregoing movements are properly executed with the sabres sheathed, they will be executed with drawn sabres. 60. When the ranks are closed, at the first part of the command i>raw-SABRE or .Be^Mrn-SABRE, the rear rank marches backwards 2 yards, and, after the movement is executed, closes again without a command. EXECUTIOX OF THE MOVEMENTS AT THE DOUBLE-QUICK. 61. The movements, as prescribed, are made at the ordinary rate of 110 steps in a minute. Whenever, during the movement, is desired to increase their rapidity, the instructor commands : 1. Double-quick. 2. March. At the command March, the cannoneers take steps at the rate of 165 in a minute, and continue them until the command, 1. Quick. 2. March, is given, when they resume the ordinary rate of 110 steps to the minute. To comvxence the movement at the double-quick, the instructor KUOUL OS lilE FI£CE. 9T adds the command double-quick to the command of preparation, immediately preceding that of execution. To move forward in line for instance, at a donble-qnick, from a halt, the instractor commands: 1. Detachment, forward — double-quick. 2. March. 3. Ouide right (or left.) This rule is general for the movements when dismounted. THE PLATOON. 62. The instruction laid down for the detachment is equally applicable to the platoon, by substituting the word platoon for the word detachment. This instruction is given by the chief of the piece. For the instruction of the platoon, the men are formed in two ranks, the gunner on the right ; the chief of caisson is the front rank man of the left file. The platoon is divided into detachments of eight men each, who are nambered as in the gun detachment. In forming, the gun detachment should fall in on the right, the drivers on the left. SABRE E.KERCISE. 63. The object of the moulinet is to render the joints of the arm and wrist supple, and as it adds to the confidence of the men when isolated, by increasing their dexterity, they should first be exercised at it, as a preparation for the other motions. Each lesson is, therefore, commenced and ended with mouliuets, executed with a quickness proportioned to the progress of the cannoneer. The instructor pays particular attention that the men do not employ a degree of force in the sabre exercise, which not only is less necessary than skill and suppleness, but which is even prejudicial. He observes, also, that they do not lean to one side, in such a manner as to lose the seat if mounted ; he requires, more especially in the motion of the sabre to the rear, that the blade shall not fall too near the body, for fear of wounding the horse. In describing a circle, the flat of the blade should be to the side, 7 1 98 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. and the edge to the front, and it should be so directed as not to touch either the horse's head or his haunches, or the knees of the rider. When the cannoneers execute all the motions with regularity, the in.'trnctor requires each cut to be given without decomposing it ; the last syllable of a command is the signal for the quick execu- tion of if. All the cuts are then terminated by a half moulinet, which brings back to the position of guabi). Thrusts should always be used in preference, as they require less force, and their result is more prompt, sure, and decisive. They should be directed quickly home to the body of the ad- versary, the sabre being held with the full grasp, the thumb pressing against the guard in the direction of the blade. The parries against the lance are the same as against the point. 64. The instructor explains what is meant by riglil and left aide of the gripe ; by tierce, and by quarte. The right side of the gripe is the side opposite to the guard ; the thumb and fingers close over it when the hand grasps the hilt. The left side of the gripe is the side next to the guard, and lies in the palm of the hand. Tierce is the position in which the edge of the blade is turned to the right, the nails downwards. Quarte is the position in which the edge of the blade is turned to the left, the nails upwards. To rest, the instructor conforms to what is prescribed in No. 1. In this case he causes the sabre to be returned. TO OPEN FILES. 65. For the sabre exercise, the instructor opens the ranks of the platoon, or forms it in one rank, causes the sabres to be drawn, and commands : 1. By the left (or right) — open piles. 2. March. 3. Right (or left) dress. 4 Front. SCHOOL or TilE PIKCE. 99 At the command op£n files, all face to the left except the first file. At the command March, the men step off together. The second man from the right, after haring marched 4 yards, halts, fronts by a right face, and dresses on the right file, who has not moved. The others continae the marcli, and, each one glancing over his right shoulder, halts in succession, and fronts when he has arrived at his place, which is 4 yards from that of the man next behind him. The rear rank men regulate themselves by their file leaders, and remain exactly behind them. When the third man from the right has faced to the front, the instrnctor commands Bight-'DR^SB, the gunner dresses the rear rank; and the instructor commands Front. Daring the exercise, the gunner superintends the rear rank. To open the files without too much extending the front, the instructor forms the platoon in single rank, or else opens the ranks by marching the front rank 12 yards to the front, or the rear rank 12 yards to the rear. He then commands: 1. To the front — OPEN FILES. 2. March. 3. Bight-VREBa. 4. Front. At the command March, Nos. 1 and 2 move 9 yards, Nos. 3 and 4 move 6 yards, and Nos. 5 and 6 move 3 yards to their front, and halt. At the third command, each dresses on his own line. 66. The files being opened, the instructor commands : Guard. At the command Guard, carry the right foot 2 feet from the left, the heels on the same line ; place the left hand, closed, 6 inches from the body, and as high as the elbow; the fingers towards the body, the little finger nearer than the thumb, (posi- tion of the bridle hand.) At the same time place the right hand in tierce, at the height of, and 3 inches from the left hand, 100 SCHOOL OF THK PIECE. the thumb extended on the back of the gripe ; the little finger by the side of the others ; the point of the sabre inclined to the left, and 2 feet higher than the hand. THE MOULINETS. 61. The instructor commands: Lefl — MOUHNET. 1 pause ; 2 motions. At the command moulinet, extend the right arm to the front to its full length, the hand in tierce, and as high as the eyes. Two. Lower the blade in rear of the left elbow ; graze the horse's neck quickly, describing a circle from rear to front, and return to the position of Guard. Bight — MOULINET. 1 pause ; 2 motions. 68. At the command moulinet, extend the right arm to the front to its full length, the hand in quarte, and as high as the eyes. Two. Lower the blade in rear of the right elbow; graze the horse's neck quickly, describing a circle from rear to front, and return to the position of Guard. 69. To execute the moulinet without stopping, if the in- structor wishes to begin by the left, he commands : Left and right — moulinet. 1 pause ; 2 motions. If he wishes to begin by the right, he commands : Bight and left — moulinet. 1 pause ; 2 motions. At either of these commands, the cannoneers, commencing from the position of Guard, execute alternately what is laid down in Nos. 67 and 68, without stopping at any motion. Bear — moulinet. 1 pause ; 2 motions. 70. At the command moulinet, raise the arm to the right and rear to its full extent, the point of the sabre upwnrds, the SCHOOL OF THE PIECE 101 edge to the right, the tbamb extended on the back of the gripfe; the body slightly turned to the right. Two. Describe a circle in rear from left to right, the hand as far as possible from the body, and return to the position of Guard. When the cannoneers execute the monlinets well, the instructor requires them to execute several in succession, until the command Guard. the thrust. tl. To execute the thrust, the instructor commands: In tierce — point. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. At the command point, raise the hand in tierce as high as the eyes, throw back the right shoulder, carrying the elbow to the rear ; the point of the sabre to the front, the edge upwards. Two. Thrust to the front, extending the arm to its full length. Three. Return to the position of Guard. In quarte — point. 2 pauses; 3 motions. T2. At the command point, lower the hand in quarte near the right hip, the thumb extended on the right side of the gripe, the point a little higher than the wrist. Two. Thrust to the front, extending the arm to its full length. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Left — point. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. 13. At the command point, turn the head to the left, draw back the hand in tierce towards the right, at the height of the neck, the edge upwards, the point directed to the left. Two. Thrust to the left, extending the arm to its full length. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Bight — POINT. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. 14. At the command point, turn the head to the right, I 2 102 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. carry the hand in qnarte near the left breast, the edge upwards, the point directed to the right. Two. Thrust to the right, extending the arm to its full length. TnKEE. Return to the position of Guard. Bear — point. 2 panses; 8 motions. ■[5. At the command point, turn the head to the right and rear, bring the hand in quarte opposite to the right shoulder, the arm half extended, the blade horizontal, the point to the rear, the edge upwards. Two. Thrust to the rear, extending the arm to its full length. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Against infantry, Left — point. 2 panses ; 8 motions. 76. At the command point, turn the head to the left, raise the hand in tierce near the neck, the point of the sabre directed at the height of the breast of a man on foot. Two. Thrust down in tierce. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Against infantry, Bight — point. 2 panses; 3 motions. 11. At the command point, turn the head to the right, carry the hand in quarte near the right hip, the point of the sabre directed at the height of the breast of a man on foot. Two. Thrust in quarte. Three. Return to the position of Guard. THE CUT. 78. To execute the cnt, the instructor commands: Front — CUT. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. At the command cut, raise the sabre, the arm half extended, the hand a little above the head, the edge upwards, the point to the rear and higher than the hand. fSOHCOL or THE PIECE. 103 Two. Cut, extending the arm to its full length. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Le/l — CUT. 2 pauses; 3 motions. 19. At the command cut, turn the head to the left, raise the sabre, the arm extended to the right, the hand in quarte, ana as high as the head, the point higher than the hand. Two. Cut diagonally to the left. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Bight — CUT. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. 80. At the command cut, turn the head to the right, carry the hand opposite to the left shoulder, the point of the sabre upwards, the edge to the left. Two. Extend the arm quickly to its foil length, and give a back-handed cut horizontally. Three. Return to the position of Guard. The cuts Nos. 78, 79, and 80 are also used against infantry, observing to direct them vertically. Sear — cut. 2 pauses; 3 motions. 81. At the command cut, turn the head to the right, throwing back the right shoulder; carry the hand as high as, and opposite to the left shoulder, the sabre perpendicular, the edge to the left. Two. Extend the arm quickly to its full length, and give a back-handed cut, horizontally, to the rear. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Bight, in tierce and quarte — cut. 3 pauses ; 4 motions. 82. At the command cut, execute the first motion of right cut, No. 80. Two. Execute the second motion of right cut. Three. Turn the hand in quarte, and cut horizontally. Four. Return to the position of Guard. 104 SCHOOL OF TH£ PIECE. Lefl, in quarte and tierce — out. 3 pauses ; 4 motions. 83. At the command cut, execute the first motion of le/l cut, No. 79 Two. Execute the second motion of left cut. Three. Turn the hand in tierce, and cut horizontally. FouE. Return to the position of Guard. Bear, in tierce and quarte — out. 3 pauses; 4 motions. 84. At the command cut, execute the first motion of rear cut, No. 81. Two. Execute the second motion of rear cut. Three. Turn the hand in quarte, and cut horizontally. Four. Return to the position of Guard. THE PARRY. 85. To execute the parry, the instructor commands : In tierce — ^parry. 1 pause; 2 motions. At the command parry, carry the hand quickly a little to the ft"ont and right, the nails downwards, without moving the elbow, the point inclined to the front, as high as the eyes, and in the direction of the right shoulder; the thumb extended on the back of the gripe, and pressing against the guard. Two. Return to the position of Guard. In quarte — parry. 1 pause; 2 motions. 86. At the command parry, turn the hand, and carry it quickly to the front and left, the nails upwards, the edge to the left, the point inclined to the front, as high as the eyes, and in the direction of the left shoulder; the thumb extended on the back of the gripe, and resting against the guard. Two. Return to the position of Guard. For the head — parry. 1 paose ; 2 motions. SCHOOL or THE PIECE 105 87. At the commatid paery, raise the sabre quickly abcve the head, the arm nearly extended, the edge upwards, the point to the left, and about 6 inches higher than the hand. The hand is carried more or less to the right, left, or rear, according to the position of the adversary. Two. Return to the position of Guard. Against infantry, right — parry. 2 pauses; 3 motions. 88. At the command parry, turn the head to the right, throwing back the right shoulder, raise the sabre, the arm ex- tended to the right and rear, the point upwards, the hand in tierce ; the thumb extended on the back of the gripe, the edge to the left. Two. Describe a circle quickly on the right, from rear to front, the arm extended ; turn aside the bayonet with the back of the blade, bringing the hand as high as the head, the point upwards. Three. Return to the position of Guard. Against infantry, left — parry. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. 89. At the command parry, turn the head to the left, raise the sabre, the arm extended to the front and right, the point upwards, the hand iu tierce ; the thumb extended on the back of the gripe, the back of the blade to the front. Two. Describe a circle quickly on the left, from front to rear, along the horse's neck, the arm extended ; turn aside the bayonet with the back of the blade, bringing the hand still in tierce above the left shonlder. Three. Return to the position of Guard. THE THRUST AND CUT CO.MBINED. 90. When the cannoneers begin to execute correctly the above cuts, thrusts, and parries, the instructor requires them to make the application of them by combined motions, as follows: In tierce — point, and front out. In quarte — POINT, AND front cut. 106 BCUOOL OF THE PIECE Left — POINT, AND CUT. Right — POINT, AND CUT. JBeor — ^poiNT, and cut. Again^ infantry, right — POINT and OUT. Against infantry, left — point and cut. Carry — sabee. 91. As it is prescribed in No. 22, and carry the right foot by the side of the left. 92. When the instructor wishes to form the platoon, he commands : 1. To the rigM (or left) — close files. 2. March. At the command close files, the men all face to the right, (or left,) except the file on which they close. At the command March, they step off together, and each one fronts in succession, by a left (or right; face, when he has closed up to the man who precedes him. After the ranks are formed, the instructor closes and dresses them. If the files have been opened to the front, the instructor com- mand.s : 1. Close files. 2. March. At the command close files, Nos. 7 and 8 stand fast, the other numbers face to the rear. At the command March, all close on Nos. 7 and 8, each in his own rank, and face about. The ranks are then formed, or closed, and the platoon aligned. 8CH0OL or THE TIXCK. JOY AKTICLE THIRD. MANUAL OP THE PIECE. 93. The instructor should bear in mind that, in every change of numbers at the gun, each recruit has to learn different duties, and to handle different implements from those he was pre- viously engaged with; and these again vary with the several natures of ordnance and machines which an artilleryman must use. It is Impossible that such a variety of exercises can be weh executed, or even remembered, unless the recruit is made to comprehend the object of the various duties he is called upon to perform. For the purpose of instructing the recruit, each detachment is to be formed in front of the piece, unlirabered, and the different numbers are to be called upon, successively, to perform their re- spective duties in detail; while the rest of the detachment look on and observe their motions. When it is found difiBcult to make the recruit sensible of the defect of his position, etc., the instructor will place himself, or another recruit, in the correct position. 94. Nine men, including the gunner, are necessary for the service of a field piece. When, from necessity, the detachment consists of less than nine, the higher numbers are struck out, and additional duties are imposed upon those remaining. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS. PIECE UNLIMBERED. 95. The gunner is at the end of the trail handspike; Nog. 1 and 2 are about 2 feet outside the wheels. No. 1 on the right, and No. 2 on the left; with howitzers, rather in rear of the muzzle; with guns, in line with the front part of the wheels; Nob. 3 and i are in line with the knob of the cascable, covering Nos. 1 and 2 : No. 5 is 5 yards in rear of the left wheel ; No. 6 in rcnr of the limber, and Xo. 1 on his left, covering No. 5 ; No. 108 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 8, the chief of the caisson, is 4 yards in rear of the limber, and on its left ; all face to the front. The chief of the piece is opposite the middle of the trail hand- spike, outside and near the left cannoneers. In actual firing he takes his place on the right or left, where he can best observe the effect of the shot. LOADING AND FIRING. 96. The piece is taken at the drill ground, unlimbered, and prepared for action ; the limber in position behind the piece, and facing towards it; the end of the pole 6 yards from the end of the trail handspike. 97. Commanding and Pointing. The gunner gives all executive commands in action. He is answerable that all the numbers perform their duties correctly. He communicates the orders which he receives for the kind of ammunition to be fired ; sending to No. 6 the time or distance for each round, when firing shells or spherical case shot. He should, when the firing is slow, see that each fuze is properly prepared, and make such correc- tions as are necessary; for this purpose he, as well as No. 6, should be provided with a fuze-gouge. On receiving the command, or signal to commence firing, he gives the command Load; takes hold of the handspike at the end with his right hand, and at the centre with his left ; places his left knee against the left hand, bending over it, the right knee being slightly bent; looks over the top of the piece, and gives the direction. He then steps to the breech to give the elevation, which he does by placing the hausse on its seat, taking hold of a handle of the elevating screw, drawing back his right foot, bending over his left knee, and sighting through the slit in the hausse. In the drill of recruits, the gunner should be made to name the elevation and range before stepping up to the breech. When the piece is loaded and pointed, he removes the hausse, gives the command Ready, and, stepping clear of the wheel to that side where he can best observe the effect of hi< shot, gives scnooi. OF THE piece; 109 tlie command Fire. As soon as the piece has been fired, be causes it to be run up to its former place if necesSary. When the instructor, instead of giving the command com- mence FIRING, gives that of Load, the gunner repeats it, and performs the same duties as before, except that he does not command Fibe until the firing is ordered to commence. After the command commence firing is given, the action is continued by the gunner, without further commands from the instructor, until the firing is ordered to cease. When the commands are all given by the instructor, as in loading by detail, the gunner performs the same dutie.s, but without repeating the commands. 98. The detachment being formed in front of and facing the piece, the instructor commences by giving the following explanations : The term Cannon, embraces all kinds of heavy ordnance, Gcns, Howitzers, Mortars; each is mounted on a carriage; and each field carriage has a limber. The term Piece is applied to the camion, and is also used to designate it in union with its carriage, with or without the limber attached. The front of a piece, when limbered, or prepared for moving, is the direction in which the pole points; when unlimbered, or prepared for action, it is the direction in which the gun points ; the rigM and leji are in each case determined accordingly. He then repeats the names of the following objects, indicating each of them. The Limber; ammum'lion chest, lid,7iandles;'P0i.iE: pole-yoke, branches, sliding ring, pole prop, and chain; Wheel: spokes, felloes, nave, tire; Pintle-hook, and hey. The Gun carriage: handspike, pointing rings, elevating screw, handles, sponge hook. The Gnu, or Howitzer, giving explanations of the parts: The bore is the interior hollow cylinder which receives the (.-barge. The muzzle is the entrance of the bore. The /ace is the ft-ont plane terminating the piece. K 110 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. The cent is the hole through which fire is communicated to the charge. The trunnions are the projecting cylinders which support the gnu. The instructor then calls No. 1 to the right side of the piece, and indicates the following parts with his hand, after naming them. The sponge and rammer: staff, sponge, rammer head, ferrules. Gun: bore, muzzle, face, vent. He then commands : To YOUR POSTS. 99. Sponging and Ramming. Until the command Load, No. 1 stands square to the front, in line with the front part of the wheels, holding the sponge about the middle of the staff in his right hand, and trailing it at an angle of 46°, sponge head up. The instructor commands: By detail — Load. 3 pauses; 4 motions. At this command No. 1 faces to the left, steps obliquely to the right with his right foot, without moving his left, and at the same time brings the sponge smartly to a perpendicular position by drawing his right hand up in line with the elbow. The sponge is grasped firmly in the hand, and the rammer head kept just over the right toe, the elbow close to the side. ^ Two. He steps obliquely to the left with his left foot, planting it about half way between the piece and the wheel, and opposite the muzzle; bringing the sponge at the same time across his body to the left, so that his right hand may be opposite the raid- die of the body, the sponge staff being inclined at an angle of 45° across the front of it. Three. He takes a side step to the right of 30 inches, and bending his right knee, brings the sponge to a horizontal posi- tion, extending the hands to the ends of the staff, the sponge head to the left, the back of his right hand up, and that of his left down, the sponge head against the face of the piece. Four. He inserts the sponge head, drops his left hand behind his thigh, shoulders square, feet equally turned out, straightens SCHOOL OF THE PlKCil. Ill tiie right knee, and, bending over the left, forces the sponge home. Sponge. 3 pauses ; 4 motions. 100. At this command No. 1 fixes his eye on the vent to see that it is closed, gives two turns to the sponge, taking great care to press it at the same time against the bottom of the bore. Two. He draws out the sponge, at the same time straightening his left knee, and bending his right; seizes the staff near tlie sponge head with his left hand, back of the hand down, and places the sponge against the face of the piece. Three. He turns the sponge by bringing his hands together In the middle of the staff, giving it a cant with each hand, throw- ing the sponge head over, at the same time turning his wrist, which brings the staff horizontal, and extending his hands to the ends of the staff, back of the left up, that of the other down. During the whole time of sponging, No. 1 keeps his eye on the vent. If at any time it is not closed, he will discontinue the manoeuvre, and command stop ve\t. FouB. He introduces the rammer head into the muzzle, as soon as No. 2 has inserted the charge, and joins his left baud to his right, casting his eyes to the front. Ram. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. 101. At this command No. 1 rams home, throwing the weight of his body with the rammer ; bending over his left knee, and pass- ing his left arm, with the elbow slightly bent, and back of the hand np, in a horizontal position over the piece, until it points in the direction of the left trunnion; the right shoulder thrown back, and the eyes cast towards the front until the cartridge is home. Two. Ho jerks the sponge out with his right hand, allowing it to slide through the hand as far as the middle of the staff, when he grasps it firmly, and seizing it close to the rammer head with the loft hand, back of the hand up, places the rammer head 112 SCHOOL OF THE. PIECE. against the face of the piece; both knees straight; eyes to hir own frout. Three. He then draws the sponge close to his body, and im- mediately steps back outside the wheel, first with the right, then with the left foot ; so that when the right foot is brought to it the right hip may be on a line with the front of the wheel. lu drawing the right foot to the left, he gives the sponge a cant with his left hand, at the same time quitting it, and brings the sponge to a perpendicular position in the right hand, the rammer head resting on the right toe. 102. Beady. At this command, which is given as soon as the piece is loaded, or the firing about to commence, No. 1 breaks well off to his left with the left foot, bending the left knee, and straightening the right leg, drops the end of the sponge staff into the left hand, back of the hand down, and fixes his eyes on the muzzle. The heels should be parallel to the wheel, the body erect on the haunches, and the sponge and rammer held in both hands in a horizontal position, sponge-head to the left. The piece having been fired, No. 1 rises on his right knee, and returns to his position, as in the third motion of Ram. At the command Load, he steps in and performs his duties in the same manner as before. 103. When the loading is not by detail, No. 1 goes through all his duties at the command Load, returns to his position outside the wheel, as given in the third motion of Ram; breaks off at the command Ready, and at the flash of the gun rises, steps in, and performs his duties in the same manner as before. This he continues until the command cease firing is given, at which command he resumes the position : To your posts. If the spong- ing has been commenced when the command cease eirinq is given, it is completed before No. 1 resumes his post. In sponging and ramming, if the length of the piece requires it, the sponge and rammer are to be pressed home in two motions, JNo. 1 extending his right hand to the end of the staff, as soon aa it reaches the' muzzle. SCHOOL or THE PIKCX. 118 In 8poDgiDg howitzers, Xo. 1 presses the sponge to the bottom of the chamber, which should be well sponged ont. He wipes the bore by nibbing its whole surface, without allowing the sponge to tarn in his hands. REMARKS ON THE DUTIES OF NO. 1. 104. The position of the left foot will not be considered as absolnte; it is given as the usual one, and may be modified ac- cording to the calibre of the piece, and height of the man. The same remarks will apply to the distance between the feet They will be placed in such position, and at such distance from each other, as will enable the man to perform his duties with the most ease and steadiness, and at the same time exert his full strength, which will always be required after firing a few roands, especially when a new sponge is used. One object of joining the left hand to the right, and casting the eyes to the front whilst ramming, is to refuse the right shoulder; and to secure this object, the left hand, when it passes over the piece, is not carried further back than the direction indicated. This will keep the shoulders in a line parallel with their position, at the commencement of the movement, until the cartridge is set home, and thus guard against fatal results in case of a premature discharge. 105. Loading. The instructor places No. 2 on the left of the piece, repeats the nomenclature as for No. 1, indicates the following named objects, and explains their uses : Stbafpeo BHOT : cartridge, ball, sabot ; Canister suot : cartridge, canister; Shrll, or Sphsbioal case shot : cartridge, case shot, or shell, fuze. He then commands : To TOTJR POSTS. Until the command Load is given, as for No. 1, No. 2 remains in his position. On this command being given, he faces to his right, and by two oblique steps, corresponding to those of No. 1, the first with the left, the second at the command Two, with the right foot, he places himself near the muzzle of the piece. At the command Thbei, he brings up his left foot to the side of the s K a in SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. right, and faces to his right, bringing his hands together to re- ceive the ammunition from No. 5 ; the cartridge in the right, the shot in the left hand. As soon as the sponge is withdrawn, he faces to his left, and puts the ammunition into the muzzle, taking care that the seam of the cartridge does not come under the vent, and then steps back, commencing with his left foot, to his position outside the wheel, in the same manner that No. 1 does. At the command Ready, he breaks well oflf to his right with the right foot, bending the right knee, and straightening the left leg ; the bodj erect on the haunches, and fixes his eyes on the muzzle. The piece having been fired. No. 2 rises on his left leg, remains fating the piece until he hears the command Load, or observes the flash of the gun, then steps in, and performs his duty as before. At the command oease firing, he takes his position outside the wheel, and faces to the front. With the howitzer, No. 2 puts in the charge, so that the fuze may rest against the rammer head, and No. 1 sets it home carefully. 106. Serving the vent. The instructor places No. 3 on the right of the piece, indicates the following objects, and explains their uses : Tube pouch; Thumb stall; Priming wire; Gunners' gimlet; Friction peimee; Lanyard: lanyard hook ; Vent: vent field; Breech: cascable, knob, and neck of cascable. He then commands: To YOUR POSTS. No. 3 stands in line with the knob of the cascable, covering No. 1, the priming wire in his right hand, thumb through the ring, the thumb stall on the left thumb, the tube pouch fastened to the waist. Load. At this command he steps to his left, wipes the vent field with the thumb stall, which he then holds pressed upon the vent, keeping his elbow raised ; -his fingers on the left side of the piece, so as to allow the gunner to point over his thumb ; the right hand on the tube pouch. When the piece is sponged, and sCUOOL OF THE PLECZ. ^15 the charge inserted by No. 2, he jaraps to the end of the traU handspike, and, seiziiig it with both hands, prepares to move it to the right or left, on a signal from the gunner, who taps the right of the trail for a movement to the left, and the left of the trail for a movement to the right. As soon as the piece is pointed, the ganner raises both hands as a signal to Xo. 3, who then resumes the position to your posts. Ready. At this command, he steps in to the piece, pricks the cartridge, taking care not to move the charge, and covers the vent with his left hand as soon as the tube is inserted. At the command Fire, he steps to his right, clear of the wheel, and at the flash of the gan, or at the command Load, serves vent as before. No. 3 should be careful to keep the vent closed from the time the sponge enters the muzzle until the charge is inserted by No. 2. lOT. Firing. The instructor places No. 4 on the left of the piece, equips him with a tube pouch, and repeats the nomenclature as for No. 3. He then commands : To YOUR POSTS. No. 4 stands in line with the knob of the cascable, and covering No. 2. Load, At this command, No. 4 inserts the lanyard hook into the ring of a primer, and stands fast. Ready. At this command, he steps in with the right foot, drops the tube in the vent, takes the lanyard in his right hand, moves to the rear so far as to keep the lanyard slack, but capable of being stretched, without altering his position, which should be clear of the wheel, left foot broken to tlie left and rear. Fire. As soon as No. 3 is clear of the wheel, No. 4 pulls the lanyard briskly and firmly, passing the hand, back up, in a down- ward direction to the rear, so as to keep the lanyard hook from flying back in the direction of the face. Should the tube fail to explode the charge, the gunner immediately commands, DonH advance, the primer has failed. Upon which No. 2 steps in- side the wheel, close to the axletree, receives from No. 3 over the 'Wheel 8 priming wire, and from No, 4 a prepared primer, pricks, 116 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. primes, and resumes his post. At the command, Cease firing, No. 4 secures his lanyard. 108. No. 3, as well as No. 4, should be equipped with a tube pouch, furnished with friction primers and lanyards. lu the absence of No. 4, immediately after pricking the cartridge, he prepares and inserts a tube, steps to his post, faces the Tent, breaks to his rear with the left foot, and at the command Fire, discharges the piece. He then resumes his post, and tends the vent as before. 109. Serving ammTmition. The instructor stations No. 6, covering the left wheel, 5 yards in rear of it, and No. *l in rear of and near the left limber wheel ; No. 6 is stationed in rear of the limber chest, and issues the ammunition. He is provided with a fuze-goage, and prepares the shell and spherical case shot according to the distance or time ordered, before delivering it to No. 5. To ont the faze. Place the projectile between the knees, fuze uppermost, and support it with the left hand. Holding the faze- gonge in the right hand, place the left corner of its edge close to, and on the right of the graduated mark indicating the time desired; then cut away gradually until the composition is exposed for a length about equal to the width of the gouge. Great care must be taken not to expose the composition to the left of the proper graduation mark, and to this end particularly avoid com- mencing to cut too close to the desired mark ; for after the com- position is once exposed it is very easy to pare away to the left, if the time has not been accurately cut. When time permits, it is well to expose the composition fully, either by cutting the opening larger, towards the right, or (with shells only) by cutting another opening to the right of the first. It is in all cases better to enlarge the first opening, and always by extending it towards the right. Care must be taken not to cut the fuzes more rapidly than the demand for shells and Shrapnell shot requires. At the command Load, Xo. 5 runs to the ammunition chest, receives from No. 7 or No. 6 a single round, the shot in the right hand, the cartridge in his left; takes it to the piece and delivers SCUOCL OF THE MECE. II"; it to No. 2 J returns immediately for another round, and then halts at his post uutil the piece is fired. In firing shells or spherical case, he exhibits the faze to the gunner before deliver- ing the charge to No. 2. When ammunition pouches are used they are worn by Nos. 5 and 7, hung from the left shoulder to the right side ; the round is placed in the poach by No. 6 or No. 7, so that the cartridge will be to the front. When it is brought up No. 5 holds open the pouch, and No. 2 takes out the round with both 'hands. In rapid firing, with round shot and canister, Nos. .5 and 7 may alternate in delivering the charges to No. 2, especially when the ammunition is issued direct from the caisson. At tiie command Cease FiaiNa, No. 5 carries the round back to No. 6. No. 6 will be careful not to raise the lid unnecessarily. It should be kept closed when possible. In firing shells and spherical case, he prepares each fuze as directed, assisted when necessary by No. 7. He gives No. 5 the lime or distance of the fuze with each round issued, who reports to the gunner before delivering it to No. 2. At the command Cease i-irinq, he carefully replaces the ammunition in the chest, and secures the lid. 110. Loading by detail. For the instruction of recruits united for the service of the gun, the exercite is conducted by detail, the instrnetor giving all the commands. His commands are, Load by detail — LOAD ; two, three, four : SPONGE j TWO, THREE, FOUR: RAM; two, three; READY; FIRE; CEASE FIRING. When the men are sufficiently instructed to go through the manual, without detail, the commands of the instructor for that purpose, are — Load ; Commence firing ; Cease firing ; or, simply, Com.me.vce firing, and Cease firing. After the com- mand CoM.MENCE firing, the action is continued as laid down for loading without detail, until the command Cease firing is given, which is repeated by the chief of the piece and the gunner. 118 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. MOVING THE PIECE BY HAND. PIECE UNLIMBERED. 111. To the front. The instructor commands : 1. By hand to the front. 2. Maboh. 3. Halt. At the first command, the gunner seizes the end of the band- spike, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 the spokes of the wheels. No. 1, with his left hand; Nos. 2, 3, and 4 with both hands; No. 1 holds the sponge with his right hand, the staflf resting upon liis right shoulder, sponge head down. At the second command they move the piece forward, the gunner raising the trail until the command Halt is given, when all resume their posts. 112. To the rear. The instructor commands : 1. By hand to the rear. 2. Makoh. 3. Halt. At the first command, the gunner, facing to the rear, seizes the handspike with his right hand ; Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 seize the wheels as before, except that No. 1, holding the sponge in his left hand, uses his right at the wheel. At the command March, they move the piece to the rear, the gunner raising the trail, until the command Halt is given, when all resume their posts. CHANGING POSTS. 113. In order to instruct the men in all the duties at the piece, the instructor causes them to change posts. For this purpose he commands : 1. Change posts. 2. March. At the command Change posts, the men on the right of the piece face to the rear; those who have equipments lay thera down ; No. 1 resting the sponge head on the nave of the wheel. At the command Maech, each man takes the place and equip- ments of the man in his front. No. 1 takes the place of No. 3. No. 3 " " of No. 8. No. 8 " " of No. 6. No. 6 " " of No. T. No. 1 " " of No. 5 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 119 No. 6 takes the place of No. i. No. 4 " " of No. 2. No. 2 " " of No. 1. The gunner changes with one of the numbers by special direc- tion of the instructor. A suflBcient number of the most intelli- gent cannoneers must be kept instructed to serve as gunners. 114. Eqaipments. The gunner, who is responsible for the equipments, either distribatcs them from the limber chest, or they may be hung on the neck of the cascable, and distributed by him to the proper numbers, at the command Take equipments, from the instructor. He receives them again at the command Replagi! equipments, making such disposition of them as may be directed. LIMBERING. 115. To the front. The instructor designates the following parts of the carriage : Stock : trail, trail handles, trail plate, lunette, washer hook for handspike, large pointing ring, small pointing ring, sponge and rammer stop, sponge chain and hasp, ear plate /or sponge chain hasp, handspike ring, sponge hook. He then commands: Limber to the front. At this command. No. 1 steps up between the muzzle and the wheel, by the oblique steps indicated for loading ; turns the staff, seizing it with the left hand, at the same time shifting his right, the back of the right up, that of the left down, and passes the sponge on its hook; rammer head to the rear, to No. 3, who re- ceives the head, secures it against the stop, and keys it up. Tho piece is then brought about by the cannoneers, and the limber, inclining to the right, passes to its place in front of it, being drawn, when it is not horsed, by Nos. 6 and 7, who take hold at the end of the pole for the purpose. To bring the piece about, the gunner and No. 5 pass to the right of the handspike, and, facing towards the left, seize it, the gunner near the end, and No. 6 at the middle, and on his right, rnise the trail and carry it round to the left; Nos. 1 and 2 bear 120 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. down upon the muzzle, and Nos. 3 and 4, each using both hands, bring the wheels round ; No. 3 turning the right wheel to the rear, and No. 4 the left wheel to the front. When the piece is brought about, the trail is lowered ; Nos. 3 and 4 step within the wheels to avoid the limber; Nos. 1 and 2 remain at the muzzle, and the gunner and No. 5 step between Nos. 3 and 4 and the trail, the gncner first taking out the handspike, and passing it to No. 4, by whom it is put up. As soon as the limber is in front of the piece, the gunner com- mands: Hait, Limber up; upon which the limber halts, the gunner and No. 5 raise the trail by means of the handles, and, assisted by Nos. 3 and 4 at the wheels, and Nos. 1 and 2 at the head of the carriage, run the piece forward, and place the lunette upon the pintle ; the gunner then puts in the key, and all take their posts; when necessary, Nos. 6 and 1 assist at the trail in bringing the piece about, and in limbering up. 116. To the right, (or left.) The instructor commands: Limber to the right, (or left.) The trail is turned to the right, (or left,) and the piece limbered np as before; the limber inclining to the right, (or left,) and taking its place by a right (or left) wheel. 117. To the rear. The instructor commands : Limber to the rear. The limber inclines to the right, and takes its place by wheelhig about to the left, and the piece is then limbered up as before. POSTS OF THE CANNONEERS. PIECE LIMBERED. 118. Nos. 1 and 2 are opposite the muzzle; Nos. 3 and 4 opposite the knob of the cascable ; the gunner and No. 5 oppo- site the rear, and Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the front parts of the limber wheels ; No. 8 is on the left, and opposite the limber chest of the caisson. All face to the front, and cover each other in lines 1 yard from the wheels; the even numbers on the right, the odd numbers on the left. The chief of the piece is on the left, and, if not mounted, opposite the end of the pole ; if mounted, he is near the leading driver, and on his left. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 121 TO FORM TIIE DETACHMENT. 119. To the front. The instructor commands : Detachment — front. The gunner commands: Cannoneers, forward, Marcb; the even numbers move directlj to the front ; the odd numbers closing on them when clear of the piece. The gunner files them to the left, and fronts the detachment at the proper distance. No. S moves directly forward, and takes his place in the detachment. To the rear. The instructor commands : Detachment — kear. The gunner commands: Cannoneers, rear face — March. At the command March, the odd numbers move directly to the rear, the even numbers closing on them, and the detachment is filed to the left, halted at a proper distance by the gunner, and faced lo the front; No. 8 taking his proper place in the detach- ment. In forming detachments in line, they are always, after halting, dressed to the right by the gunner. I'DSTS OF THE DETACHMENTS AT THEIR PIECES. 1 20. In front. The detachment is in line facing to the front, 2 yards from the end of the pole or the lead horses. In rear. The centre of the detachment is 2 yards behind the muzzle, and facing to it. On the right or left. The detachment is in line opposite the limber axletree, and 3 yards from it. In horse artillery, it is in line with and 3 yards from the leading horses. In all cases it faces to the front. CHANGE OF POSTS OF DETACHMENTS AT THEIR PIECES. 121. From front to rear. The detachments being in line, in front of their pieces, to post them in rear, the instructor com- .nands : Detachments — rear. The gunner commands : Cannoneers, rear face, March. At 122 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. the command Mabch, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and i oblique sufficiently to the left, and Nos. 5, 6, 1, and 8 to the right, move along the sides of their piece ; re-unite as soon as they have passed it, and are halted at the proper distance, faced to the front, and aligned to the right by the gunner. From rear to front. The instructor commands: Detachments — fhont. The gunner repeats the command, and adds — March. At this command, the cannoneers oblique; Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, to the left; Nos. 5, 6, 1, and 8 to the left; pass their piece, re-unite in front, and are halted and aligned to the right by the gunner. From rear to right, (or left.) The instructor commands : Dteaciiments — right, (or left.) The gunner commands right {ov le/c) oblique, March, and afterwards Forward, and Halt, in time to bring the detachment to its post on the right or left. He then aligns it to the right. 122. In horse artillery, to change from front to rear, the gunners command: Left reverse, March; Forward: Left re- ver^e, March; Halt. From rear to front. The gunners command : Bight oblique, March; Forward. Li ft oblique, Marcu; Forward; Halt. From rear to right, (or left.) The gunners command: Bight (oT left) oblique, March; Forward; Halt. From right (or left) to rear. The gunners command : Bight (or left) reverse, March; Forward; BigJU (or left) reverse, March; Halt. If the piece is moving when the change of post is ordered, the gunner halts or slackens the pace until it passes, and then com- mands : Left (or right) oblique, March ; Forward. The commands of the instructor are the same as in foot artil- lery. The movements are executed in the same mannei when the detachments are dismounted. sciiodi. of the riECE. 123 TO POST THE CANNUNEEIIS AT THE PIECES LIMBERED. 123. The detaclimcnt being formed in line in front or rear, on the right or left, the instructor commands : Cannoneers, to youh posts. From the front. The gunner faces the detachment to the right, and commands : To your pontx, March. At this command, the cannoneers, Nos. 1 and 2, turning to the right, and opening out, file to their posts; halt at their proper places, and face to the front. From the rear, right or left. At the command Cannoneees TO YOUE POSTS, the gunner, in each case, faces the detachment to the left, and marches the cannoneers bj that flank to their posts. MOVING THE PIECE I!Y HAND. PIECE LIMBERDE. 124. To the front. The instructor commands : 1. FoEWAED. 2. Maeoh. 3. Halt. At the first command, Nos. 6 and 7 seize the end of the pole with both hands, the gunner and No. 5, facing towards the pole, seize the splinter bar with one hand, and the pole with the other ; Nos. 3 and 4 seize the spokes of the hind wheels with both hands, and Nos. 1 and 2 apply both hands at the head of the carriage. At the second command, all acting together, urge the piece for- ward until the command Halt is given, when all resume their posts. 125. To the rear. The instructor commands : 1. Backwaed. 2. Maech. 3. Halt. At the first command, all faxje to the rear; Nos. 6 and 7 seize the end of the pole with both hands; No. 6 and the gunner seize the spokes of the limber, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 those of the hind wheels. At the command March, all moving together, move the piece to the rear, Nos. 6 and 1 keeping it straight by the use of the pole. At the command Halt, all resume their posts. 124 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. UXLIMBEKING, AND COMING INTO ACTION. 126. To the front. The instructor commands: Action front. At this command, the gunner takes out the key, and, assisted by No. 5, raises the trail from the pintle, and then commands Drive on, upon which Nos. 6 and 1 reverse the limber to the left, and proceed with it to the rear ; again reverse to the left, and halt so that the limber shall cover the piece, with the end of the pole 6 yards from the end of the trail handspike. At the. same time that the limber moves off, the piece is brought about in all respects as in limbering to the front, except that the gunner and No. 5, without lowering the trail, carry it about, each by means of the handle on his own side. Nos. 6 and 1, when necessary, assist at the trail, after placing the limber in position. As soon as the piece is brought about, and the trail lowered. No. 4 takes out the handspike and passes it to the gunner, who fixes it in the trail. No. 1 takes out the sponge. No. 3 unkeying it, and No. 4 prepares his lanyard. All then resume their posts. 127. To the right, (or left.) The instructor commands : Action right, (or left.) The piece is nnlimbered, and placed in the required direction, and the limber wheels to the left, (or right,) and takes its place in rear, by reversing to the left, (or right.) 128. To the rear. The instructor commands : 1. Fire to the rear. 2. In battery. At the command In battery, the piece is nnlimbered as before ; the trail immediately lowered, and the gun prepared for action; the limber moves directly forward at the command Drive on, from the gunner, and takes its plaxie by coming to the left about. SERVICE OF THE GUN WITH DIMINISHED NUMBERS. 129. The men should be frequently exercised in serving pieces with diminished numberSj that each may know the duties he has to perform in such cases. Disabled men are replaced as soon as possible by the highest SCHOOL or THE PIECE. 125 numbers, or, if men are selected to replace them, the highest num- bers will be reduced to fill the vacancies thus created. During action, Nos. 1 and 2 may occasionally change places and numbers, as the duties of No. 1 are very severe. 130. Service of the gun by two men. The gunner com- mands, points, serves the vent, and fires; No. 1 sponges, loads, and serves ammunition. Three men. The gunner commands, points, serves the vent, and fires; No. 1 sponges; No. 2 loads, and serves ammunition. Four men. The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges ; No. 2 loads, and serves ammunition ; No. 3 serves the vent, and fires. Five men. The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges ; No. 2 loads; No. 3 serves the vent, and fires; No. 4 serves am- munition. Six men. The gunner commands and points; No. 1 sponges; No. 2 loads ; No. 3 serves the vent, and fires ; Nos. 4 and 5 serve ammunition. Seven men. The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges ; No. 2 loads ; No. 3 serves the vent, and attends to the trail ; No. 4 fires ; No. 6 is at the limber, serves ammunition to No. 5, and occasionally changes with him. Eight men. No. T assists No. 6 ; the other numbers as before TABLE FOK THE EXERCISE WITH DIMINISHED NUMBERS. Noi. retained. Distribution of dotiei. GanDOr. I 2 3 < 6 « 7 G. 1 G 1 2 G.3,4 G.3,4 G. G. G. G. G. 1,2,5 2,5 2,5 2 2 2 2 ft 1 2 8 8,4 8,4 8,4 8 8 ft 1 2 a 4 5 6 4 4 G. 1,2,8,4,5 G. 1,2,8,4,5,6 G. 1,2,8,4,5,6,7.. 5 5 6 "ii" 6 ..._... L2 126 SCUOOL OF. THE PIECE. SUPPLY OF AMMUNITION IN ACTION. ]31. When it is likely that movements must take place on the field, or the firing is slow, and it can be done without incon- venience, ammunition will be served direct from the rear chest of the caisson. No. 8 performing the duties prescribed for No. 6 at the limber chest. At convenient moments, the ammunition served out by No. 6 will be replaced from the rear caisson chest. If the ammunition chest at the piece is exhausted, the limber is replaced by that of the caisson, and the empty chest exchanged for the centre one of the caisson. As a rule, the limber chests, and especially that of the piece, will be kept full at the expense of the others, so that in case of a sudden movement on the field there shall always be a sufficient supply of ammunition at hand. Si IIOOL OF THE PIECB. 127 ARTICLE FOURTH. MECHANICAL MANCEUVEES. Nomenclature. 132. Before executing the mechanical manoeuvres, the in Btrnctor should designate the parts of the piece and its carriage^ and explain their uses. THE GUN. (Plates 6 and 7.) The gjnu for field service is made of bronze. The bore is the interior hollow cylinder which receives the charge. It includes all the part bored out, viz., the cylinder, the chamber, if there is one, and the curved surface connecting them. The bottom of the bore is a plain surface, perpendicular to the axis. Its diameter is somevirhat less than that of the bore, and is united with the sides by a curved surface. The muzzle is the entrance of the bore. The breech is the mass of solid metal between the bottom of the bore and the cascable. The seat for the hansse is behind the base of the breech. The cascable is the projecting part which terminates the piece. It consists of the knob, the neck, and the fillet. Tiie reinforce is the thickest part of the body of the gun. The chase is the conical part of the gnu in front of the reinforce. The neck is the smallest part of the piece in front of the astragal, or mouldings, at the termination of the chase. The swell of the muzzle is the large part of the gun in front of the neck; it givos strength to the gun at its termination, and facilitates the pointings; the muzzle sight is screwed into it 128 scnooi OF tue piece. In field howitzers a muzzle band takes the place of the swell of the muzzle. The face is the front plane terminating the piece. The tmimioiis are the projecting cylinders at the sides of the gun, which support it on its carriage. Their axes are in one line, which is perpendicular to the axis of the bore, and in the same plane with it. The rimbases are the short cylinders uniting the trunnions with the body of the gun. Their ends, or the shoulders of the trunnions, are in planes perpendicular to the axis of the trun- nions. The vent is a cylindrical hole, terminating near the bottom of the bore, through which fire is communicated to the charge. It is bored through a vent piece of wrought copper, which is screwed into the gun. The handles in heavy field guns are used in the mechanical manoeuvres. They are placed with their centres over the centre of gravity of the piece. THE CARRIAGE. (Plates 8 and 9.) The cheeks are two pieces of wood between ffhich the gun rests. The stock is of squared wood, in two pieces, joined to the cheeks, and serving to connect the two parts of the carriage together. It is used in directing the piece, etc. The trail is the curved part of the stock, which rests on the ground when the piece is in battery. The trunnion plates are fastened on the cheeks to receive the trunnions. The cap squares are pieces of iron placed over the trunnions to keep them in their plates. They are fastened by chains, pins, and keys. The elevating screw serves to raise or lower the breech. It has a handle with four prongs. The lock chain is placed on the side of the carriage. It serves to keep the wheel from turning. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 12? The trail handles arc placed on each side of the stock, and serve to raise it. The trail plate is a piece of iron fastened at the trail, having a very stout ring, called the trail lunette, which receives the pintle hook. The pointing rings (large and small) are on the trail ; the large one turns. They receive the handspike. The prolonge hooks are placed on the upper part of the stock. They serve to secure the prolonge when coiled. THE LIMBER. (Plates 10 and 11.) The limber is the forward part of the carriage, and runs upon the two fore wheels. The axle body is the wooden part in which the iron axletree is placed. The hounds are pieces of wood connecting the body of the axle to the splinter bar, and upon which the ammunition chest rests. The fork is a piece of wood between the hounds, and forms an opening in which the pole is placed. The splinter bar serves for hitching the wheel horses, and has for this purpose four trace hooks. It is fastened on the hounds and fork. The pole straps guide the pole. They are attached to the harness of the wheel horses, passing through sliding loops on tlie breast straps. The branches of the pole yoke are attached by means of sliding rings to the collars of the wheel horses, and support the polo. The pintle hook, on the hind part of the limber axletree, serves to unite the limber to the carriage, and has a key. The ammunition chest serves to transport ammunition, and is placed on the limber. THE CAISSON. (Plates 12 and 13.) It consists of a frame, mounted on wheels. 130 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. for the transport of two ammunition chests, a spare wheel, and Other spare parts, tools, etc. Its limber is simihxr to that of the piece. In case of necessity, cannoneers may be transported on the chests. The stock has an iron Innette on the front end ; at the rear end it is let in 4 inches for its whole width into the front of the axle body. The axle body is notched to receive the middle rail, and has tenons to fit into notches in the side rails. The middle and two side rails, and one cross bar, complete the wooden parts of the frame. The middle assembUng bar (iron) has two ears in the middle, to serve as stay plates for the ammunition chests, and a slat for the axe blade on the right of the middle rail. The rear assembling bar supports the spare wheel axle. It has a slat on the left of the middle rail for carrying a pick-axe. The spare wheel axle consists of a body and two ribs ; it has a chain and toggle to secure the wheel. There are two stays for the axle, the bolt hole in the head of one of them is square, in the other round. The carriage hook is intended to take a carriage which may have lost its limber. The bolster for the front foot board is fastened on the middle of the cross bar. The front foot board is fastened to the rails and cross bar ; the rear foot board to the rails only. Tlie key plate for spare pole is fastened on the under side of the lunette. The key is attached to the left side of the stock by a chain and eye pin, screwed into the left side of the stock. The spare pole ring is held by the axle strap. The spare handspike ring, key plate, and key, are on the right side of the middle rail. One key plate and key, for the shovel handle, are fastened on the inside of the right side rail. The lock chain bridle is fastened under the front end of the left side rail; it holds the large ring of the lock chain. The lock chain hook is fastened on the outside of the left side rail. SCHOOL or TU£ PIECS. 131 Two staples for tool handles are driven into the top of the axle body, in front of the iron axletree: one for the shovel handle, nerj the right side rail ; the other for the handle of the plck-axej on the left of the middle rail. The different parts are secured to each other by nails, riveta, bolts, nuts, and screws, etc. All parts of the carriages should be examined closely by the proper mechanics, at least once a week when in garrison, and daily in the field, the defective parts removed or repaired, and the fastenings kept secure and the nuts screwed tight. 133. The mana3iivres are prescribed for the 6-pounder and heavy 12-pounder batteries now in service. For batteries of light 12-poander8, the methods laid down for the 6-pounder batteries will, in general, apply. Care must be taken thai the men do not overstrain themselves. When practicable, the full number of men prescriljcd for each manceavre must always be employed. CHANGING AMMUNITION CHESTS. 134. In service, when the limber chest of the piece is emptied, the piece and caisson exchange limbers; Ko. S, assisted by No. 7, unlimbers and limbers up the caisson, and the middle chest is exchanged with the empty one on the limber as soon as practicable. To change the ammunition chests, the Instructor commands: 1. Prepare to change the ammunition chest. 2. Change the chest. At the first command, Nos. 5 and 6 unkey the empty chest, each on his own side, and, taking hold of the handles, place it upon the ground, on the left of the caisson. Xos. 7 and 8 unkey the middle chest at the same time. At the command Change the chest, Xos. 5, 6, 7, and 8, seizing the middle chest by the handles, lift it on the foot board, and, turning it end for end there, shift the chest along the stock to the limber, taking great care not to cut the bottom on the nuts, and put it in place; Nos. 5 and 6 resume their posts immediately 133 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. Nos. T aud 8 key the chest, replace the empty chest, key it, and resume their posts. CHANGING IV HEELS. 135. 6-pdr. Gim and 12-pdr. Howitzer. The piece being unlimbered, to change the right wheel, the instructor commands : 1. Prepare to change the right wheel. 2. Change the wheel. At the first command, Nos. 5, 6, and t dismount the spare wheel; No. 5 brings it near, and parallel to the disabled one, leaving room for the latter to be taken off. The gunner passes one end of his handspike to No. 1, placing it under the axle- tree close to the shoulder. The gunner and No. I, placing them- Belves between the handspike and piece, and facing the wheel, take hold of the handspike near the axle ; Nos. 4 and 6 take hold of the ends of the handspike; No. 6 assisting the gunner. At the command Change the wheel, the carriage is raised; Nos. 2 and 3 take off the disabled wheel ; No. 2 runs it to the rear, and Nos. 3 and 5 put on the spare wheel, No. 3 taking hold of it in the rear. Nos. 3 and 4 attend to the linchpins and washers on their respective sides. To change the left wheel, the gunner and No. 2, assisted by No. 6 and No. 3 respectively, man the handspike; Nos. 1 and 4 take off the wheel; Nos. 5, 6, and 7 dismount the spare wheel; No. 5 brings it up, and Nos. 4 and 5 put it on ; No. 1 runs the disabled wheel to the rear. The men at the handspike must raise the end of the axletree BufiSeiently high to throvr the weight on the other wheel, and those who take off the wheel must also lift it, and not increase the weight by allowing it to slide along the axletree. 12-pdr. Gun and 24-pdr. Howitzer. One end of a prolonge is fastened to the axletree near the disabled wheel, the other end being passed over the opposite wheel and manned by four men from another piece. A spare pole, manned by Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, .5, and 6, must be substituted for the handspike under the axletree. The gunner and No. 1 take off and put on the wheels. When a SCUOOL OF THE PIECE. ^„ . spare pole cannot be obtained, the carriage may be raised by means of the handspikes ; No. 2 places one in the mnzzle, and No. 1 crosses the other under it; No. 3 assists at the handspike in the mnzzle, and Nos. 4, 5, and 6 at the other, No. 4 on the ontside. The four men from the other piece take hold of the cheeks on the side to be raised. All acting together, raise the carriage at the command Ciianoe the wheel. The prolonge is not required. The manoeuvre would be made easier by digging a trench 5 or 6 inches deep for the other wheel. When a wheel at the piece is disabled in action, it may be replaced by one from its limber. The disabled wheel, if not quite unserviceable, may be used at the limber until it can be con- veniently changed; but, if entirely unserviceable, one must be obtained from the caisson as soon as it is possible to bring it up. In taking off a limber wheel the horses are taken out; No. 6 removes the linchpin and washer ; Nos. 3 and 4, assisted by Nos. 1 and 8, raise the limber, No. 3 in front, and No. 4 in rear of the (ixletrcc ; Nos. 5 and 6 take off the wheel, and No. 5 runs it for- ward. The axictree is lowered gently to tlie ground. The wWfeel of the limber is replaced by Nos. 1, 2, 5, and 6, after the wheel of the piece is on, Nos. 1 and 2 raising the limber, assisted by Nos. 1 and 8. When a wheel has been disabled in the carriage of either piece or caisson, and cannot be replaced by another, a spar 10 or 12 feet long may be placed under the axletree, with one end resting on the ground and the other secured to the carriage by lashing, so that the axletree may be supported in its proper position with- out the wheel. The part of the carriage thus supported should je relieved of as much weight as possible. When a wheel has been so disabled that it cannot turn, a shoe of wood may be made and placed under it. A piece of spar about 3 feet long and 9 inches in diameter, with a groove in one side to nccive the felloe, will answer for this purpose. The enc in front is given the proper form, and the Ic'ck chain fastened to it In this case also, the carriage should be relie>;d from as muc» weight OS possible. M i34 SCHOOL OF THE PIECi:. DISMOUNTING PIECES. 136. 6-pdr. Gun and 12-pdr. Howitzer. The piece beiug nnlimbered, the instructor commands : 1. Prepare to dismount the inece. 2. Dismount the piece. At the first command, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 remove the imple- ments and place them on the ground, outside of their respective wheels, the bucket with a sponge and handspike on the right, and the worm with a sponge and handspike on the left. Nos. 1 and 2 then press upon the muzzle, and Nos. 3 and 4, after removing the cap squares, station themselves at the end of the cheeks, and, with one hand on the wheel and the other on the kuob of the cascable, prepare to raise the breech. The gunner, first taking out the handspike if in the trail, and passing it to No. 4, raises the elevating screw to its greatest height, and then seizes the left trail handle; No. 5 seizes the right, and Nos. 6 and 7, after scotch- ing the wheels, go to the trail to assist in raising it. At the second command, Nos. 1 and 2 bear down upon the muzzle, the gunner and Nos. 5, 6, and 1 raise the trail until the muzzle rests upon the ground, No. 5, with the howitzer, holding the lock chain to prevent the trail from falling over to the front. Nos. 3 and 4 push against the cascable to raise the breech, and, when the piece is vertical, run round to assist Nos. 1 and 2 to keep it in that position. The trail is then lowered, the carriage run back, and the piece placed on the ground, vent upwards. The cannoneers then replace the implements, Nos. 3 and 4 securing the cap squares. 12-pdr. Gun and 24-pdr. Howitzer. These are dismounted in the same manner, except that Nos. 1 and 2 make a hole in the ground under the head of the carriage, one foot deep for the 12-pdr. and eight inches for the howitzer, to receive the muzzle, and they are assisted by two additional men in pressing upon -the muzzle and in steadying the piece. ' / By attaching the middle of a rope with an artificer's knot to the knob of the cascable, and hauling upon the ends oV i1, tha 8CU0OL or Tn£ PIECE, 135 piece may be more securely steadied. Nos. 3 and 4 attach th» rope, pass the ends over to Nos. 1 and 2, and then go round lo assist thera in hauling upon them. Four additional men from another piece also assist. When the trail is raised so as to let the muzzle touch the bottom of the hole, the men hanl upon the rope and disengage the gun, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 coming up hand over hand to steady it. A rope may also be used in dismounting the 6-pdr. gan and 12-pdr. howitzer. Nos. 1 and 2 man the rope, and Nos. 3 and 4 steady the wheels. No additional men are required. MOUNTING riECES. 13T. 6-pdr. Gim and 12-pdr. Howitzer. The piece being on the ground, vent upwards, the instructor commands : 1. Prepare to mount the piece. 2. Mount the piece. At the Erst command, the implements are removed as in dis- mounting, except that the handspikes, instead of being placed on the ground, are passed by Nos. 3 and 4, respectively, to the gun- ner and No. 2 ; Nos. 3 and 4 take ofif the cap squares ; No. 2 inserts his handspike in the bore, and, assisted by No. 1, raises the chase, so that the gunner may put his handspike under the piece a little in rear of the trunnions. This being done, No. 2 withdraws his handspike from the bore, and places it under the knob of the cascable. Nos. 1, 3, and 4 assist at the handspike of No. 2, and Nos. 5, 6, and 1 at that of the gunner, Nos. 1, 2, 5, and the gunner being at the ends. The gunner then commands: IIeave, upon which the men, acting together, raise the piece up- right, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 steady it in that position. The gun- ner and No. 5 go to the trail, and, assisted by Nos. 6 and T at the wheels, run the carriage forward within a foot of the piece. Nos. 6 and T scotch the wheels, if necessary, and then go to the trail to assist the gunner and No. 5 in raising it. At the second command, the trail is raised. No. 5, with the howitzer, holding the lock chain to prevent the trail from falling over to the front ; Nos. 1 and 2 push gently against the piece 136 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. and place the trunnions in their plates. The trail is then low- ered carefully to the ground, the wheels nnscotched, and the imple- ments replaced, Nos. 3 and 4 securing the cap squares. When necessary, the duties of Nos. C and 1 can be performed by Nos. 3 and 4. The piece may be also easily raised by means of a rope, without the use of handspikes. The gunner fixes the middle of the rope to the knob of the cascable by an artificer's knot, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 man the ends, Nos. 1 and 2 being nearest the cascable. By hauling upon the rope the piece is raised. It is then mounted as before. 12-pdr. Gun and 24-pdr. Howitzer. These are mounted by moans of handspikes in the same manner as the 6-pdr. gun and 12-pdr. howitzer, except that Nos. 1 and 2 make a hole in the ground, one foot deep for the 12-pdr. and eight inches for the howitzer, to receive the muzzle, and two additional men act at the handles. It will facilitate the raising of the piece, and give greater security, to fasten the handspike to the cascable by means of a rope, and also to fasten, by an artificer's knot, the middle of a prolonge or picket rope to the cascable, and man the ends of it by men from another piece. In this case, when the piece is raised as high as the men's hips, the gunner and Nos. 5, 6, and 7 quit the handspike, two at a time, and assist at the prolonge. In placing the piece on the carriage, Nos. 3 and 4 carry the prolonge to the rear, and assist by hauling upon it. When the piece does not fall exactly into the trunnion plates, the prolonge is passed round under the cheeks to secure the breech to the carriage ; the trail being then lowered, the trunnions slide into their beds. CARRYING PIECES. 138. The piece being on the ground, vent upwards, the in- structor commands : 1. Prepare to carry the piece. 2. FOR-WAED. 3. March. schmol of the piF.rr. 137 At tlie first command, Xos. 6 and 1 back the limber over the breech until the pintle hook is just above the trunnions; No. 2 inserts a handspike in the bore to raise the piece, and Nos. 1, 3, and 4 stand near to assist him; the gunner, assisted by No. 5, passes the ring of the prolonge through the handles, and after making a turn with the prolonge ronnd the pintle hook, passes the ring through the handles again and puts it on the pintle. If there are no handles, the prolonge should be passed round the piece. In front and rear of the trunnions, the piece being raised for that purpose. Nos. 6 and 1 then raise the pole, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 the piece, if not already raised ; the gunner tightens the prolonge, pulling on the free end, which he passes over the pintle hook, and under the limber to No. 5, who receives it at the splinter bar and makes a turn with it round the fork. The pole is then lowered, and Nos. 1 and 2 press upon the muzzle to raise the breech. The gunner, assisted by No. 5, lashes the knob of the cascablc to the splinter bar, fastening the end of the prolonge by half hitches. The piece when slung should be hori- zontal. At the second command, the cannoneers prepare to move the limber forward, as in No. 115. At the command ]\f arch, they move the limber to the front. When the horses are hitched in, they should be taken out to enable the men to sling the piece. A limber, in addition to carrying the piece, may also carry a disabled carriage when it is taken apart and lashed upon it; but as the weight when so distributed is too great to be carried far, the carriage should be placed upon the caisson as soon as it can bo done. ■U'hen a limber is disabled, the trail of the carriage or caisson is attached to the rear of another carriage. DISMOUNTING CARRUGES. 139. Carriage of the 6-pdr. Gun and 12pdr. Howitzer. The i>icco being dismounted and implements taken off, as already described, the instructor commands : 133 SCHOOL OP THE PIECE. 1. Prepai-e to dismount the carnage. 2. Dismount the c^vrriage. At the first command, Xos. 3 aud 4 remove the linchpins and washers, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 step inside the wheels and take hold of the carriage. At the second command, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 lift the carriage, Nos. 5 and 7 take off the right wheel, and Nos. 6 and 8 the left, Nos. 5 and 6 taking hold in front, and 7 and 8 in rear. If necessary, each wheel may be taken off by one man. The carriage of the 12-pdr. gnn and 24-pdr. howitzer is dis- mounted ia the same manner, with the addition of two or four men to assist in lifting the carriage. Limbers, The limbers are dismounted in the same manner as the carriages ; the different numbers taking hold in the same relative positions and performing the same duties. MOUNTING CARRIAGES. 140. The method of mounting carriages and limbers corre- sponds ta that of dismounting them. RIGHTING CARRIAGES THAT HAVE BEEN OVERTURNED. 141. When a carriage has been overturned it is better, if time permits, to disengage the piece, right the carriage, and then mount the piece again in the manner already described. The piece may be easily disengaged by allowing the breech to rest upon the ground, or a block of wood, raising the muzzle by means of a handspike while the cap squares are taken off. The carriage may be righted, however, without disengaging the piece, by the following modes : 1st. Detach the limber, secure the cap squares, and lash the knob of the cascable to the stock. Place the middle of a rope over the nave of one wheel, pass the ends of it downward between the lower spokes of that wheel, then under the carriage, through the corresponding spokes of the other wheel, and then upwards over the wheel, and across the top of the carriage, to the side SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 139 where it was first attached. The ends of the rope and the wheel to be raised are then manned, and the carriage drawn over to its upright position. During this operation two men are required to Bteady the trail. If necessary, the ends of the rope may be fastened to the limber, and horses used to assist in righting the carriage. Great caro must be talcen to stop the horses in time, and to prevent them from making any more effort than is absolutely necessary. If the wheel horses are sufficient, the leaders may be unhitched. 2d. Detach the limber, attach two prolonges, or the middle of a picket rope, to the trail, chock the wheels, and dig an oblong hole under the muzzle, about two and a half feet deep. Then pass one of the prolonges, or one end of the picket rope, over the carriage to the front, and, manning both, raise the trail and pass it over the axletree to the ground on the opposite side. Light carriages may be righted by hand without attaching a rope. SPIKING AND UNSPIKINQ CANNON, AND RENDERING THEM UNSERVICEABLE. 142. To spike a piece, or to render it unserviceable. Drive into the vent a jagged and hardened steel spike with a soft point, or a nail without a head ; break it off flush with the outer surface and clinch the point inside by means of the rammer. Wedge a shot in the bottom of the bore by wrapping it with felt, or by means of iron wedges, using the rammer or a bar of iron to drive them in ; a wooden wedge would be easily burnt by means of a charcoal fire lighted with the aid of a bellows. Cause shells to burst in the bore of brass guns, or fire broken shot from them with high charges. Fill a piece with sand over the charge to burst it. Fire a piece against another, muzzle to muzzle, or the muzzle of one to the chase of the other. Light a fire under the chase of a brass gun, and strike on it with a sledge to bend it. Break off the trunnions of iron guns ; or burst them by firing them with heavy charges and full of shot, at a high elevation. When guns are to be spiked temporarily, and are likely to bo 140 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. retakei , a spring spike is used, having a shoulder to prevent its being too easily extracted. To unspike a piece. If the spike is not screwed in or clinched, and the bore is not Impeded, put in a charge of powder of one- third the weight of the shot, and ram junk wads over it with a handspike, laying on the bottom of the bore a strip of wood with a groove on the under side containing a strand of quick match, by which fire is communicated to the charge. In a brass gun, take out some of the metal at the upper orifice of the vent, and pour sulphuric acid into the groove for some hours before firing. If this method, several times repeated, is not successful, unscrew the vent piece, if it be a brass gun, and if an iron one, drill out the spike, or drill a new vent. To drive out a shot wedged in the bore, Unscrew the vent piece, if there be one, and drive in wedges so as to start the shot forward, then ram it back again in order to seize the wedge with a hook; or pour in powder and fire it, after replacing the vent piece. In the last resort, bore a hole in the bottom of the breech, drive out the shot, and stop the hole with a screw. X<>liifiirl:i liiri-. rhvi,- c. "C- ' ^ u ^ :> ■< 'i < « ■ — ^ "^ 5 ; ^ ■ -.. ^ 1 > ^ il " <; ^ ^ >. "■ r c ; ; ; ^1 1 : - -: •-: ■-^ -• '< ^j ^ir3=- -' • ij is ^ 1 1 - ^ ^ 5 X} c ■S e- : =! £ ^ V « c 5 c s- ^ 6i .0 1 t- 1 ~~ -C ,VV *i y t; c ; X t l' 1 ^' \ - — I 1 ^ ~ 4 ^ \ ;: C oi s _ 5 - :; ^ N. i^ i 1-- / $ t ^ t 1 < ■^ ~ "^ -- ^ '^ K :r; < i' V ^ — ^— ■ a; 'i '^: 1 1 i--^ - -" •> ^ -i ■;■ c J ; ^^r ^ 5; / ^ 3,1 vjy S :i ^^ ^ '^ -^ "a n C Ni.iu.iii.l.iniK. ■'/'l,/l/ .■"t''/rll/i,/,> /((■//// y> inrvnr,) 1 — _ — . — ^ — ■ ■'-! V \ f i 4 ■: "^ '- c ^ Casi.lil.- X(iuu'ri<-liittir>' Nonn'iirliil 1 1 n- I lhiiii -5 c ^N < N 5 1 ?i ?f 51 4i S 1 .> ? I. J^ ^ % ^i < e ^ 1 ^ < < < < =^ ^ '■<. 'C ^ "^ k "o ' ■*! '-- S S 5 2 .= > ^ $ •? i C eJ ^ Noiaenciatiirc ITatf IL Nom<-nci ol 1 1 r « £X /^ —M^i. r. ^ B © © f^T- © ,3 IIL ^ i * • s V ^ > -V ^ ^ s. ^ ^ > t, SAT. '.^55^ i.'t'-^^i*^ N«.'THfii<-la-turi' n.ur )X \»innTirJiii HIT n;.te 14. \ r ^ '5v x s '^^ ■t -. -c '- =c S.ilii4'iiil:i1n i'lm.' 16. ^ ■^ «; ^ Nonu-iulattJrt Pkitc 17 (di ^ 1 - ; r^ ?l f^ •* '-'3 '-c I* ^ ■Nnmi-tirlatiirn Plf.lr IM. ' />/////■/// /fr/ >///.>. J / (n>un i^fri- 1* Chrrk \Hyip .1 linnr /nmii . 4 A.'U- /..»/!t/""- sat/J/r .16 /he A, iO Vahs, >,l\ JT The ih;k ■ t/ I'a/isr strap- SCHOOL or TH£ PIECE. 141 ARTICLE FIFTH. THE CANNONEER MOUNTED. General Remarks. 143. The object of this part is to instruct the cannoneer in the management of his horse at all gaits, and will be best attained by a gradual and constant application of the principles of the drill. All the cannoneers of mounted batteries, as well as of horse artillery, should be thoroughly instructed in this part, as it is an indispensable preparation for the duties of a nou-commissioned oflScer as well as for those of a driver. 144. It should be carefully impressed upon the men that the horse may be made gentle and obedient by patience, kindness, and fearlessness ; that punishment is only to be resorted to when it cannot be avoided, and then only administered immediately after the commission of the offence; and that nothing should ever be done to the horse in anger. Restlessness and impatience frequently arise from exuberance of spirits or playfulness. When restless, the horse should be held until he becomes calm ; when submissive after punishment, he should be treated kindly. The cannoneers should endeavor to inspire him with confidence, and he should be gradually accustomed to warlike sounds — firing, beating of drums, etc. The most quiet and best instructed horses will be chosen for the first lessons to recruits. 145. All mounted exercises should be commenced and ended at a walk. Horses cannot be taken with impunity from a stato of rest in the stable and be at once subjected to the severe and rapid exercises required in the drills and battery manoeuvres. It is almost equally injurious to place them, exhausted and heated 142 SCHOOL OF TIIE PIECK. after great exertions, in a stable ; especially in cold weather or where the stables are liable to have currents of air passing through them. ELEMENTARY INSTKUCTION. 146. This should be carefully imparted, if practicable, to the men singly. Under no circumstances should more than four recruits be assigned to one instructor at the same time. They will then be placed in one rank, three yards apart. The horses are taken in the stables or at the pickets, the cannoneers unarmed. TO BRIDLE THE HORSE. HI. The instructor indicates the parts of the bridle as follows, and explains their uses : — Bridle : crown piece ; throat lash; brow band; cheek straps; bit; bar of bit; curb rein; curb chain or strap; snaffle rein. He then commands : Bridle. The reins are taken in the right, the crown piece in the left hand; the horse is approached on the near (or left) side; the reins slipped over his head, and left resting on his neck; the cannoneer then takes the crown piece in the right hand, the left side of the bar of the bit resting on the two front fingers of tlie left hand ; brings the bridle head in front of and slightly below its proper position ; inserts the thumb of his left hand into the side of the month ; presses open the lower jaw ; inserts the bit by raising the crown piece ; passes his left hand under the brow band, passes the ears under the crown piece, commencing with the right ear ; arranges the forelock ; secures the throat lash and then the curb strap, taking care not to make them set too closely. There should be at least three finger's breadths between the throat lash and the jaws. TO SADDLE. 148. The different parts of the saddle are indicated as fol- lows : — The saddle : pommel; cardie; seat; skirls ; flaps, ov inner SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 143 skirts; girths, &ni straps; stirrups; stirrup leathers ; cetjpper: strap and loop ; breast strap. He then commands : Saddle. The cannoneer approaches the horse on the left side, lays the blanket properly folded on his back, the edges on the left side ; then seizes it at the withers with the left, at the loins with the right hand ; slides it once or twice, from front to rear, to smooth the hair, taking care to raise it in carrying it forward, so as not to brash back the hair. The blanket should be so arranged as to project sUghtly beyond the saddle, both in front and rear. The breast strap, crupper, and stirrups, being crossed over the saddle, he seizes it at the pommel with the left hand, at the cantle with" the right, places it gently on the horse's back, bringing it from the direction of the croup; places it a little in rear, that the crupper may be put on without drawing it back, lets down the crupper and breast strap ; steps to the rear, passes the end of the cropper under the dock and buckles it, or passes the tail through the crupper loop, taking care that none of the hair remains under it; steps to tlie right of the horse, seizes the pommel with the right, the cantle with the left hand, raises and carries it forward without moving the blanket, seeing at the same time that there are no straps caught under it; lets down the girth, running it through the loop of the false martingale, if one is used ; then lets down the right stirrup ; returns to the left of the horse, sees that the blanket is smooth, and does not compress the withers, which is prevented by raising it slightly over this part ; buckles the girth and the breast strap, and lets down the left stirrup. TO LEAD OUT. 149. The horse being saddled and bridled, at the command Lead out, the cannoneer conducts him to the exercise ground. The reins are passed over the neck, and rest on the pommel of the saddle ; the cannoneer is on the left of the horse, holds the reins with the right hand, 6 inches from the mouth, the nails under, the hand elevated and firm, to prevent the horse starting. 144 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 150. Position before moimting. At the command Stand TO HORSE, given by the instructor, the cannoneer, standing opposite the lower jaw, on the left of the horse, assnmes the position pre- scribed in No. 3, excepting that he holds the reins with the right hand, about 6 inches from the bit, nails downward. TO MOUNT. 151. The instructor commands : 1. Prep ABE to mount. 1 pause ; 2 motions. At this command, unhook the sabre, when worn; place the right foot 3 inches in rear of the left, make a face and a half to the right, on both heels, keeping the right foot in front; let go the right rein, slide the right hand along the left rein, take two steps, right foot lirst, and face to the left on the point of the left foot, so as to bring the right side towards the horse's flank; place the right foot 3 inches in rear of the left, seize the bight of the reins with the right hand, and place the little finger of the left hand between them, back of the hand towards the horse's head ; run the left hand down the reins to the horse's neck, about 12 inches from the saddle, and with the right hand draw the reins through the palm of the left, until the hand has a light and equal feeling of the horse's mouth ; then let the bight of the reins fall on the off side ; grasp firmly a lock of the mane, and the reins with left hand, and let fall the right by the side. Two. Seize the left stirrup leather, just above the eye of the stirrup, with the right hand; raise the left foot and insert it as far as the ball, or about one-third the foot, and place the right hand on the off side of the eantle of the saddle. 2. Mount. 1 pause ; 2 motions. At the command Mount, spring from the right foot, holding firmly to the mane, and keeping the saddle steady with the right hand ; bring the heels together, the knees resting firmly against the saddle, the body erect. SCUOOL OP THE PIECE. 145 Two. Place the right hand on the pommel to support the body ; pass the right leg extended over the croup of the horse without touching ; let the body come gently down into the saddle; let go the mane, take one rein in each hand, and insert the right foot io its stirrup without the aid of hand or eye. The instructor then causes the stirrups to be crossed over the horse's neck, the left one over the right. 152. Before commanding the mount, the instructor will ex- plain the details of the movement, and will allow but a short in- terval between the first and second parts of its execution ; because if the cannoneer were to remain too long on the stirrup the horse would become restive. EXERCISE AT A HALT. 153. Fosition of the cannoneer mounted. The buttocks bearing equally on the saddle, and well forward ; the thighs em- bracing equally the horse, and stretched only by their own weight and that of the legs; the legs free and fulling naturally; the loins supported without stiffness; the upper part of the body at ease, free, and erect, shoulders equally thrown back, arms falling naturally, head erect and easy; one rein of the snaffle in each hand, the fingers closed, the thumb along each rein, the wrists as high as the elbow, and 6 inches apart, the fingers turned towards each other, the upper extremity of the reins leaving the hand on the side of the thumb. Eyes EionT — Eyes left. 154. As prescribed in No. 4, for the cannoneer dismounted. TO LEXGTIIEN THE SXAI'FLE REIN. The instructor commands : Lengthen left (or right) rei>j. 1 pause ; 2 motions. 155. At the command rkin, bring the wrists towards each other without turning them in ; seize the left rein with the thumb and first finger of the right hand, 1 inch from the left thumb. 10 N 146 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. Two. Half open the left hand, and allow the reins to slip until the thumbs touch ; close the left hand and replace the wrists. TO SHOKTEN TUE SNAFFLE REIN. 156. The instructor commands : Shorten left (or 7-ight) kein. 1 pause ; 2 motions. At the command rein, bring the wrists towards each other without turning them in; seize the left rein with the thumb and first finger of the right hand, so that the thumbs touch. Two. Half open the left hand, eleyate the right hand, and suffer the rein to slip until the thumbs are 1 inch apart; close the left hand and replace the wrists. The right rein is lengthened and shortened on tho same principle. TO CROSS THE REINS IN ONE HAND. 157. The instructor commands : In left (or right) hand — cross reins. At the command reins, turn in the left wrist, the nails down- ward; at the same time bring the wrist opposite to the middle of the body, half open the left hand, place in it tho part of tho rein that was in the right ; reclose the left hand, and let the right fall to the side. The reins are crossed in the right hand upon the same principle. TO TAKE THE REINS IN BOTH HANDS. 158. The instructor commands : Separate — reins. At the command reins, half open the hand which contains them, seize with the other, nails downward, that part of its rein which the other hand had held, and replace the wrists 6 inches apart. USE OF THE BRIDLE REINS AND LEGS. 159. The reins serve to prepare the horse for the move- SCUOOL OP THE PIECE. 14T ments, to guide, and to halt him ; their action should be gradual, and in harmony with that of the legs. In using them, the arms should be used with suppleness, and their movements should ex- tend from the wrist to the shoulder. In riding, the hand ought not to move with the body, but should be kept steady. The legs serve to make the horse advance, to support him, and to aid him in executing changes of direction. AVhcn the can- noneer wishes to make his horse advance, he should gradually close his legs behind the girth, proportioning their effect to the sensibility of the horse. In doing this he must be careful not to open out, nor to raise his knees, which must be kept supple. As soon as the horse obeys, the cannoneer will gradually relax his legs. EFFECT OF THE REINS AND LEGS. 160. The cannoneer, in elevating the wrists and closing the legs, holds liis horse in hand or gathers him ; this is preparatory to all movements. By again elevating the wrists he slackens the pace; and by repeating the movement he stops the horse, or reins him back. The wrists should be raised without curving them, and at the same time they should be drawn slightly towards the body. In opening the right rein and closing the right leg, the can- noneer turns his horse to the right. To open the right rein, the right wrist is carried, without turning it, more or less to the right, according to the sensibility of the horse. The horse is turned to the left on the same principles. By lowering slightly the wrists, the horse is at liberty to move forward. Closing the legs determines the movement. TO MARCH. 161. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, forward. 2. March. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command March, lower the wrists, closing the legs at the same time until the horse obeys, when the wrists will be gradually replaced. 148 scnooL OF the mece. TO HALT. 162. The instractor commands : 1. Cannoneers. 2. H/\xt. At the first command, the horse is gathered without slackening his pace. At the command Halt, elevate the wrists by degrees, bring them towards the body, and hold the legs near, to keep the horse straight and to prevent his backing. When the horse does not obey, cause him to feel successively the efifect of each rein, according to his sensibility. The horse having obeyed, gradually replace the wrists and legs. TO TfRN TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 163. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. M.viicii. 3. Halt. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command March, open the right rein, and close progressively the right leg. In order not to turn the horse too short, perform the movement in a qnarter of a circle of 3 yards. The movement being almost completed, diminish the effect of tlic rein and the right leg, sup- porting the horse at the same time with the left rein and leg to terminate the movement. At the command Ualt, hold the horse straight in the new direction. TO REVERSE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 164. The instructor commands: 1. Cannonecra, rigid (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Halt. This movement is executed upon the same principles as the turn to the right or to the left, with this difference : that the horse should pass over a semicircle of 6 yards and halt faced to the rear. The instructor should place himself on foot, at the shoulder SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 149 of the horse, and describe the curves prescribed in this and the preceding number before causing the cannoneer to execute the movements. TO OBLIQUE. 165. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneerft, right (or left) oblique. 2. Maech. 3. Halt. This movement is executed according to the principles pre- scribed for a turn to the right or left, (No. 163,) taking care that the movement of the reins and left leg are called into action in BuQicient time to prevent more than a half turn being executed. The object being to give the cannoneers the first idea of the oblique direction, great exactness will not at first be required. TO REIN BACK. 166. The Instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, backwards. 2. March. 3. Cannoneers. 4. Halt. At the command Mahch, keep a firm seat, elevate the wrists, and close the legs. As soon as the horse obeys, lower and elevate successively the wrists. If the horse throws his haunches to the right, close the right leg; if to the left, close the left leg. If these means are not sufficient to replace the horse in his proper position, open the rein on the side towards which he throws his haunch, supporting him at the same time with the other rein. At the command Halt, hold a light rein, and keep the legs near. 167. At first the horse should not be backed more than three or four paces. If necessary, the instructor, dismounted, will place himself before the horse, take a rein in each hand, and by moving the wrists, cause the bit to act. If the horse refuses to obey, the reins being held in one hand, the instructor with the other will touch his forelegs gently with the whip, and caress him as soon as he obeys. 168. In executing the foregoing movements, the instructor N 2 150 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. will not at first require that they be perforaied together by tlio cannoneers under instruction, but will see that each executes his own correctly, rectifying the positions before passing from one movement to another. TO DISMOUNT. 169. The instructor causes the stirrups to be let down, and commands : 1. Prepare to dismount. At this command pass the right rein of the snaffle into the left hand, the extremity of the reins Icaviug the hand on the side of the thumb, seize the reins above and near the left thumb with the right hand, the nails downward; slide the left hand down the reins to the horse's neck, about V2 inches from the saddle, and holding the reins in that hand so as to feel the horse's mouth lightly, grasp with it a lock of the mane ; drop the bight of the reins, and, placing the right hand on the pommel, take the right foot from the stirrup, keeping the body erect. 2. Di.sMOUNT. 1 pause ; 3 motions. At the command Dismount, rise upon the left stirrup, pass the right leg extended over the croup of the horse, without touching him, and bring the right heel to the side of the left, the body well sustained, at the same time placing the right hand on the cantle. Two. Lower the body gently until the riglit foot touches the ground; remove the left foot from the stirrup, and place it by the right, keeping the body erect. Let go the mane ; pass the bight of the reins over the pommel of the saddle with the right hand, which then seizes the left rein ; let go the rein with the left hand, and drop the hand by the side. Three. Face to the left, take two steps, left foot first, slip the right hand along the left rein, and take the position of Stand TO HORSE. In the detail and execution of the first and second motions of the dismount, the instructor will conform to what is directed in No. 152 for mounting. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 151 TO FILE OFF. 170. The instructor commands : 1. By the right, (or hft,) file off. 2. March. At the first command, hook up the sabre, when one is worn. At tlie command Maecei, the cannoneer on the right steps off with the left foot, leading his horse to the front. He moves four yards, turns to the right, and marches in the new direction, hold- ing at the same time the hand high and firm. Each man executes successively the same movement when the one who precedes him has moved four yards to the front. They conform to the same principles to file off to the left. XO UNSADDLE. ni. At the command Unsaddle, the cannoneer unbuckles the breast strap and girth ; steps to the right side, frees the girth from the loop of the false martingale, turns up the girth and breast strap after wiping them; throws over the right stirrup; carries the saddle a little back, and frees the tail from the crupper; throws over the left stirrup ; seizes the pommel with the left, the cantle with the right hand, removes the saddle and places it on its peg; takes off the blanket, doubles it with the wet side inwards ; lays it on the saddle, passing the crupper over it, and attaching it to the breast strap. TO UNBRIDLE. 172. At the command Unbridle, loose the curb strap and throat lash ; slip the reins with the right hand to the crown piece, and then with both hands carefully disengage the ears, and let the bit drop out of the mouth by lowering the crown piece along the forehead. The manner of arranjring the bridle and halter heads, when both are ustd at the same time, will depend upon the kind of halter bead used; the mode in each case will be prescribed by the captain commanding the battery. 152 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. VAULTING: THE HORSE UNSADDLED. 173. At the command Mount, the cannoneer seizes the mane with the left hand; holds the reins of the snaffle with the right hand, which he places on the withers, the thumb to the left, the fingers to the right ; raises himself lightly on the two wrists, the body straight ; passes the right leg extended over the croup of the horse without touching him, seats himself gently, and takes the left rein in the left hand. At tlie command Dismount, he passes the left rein of the snaffle into the right hand, which he then places on the withers; seizes the mane with the left hand, raises himself gently on both wrists; passes the right leg extended over the croup of the horse without touchiDg him, brings the right thigh near the left, the body straight, and comes lightly to the ground. MARCHING. Riding-lwuse Drill. VlL The instructor may now unite eight cannoneers, but not more. They are placed on the same line, 3 yards apart. After mounting, the stirrups are crossed over the horse's neck. Two corporals, or instructed men, designated conductors, are placed, one on the right, the other on the left; they use their stirrnps. When there is no riding-house, a ground will be laid out as a substitute. It should be rectangular, about 100 yards long by 33 broad, the entrance at the ends. The cannoneer marches to the right hand, when he has the right side towards the interior of the riding-house. He marches to the left hand, when the left side is towards the interior. TO MARCH TO THE RIGHT (OR LEFT) HAND. 1T5. (Plate 19, Fig. 1.) The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank 2. March. 3. Foeward SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 153 At the first and second commands, the cannoneers tnrn to the right, as prescribed in No. 163. At the command Forward, they lower the wrists, and, closing the legs, march straight forward and follow the condactor, who enters the riding-house, turning, when he reaches the extremity of it, to the right or left, as directed. lie turns at the angles without farther orders. If the turn is to the right, the cannoneers are marching to the right hand ; if to the left, they are marching to the left hand. They keep the distance between them of 4 feet from head to croup. The instructor follows, keeping on the inside of the track; observes that the seat is not deranged, and that the men conform with suppleness to the motions of their horses. Passing from one to another he rectifies their positions successively, so as to instruct without confusing them. TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF. 176. The cannoneers marching in column on one of the long sides, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers. 2. Halt. At the second command, the cannoneers halt. To resume the march, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, forward. 2. March. The men will take care not to incline the body too much for- ward at the moment of stopping, and not to lean back at the moment of starting. When they halt the instructor will rectify their positions. TO TROT. ITT. After the cannoneers become habituated to the move- ment of the horse, the instructor commands: 1. Trot. 2. JIarch. At the first command, given when the column is upon one o. the long sides of the riding-house or ground, the horse is gathered. At the command Makch, lower the wrists a little, and close the legs gradually, until the horse obeys ; when the wrists and legs will be replaced. The trot is at first at a moderate gait; the 154 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. men must sit steady and easily, and maintain the solidity of their positions by the weight of the body, allowing it to conform to the movements of the horse, without lounging, and without bearing upon the reins. To resume the walk, the instructor commands : ]. Walk. 2. March. At the command Walk, gather the horse. At the command March, gradually raise the wrists; at the same time close the legs, to prevent the horse stopping. As soon as he walks, replace the wrists and legs. All changes of gait should be made gradually. CHANGES OF HAND. 178. (Plate 19. Fig. 2.) When the cannoneers have marched some time to the right hand, (or to the left hand,) to make them change hands without stopping, the instructor com- mands : 1. File right, (or left.) 2. March. 3. Forward. At the command March, the conductor turns to the right; at the command Forward, he moves straight forward, crossing the riding-house, and followed by the other cannoneers, until he arrives within 2 yards of the opposite track, when the instructor com- mands : 1. File left, (or right.) 2. March. 3. Forward. At the command March, the conductor turns to the left; and at the command Forward, follows the track. The other can- noneers turn upon the same ground. The changes of hand are executed both at the walk and the trot. TO CROSS EEINS IN MARCHING. It 9. The instructor causes the reins to be crossed and separated, as prescribed in No. 157 and No. 158. The cannoneers will avoid abruptness in the motions and not change the gait. The reins being crossed, in order to turn to the right, carry the SOnOOL OF TUB PIECE. 155 hand forward and to the right ; to turn to the left, carry the hand forward and to the left ; the nails always downward. TO TURN BY CANNONEER IN MARCHING. 180. (Plate 20, Fig. 1.) The cannoneers marching in column, and having arrived about the middle of one of the long sides, the instractor commands : 1. Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command March, each cannoneer executes a turn to the right, and at the command Forward, moves straight to the front. "When they arrive within 2 yards of the opposite track, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, hy the right {or left) flank. 2. .March. 3. Forward. When each cannoneer turns as directed, and moves forward on the track. The same movements, when repeated, bring the cannoneers to their original order. MARCHING ON THE SAME LINE, TO REVERSE BY CANNONEER. 181. (Plate 20, Fig. 2.) The cannoneers having turned to the right, as just explained, and being near the opposite track, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Forward. At the first command, gather the horse. At the second, each man executes the reverse, and at the command Forward, moves directly to the front. The column is again formed on the track by giving the com- mand: Cannoneers, by the right (or left) flank—MARca— Forward. 156 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. MARCHING IN COLUMN, TO REVERSE BY CANNONEER. 182. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) reverse. 2. ^Iarch. 3. Forward, Which is executed by each cannoneer, as already prescribed. 183. The object of the different turns and reverses being to habituate the cannoneers to the control of their horses, they will be executed at first at a walk only, the turns and reverses to the right being e.xecuted during the instruction to the right hand; and those to the left during the instruction to the left hand. After the cannoneers are accustomed to the movements, the in- structor causes them to be executed without regard to the change of hand. TO REST. 184. The instructor causes the turn by cannoneer to be executed to the right, or left. When the column is near the middle of a long side of the riding-house, gives the command Halt ; when they are clear of the track, dismounts them, and commands Rest. To terminate the drill, the stirrups are let down, the men dismounted, and ordered to file off. TO REST IN MARCHING. 185. The instructor sometimes commands Rest, whilst the cannoneers are marching, in order to calm the horses after a quick pace, and to relieve the men who may become fatigued. The cannoneers then relax themselves a little, but without lounging in the saddle, changing the pace, or losing the distance. The con- ductors regulate the march at all times. 186. During the rests, the instructor exercises the men in vaulting on and from their horses, without commands. To leap to the ground: the cannoneer holding the reins as prescribed in No. 173, seizes with the left hand a lock of the mane, the fingers well closed ; places the right hand upon the SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 157 pommel ; raises himself upon the wrists ; brings the right thigh to the side of the left; remains an instant in this position, and descends lightly to the ground. To leap npon the horse, he seizes the mane with the left hand ; places the right hand, which holds the reins, npon the pommel; springs quickly, raising himself on both wrists ; remains an instant in this position, and places himself lightly in the saddle. THE SPUR. 187. For the remaining portion of the riding-house drill from twelve to sixteen cannoneers may be united. The horses are saddled and in the snafifle. All the movements are explained in detail, and executed by the right. They are executed by the left, on the same principles. After the cannoneers begin to execute them with facility, they are made to change their horses daily, that they may become habituated to the management of different ones. The cannoneers are placed in two ranks, the ranks at 2 feet distance; the horses in each rank 1 foot from each other; the conductors of the right or left being first placed in position to serve as the bases of formation for each rank. They are then told off as prescribed in No. 30, calling off as high as No. 8, and beginning again in the rear rank as No. 1, so that the odd num- bers are in the rear, the even numbers in the front rank. The instructor then causes them to mount. TO MOUNT IN TWO RANKS. 188. (Plate 19, Fig. 3.) At the command Prepare to mount, Nos. 2 and 6, and the conductor on the left of the front rank, move 2 yards to the front ; Nos. 1 and 5, and the conductor on the left of the rear rank, move 2 yards to the rear, keeping op- posite their intervals, and regulating by the right. All unhook their sabres when they arc worn, and the mounting is then completed as prescribed in No. 151. The instructor then causes the stirrups to be crossed, and commands : Form Ranks. • 158 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. At the command Ranks, Nos. .2, 3, 6, and T stand fast, and the conductors form on them. Nos. 1, 4, 5, and 8 enter the in- tervals of their ranks without jostling, and without precipitation. The rear rank being formed, closes to the distance of 2 feet from the front. 189. The instructor then explains the use of the spur. If the horse does not obey the legs, the spur should be employed. It is only necessary to use it occasionally, but always vigorously, and at the moment the horse commits the fault. To use the spurs, hold firmly to the horse by the legs ; turn the toes a little out ; give the rein slightly, and press firmly with the spurs behind the girth, without moving the body, until the horse obeys. lie should never be made to feel the spurs unless there is a necessity for it, and then both shonld.be applied at the same moment. TO CONDUCT THE CANNONEERS TO THE RIDING-HOUSE. 190. (Plate 19, Fig. 4.) The instructor commands: 1. By the right (or left) flank. 2. Mauch. 3. Forward. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command March, the cannoneer on the right of each rank executes a turn to the right, and moves forward at the third command, the one of the rear rank approaching in marching to within 1 foot of the one in the front rank. This movement is executed by all the other files in succession. Plate 19, Fig. 5. In entering the riding-house, the instructor marches the column parallel to the long sides ; and when its head is near the middle, commands : 1. By file, right and left. 2. March. 3. Forward. The conductor of the front rank turns to the left, that of the rear rank to the right ; when they are within 2 yards of the track, the instructor commands : File right — March-*— Forward. The two columns then march to the right hand, and at the same pace ; the cannoneers preserve the distance of 4 feet from head to croup. SCHOOL OP THE PIECE. 159 The conductor of the rear rank regulates his pace by that of the conductor of the front rank, so that they shall arrive at the opposite angles of the riding-house at the same time. The in- structor sees that the cannoneers move at a free and even pace ; that they keep their horses straight; that they preserve their dis- tances, and recover them gradually when lost ; that they gather their horses a little before arriving at each corner, and execute a turn to the right or to the left, according as they are marching to the right hand, or to the left hand. The movements of each should be independent of those of the one who precedes him, and should alone control his horse. 191. A horse is said to be straight, when his shoulders and haunches are upon the same line. If in marching to the right the horse carries his shoulders to the right, it is necessary to open a little the left rein, and to hold the right leg near. If he carries his haunches to the right, close the right leg and feel ligiitly the left reiu. If he casts himself towards the interior of the riding-house, place him on the track by opening the outer rein and closing the inner leg. r.t2. The instructor will cause the men to pass frequently from the walk to the trot, and from the trot to the walk. Tlie changes in the gait will be effected gradually. 193. Changes of direction in the breadth of the riding- house will be executed so as neither to stop nor check the rear of cillicr column; for this purpose the change will be commenced soon after, the heads of columns have entered upon the long sides of the riding-house. 194. (Platk 20, Fig. 3.) Changes of direction in the length of tlie riding-house will be executed upon the same principles as those in the breadth, e.xcept that the command File right or left, will be given by the instructor as the heads of columns are en- tering upon the short sides, and the command March, when the ciinductors are within 3 yards of the middle of their sides, so that the columns will pass near each other. 160 EOHOOL OF THE PIEOB. CHANGE OF DIRECTION OBLIQUELY BY CANNONEER. 195. (Plate 21, Fig. 1.) A change of direction in the length of the riding-hoase is commenced, and as soon as all the can- noneers have turned, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers. 2. Halt. The men halt at their proper distances; the instructor then causes them to oblique to the rigJit, (or left,) as prescribed in No. 165; rectifies their positions, if necessary, and commands: 1. Cannoneers. 2. March. When all move directly to their front, retaining their direction and relative positions. When they arrive near the track, the instructor commands : Forward. At this command, each cannoneer executes an oblique to the left, (or right,) so as to follow the track, and moves forward. To execute these movements without halting, the instructor, as soon as the two ranks are in column in the length of the riding- house, commands : 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 3. Forward. At the first command, gather the horse. At the command March, each cannoneer executes the oblique, and keeps directly to his front. At the command Forward, given when the can- noneers are near the track, they execute an oblique so as to move in the original direction. 196. In all the preceding changes of direction, the instructor is governed as to time, in giving his commands, by the most ad- vanced conductor, and will then rectify the pace of the other. TO MARCH IN A CIRCLE. 19t. When the conductors have passed over about a third of the long sides, the instructor commands : 1. In circle, to the right (or to the left.) 2. March. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 161 (Plate 21, Fig. 2.) At the first command, gather the horse. At the command March, the conductors, followed by the can- noneers, describe circles between the two tracks. Eueh horse is kept on the circle with the Inner rein, supported at the same time by the leg on that side, the haunches, when necessary, being kept in by the outer leg. TO CH.ANGi: nAND ON TUE CIRCLE. 1 98. The instructor commands : \. By file, right {or left.) 2. March. 3. Foeward. (Plate 21, Fig. 3.) At the command March, the conductors turn to the right, and, at the command Forward, pass through the centre of the circle towards the opposite point of the circum- ference. "When they arrive near it, the instructor commands : 1. By file, left (or right.) 2. March. 3. Forward. At the first command, the conductors turn to the left, and at the command Forward, resume their movement in circle. They are followed successively in these movements by the cannoneers. The exercise on the circle and changes of hand are executed at a trot, according to the same principles. The instructor will see that the men maintain themselves in the direction of their horses, and sit squarely. When the instructor wishes to resume the exercise on a right line, he takes care that the conductors are at opposite points of the circumference ; and when they arrive on the track of the long sides, he commands Forward. At this command, the condnctorR, followed by the cannoneers, re-enter upon the track. 199. (Plate 21, Fig. 4.) To re-unite the cannoneers, the instructor causes them to close to a distance of 2 feet, then orders a change of direction in the breadth of the riding-house at the moment the conductors are opposite to each other, the even num- bers marching towards the entrance. "When they arrive near tlie middle of the riding-house, the instructor commands: File left and ri<;A<— March— Forward. The conductor of tl;e front Tank turns to the left, that of the rear rank to the right, followed by the cannoneers, who approach within 1 foot of each other. 11 o2 162 -cnOOI. OF THE PIECE. 200. When the column reaches the stable yard, or parade, the instructor commauds: 1. Cannoneers, left into line. 2. March. (Plate 21, Fig. 5.) At the command March, each of the two leading cannoneers turns to the left, moves forward 5 yards, and halts. The other cannoneers execute the same movement in suc- ces.^ion, and taJje their places, each in his own rank, as prescribed ill No. 187. They do not execute the turn until nearly opposite their places. TO DISMOUNT IN TWO RANKS. 201. (Plate 19, Fig. 3.) At the command Prepare to DISMOUNT, Nos. 2 and 6, and the conductor on the left of the front rank, move 2 yards to the front; Nos. 1, and 5, and the conductor on the left of the rear rank, move 2 yards to the rear; the cannoneers of each rank keeping opposite their intervals, and dressing by the right. They then complete the dismount as in No. 169. As soon as they are dismounted, the instructor commands : Form Ranks. At this command, Nos. 2, 3, 6, and 1, elevate the right hand, so as to hold their horses firmly, and the conductors form on them ; the other numbers advance and take their proper places in tliu intervals, and the rear rank then closes to 2 feet. The cannoneers file off as prescribed in No. 110. Each man of the rear rank follows, and conforms his movements to those of his front rank man. EXERCISE WITH THE STIRRUPS. 202. The stirrups should be of such length that when the cannoneer rises in them there shonld be a space of not over 4 or 6 inches between his crotch and the saddle. The stirrup should support only the weight of the leg; the foot shonld be inserted one-third of its length, the heel should be no higher than the toe, and in such position that the spur will not touch the horse in the movements. ' ///////'// f-,- ?.i- fff'/////r'//. to f/ t/ // /f/'// rf'Ki ■ fft'////A,'/. kC -i L i I l\ U UJ^ ~-t fcVtVi^i^t^'fi^i^ tM M H H' n^ ^ Hi ■ fu » ? ■ ^■ 3 -^ •3 i \ 1^ ^ ^ ^. .^-- '.^_- c^ o— <^ ^ . "^ ^ S~ i- c ;r? ^ i^o ■V y^ ^ ^• tT : ■^ i" ;;■ ( ^ < ■ t f ^ ; •^ - -_• --^- .— .• -_- -__- --_■ -— -^ J/)U yds. {_',/// z/^-//^^- ^i ' /A'//////v/. ,• ^i- J \ € < . ■ ^ t. A, if Jf '^ ^ h. '■>:■ v? t a a .r ■ . ^ V ?' ?. ^ ■'" 1 : - ' /"'a ■^ i ^ -rrv* Hn : 6e fia f J^ <=> >~ SCnOOL OP THE PIECE. 163 TO TURN TO THE RIGHT OR TO THE LEFT BY CxiNNONEER, IN MARCHING. 203. (Plate 20, Fig. 1.) The instructor causes the move- ment to be executed as prescribed in No. 180. As the cannoneers are marching in two columns, the command Maech will be given when the leading conductors arrive opposite to the last man but one of the other column. At the command F.orward, the cannoneers move straight for- ward, and pass through the intervals of the opposite column, keeping their legs near to prevent the horses slackening the gait. The instructor should attach less importance to the uniformity of their movements than to the manner in which each cannoneer manages his horse. 204. (Plate 20, Fig. 2.) The reverse by cannoneer, in line and column, are executed as prescribed in No. 181 and No. 182, the instructor requiring more regularity as the exercise pro- ceeds, and steadiness in passing through the intervals in line. TO PASS FROM THE HEAD TO THE REAR OF THE COLUMN. 205. To make the cannoneers masters of their horses, and to force them to use both reins and legs, the men will be required to pass in succession from the head to the rear of the column. Each becoming in his turn conductor, will regulate himself ac- cordingly. The movement is executed in each column at the command Leading cannoneer to rear of column. The lead- ing cannoneer leaving the head of the column by a right or left reverse, as indicated by the instructor, moves parallel to it, and again enters it at the rear by another reverse. He leaves the column so as not to retard those behind him, and on re-entering it, closes to 4 feet from the rear horse. FROM A HALT TO MOVE AT A TROT. 206. The cannoneers being in column, on the long sides, the instructor commands : 1. Column forward— trot. 2. March. IC-i SCUOOl. OF THE PIECE. At Uie command trot, gather tlio horse. At the command Maecii, iower the wrists and close the legs progressively until the horse obeys. To halt, the instructor, when the columns are on the long sides, commands: 1. Column. 2. Halt. The instructor requires all the men to set off freely, at a trot, at the command Maech, and to stop together at the command Halt. TO PASS FROM THE TKOT TO THE TROT OUT, AND TO RESUME THE TROT. 207. The cannoneers, moving at a trot, on the long sides, the instructor commands : Trot out. At this command the wrists arc lowered, and the legs closed progressively until the horse obeys. When the proper gait is assumed, the instructor will see that the men keep their horses up to it. Particular attention will be paid to the position of the can- noneers; they must hold the body erect and easy, the legs falling naturally, and hold the reins with a light band. This will enable them to conform readily to the motions of the horse. The length- ened gait will only be maintained for one or two turns towards each hand in the riding-house. If a hoi'se overreaches, the wrists must be more or less raised, and the legs closed, to correct it. To resume the trot, the iustructor commands : Slow — Trot. At this command, elevate the wrists by degrees until the horse obeys, closing the legs to prevent his taking the walk. TO PASS FROM THE TROT TO THE GALLOP. 208. When the cannoneers have acquired some suppleness and confidence at the trot, and trot out, they take a few turns at SCHOOL or TH2 PIECE. 163 the gallop. The mechaDisni of the gait 13 not at first explained, but each man accommodates himself to the motions of his horse without losing his seat. The rear rank, when on one of the short sides, is formed in line as prescribed in No. 180, and halted at 6 yards from the track; the front rank continues to march, taking distances of 3 yards between the horses, pass to the trot, and the cannoneers succes- sively commence the gallop at the indication of the instructor as follows: On approaching the comer, trot out, feel slightly the left rein 80 as to keep back the left shoulder, and leave the right one free. At the moment of passing the corner, close the legs equally, but not suddenly ; when the horse gallops, hold a light rein, and the legs closed sufficiently to keep him at the gait. After one or two turns, pass from the gallop to the trot, and walk; change hands ia the breadth of the riding-house, and gal- lop to the left hand. The front rank is then formed in line on the other short side, and the rear rank carried through the same exercise. TO PASSAGE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 209. The two columns marching at a walk, upon the long sides, the instructor causes them to execute the turn by cannon- eer, as prescribed in No. 180, and halts them head to the wall, when they arrive near the opposite side. He then commands: 1. Eight pass. 2. Marcu. 3. Cannoneers. 4. Halt. At the command March, open the right rein to incline the horse to the right, closing at the same time the left leg, that the haunches may follow without leaning the body to the left; make use of the left rein and right leg to support the horse and moder- ate his movements. Ai the command Halt, given after a few steps have been taken, gradually cease the effect of the right rein and left leg, 166 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. employing the opposite rein and leg; straighten the horse, and replace the wrists and legs by degrees. To passage to the left and to halt, employ the same means. These movements are at first executed by the men separately, and then together. The cannoneer should hold his horse obliquely to the track to render his movement more easy; the horse having obeyed, the effect is kept up by gentle means, and the motions and positions of the horse are regulated upon the principles laid down. 210. The passage to the right or left in column is effected on the same principles. For this purpose a change of direction in the length of the riding-house is commenced, and when the columns are parallel to and opposite each other, they are halted and the passage ordered, so as to separate them until each is again on the track, when they march forward, and the movement is repeated, which causes each horse to passage in a direction opposite to the first one. 211. During the last days of instruction with the stirrups, the instructor, in order to prepare the cannoneers for the use of the curb bridle, will cause them, from time to time, to cross reins in the left hand, so that they will conduct the horses with this hand alone. He will see that each man sits squarely on his horse during such exercise. THE CURB BRIDLE. 212. The horses are taken saddled, and in both curb and BnafBe. In the first lesson th^ey conduct the horse to the riding- house with the snaffle, which is held in the right hand ; the reins of the curb being in the left. POSITION OF THE BRIDLE HAND. 213. The reins, with their slide, in the left hand ; the little finger between the reins, the other fingers well closed ; the thumb upon the second joint of the first finger; the elbow slightly de- tached from the body, the hand 4 inches above the pommel of tho SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 167 saddle, the fingers 6 inches from, and turned towards the body; the little finger a little nearer the body than the upper part of the writt; the right hand at the side. To adjnst the reins, the cannoneer seizes them with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, at the button or centre, partly opens the left hand so as to let them slide through it, elevates the reins until they bear equally, closes the left hand upon them, and lets fall the end of the reins and the right hand. To take the snaffle in the right hand, the instructor com- mands, snaffle in right Tiand; the cannoneer grasps the snafSe with the right hand, nails downward, holds the reins of the snaffle over those of the curb, and lowers the left hand so as not to bear upon the bit. In using alternately the curb and snaffle, the bars of the horse's mouth are relieved. Both should never be used at the same time. The cannoneers are required to take the snaffle in the right hand during the first exercises with the curb bridle, in order to keep up his right side, which is apt to remain in rear. At the command drop snaffle, the left hand is replaced, and the reins of the snaffle allowed to fall so that they will be nnder those of the curb, the right hand at the side. MOVEMENTS OF THE BRIDLE HAND. 214. By raising the hand slightly, and drawing it towards the body, the horse is gathered; by raising it still more, the gait is made slower; by increasing the effect of the hand, the horse is stopped; if iqcreased still more, the horse is moved backwards. By lowering the hand, the horse is permitted to move forward; liy carrying it forward, and to the right, the horse is turned to the right; by carrying it forward, and to the left, he is turned to the left. As soon as the horse obeys, the hand should be replaced. In all movements of the hand, the arm should act freely and without constraint to the body ; and as the effect of the curb is more powerful than that of the snaffle, it should be used progres- sively, particularly in stopping and reining back. 168 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 216. To apply the foregoiDg principles, the instructor should first take the cannoneers through the exercises at a halt, (Xos. 153 to 169,) and then through the marchings, (No. 174, etc.) He will not require the different movements to be executed simultaneously, but observe the manner in which each man em- ploys his bridle hand. When sufiSciently advanced in the dif- ferent movements witli the curb, he will cause them to march ii|iim the track, first at a walk, then at a trot. The habitual fault with riders being to carry the left hand forward, and to throw back the right shoulder, the instructor is particular in requiring them to keep that hand above the pommel of the saddle, without deranging the position of the body. 216. To take both reins in the bridle hand, the instructor commands : Snaffle in left hand. The cannoneer then passes the reins of the snaffle between the forefinger and thumb of the left hand, nails under, and draws in the hand towards the body until the reins of the curb bridle cease to act upon the bit. To drop the snaffle : the instructor commands : Drop snaffle. The cannoneer lets go the snaffle without inclining the body, retakes the position of the bridle hand, and adjusts the reins. The snaffle is not taken in the left hand until the men have acquired the habit of conducting their horses with the curb bridle. To passage to the right with the curb bridle, or with both reins in the left hand, bear the shoulders of the horse to the right by inclining the hand forward and to the right; close the left leg, that the haunches may follow ; keep the right leg near, to sustain the horse. In order to cease the passage, straighten the horse ; hold the right leg near, and replace the hand and leg by degrees. The passage to the left is executed according to the same principles. PRINCIPLES OF THE GALLOP. 217. A horse gallops on the right foot when the right fore SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 169 and hind legs move in advance of those of the left ; he gallops on the left foot when the left fore and hind legs are in advance. He gallops true when he gallops on the right foot in exercising or turning to the right, or on the left foot in exercising or turning to the left, and gallops /aise, if in exercising or turning to the right he gallops on the left foot, or conversely. A horse is disunited when he gallops with the near fore leg followed by the off hind leg, or the off fore leg followed by the near hind leg. When the horse gallops on the left foot, the rider experiences a sensible movement in his position from left to right. When he gallops on the right foot, the movement of the rider is from right to left. When the horse is disunited, the rider experiences in his position irregular movements ; the centre of gravity of the horse is deranged, and his strength impaired. EXERCISE AT A GALLOP. 218. The cannoneers of the rear rank being formed, as prescribed in No. 208, the instructor causes those of the front rank to take distance of 3 yards, and when they are marching at a trot, and to the right hand, on one of the long sides, he com- mands : 1. Gallop. 2. March. At the command Oallop, gather the horse, keep him perfectly straight, and at the command March, carry the hand slightly forward, and to the left, to enable the right shoulder to move in advance of the left, and close the legs behind the girth, in order to urge the horse forward, causing him to feel lightly the effect, of the left leg. The horse having obeyed, hold a light hand, and the legs near, to keep him at his gait. The men must conduct their horses steadily and quietly, and keep a light hand, that the gallop may be free and regular. At first they will take the reins of the snaffle in the right hand, to calm their horses ; afterwards they will gallop with the curb bridle alone. p no SCHOOL OF TUB PIECE. To keep the horse true, the rider should accommodate himself to all his motions, particularly in passing the corners. When the horse gallops false, or is disunited, the cannoneer is ordered to take the trot and pass to the rear of the column, taking care not to interfere with those who follow. When he arrives at the rear, he resumes the gallop, and the instructor explains again the manner of keeping the horse true. Only one or two turns will be made at a time at the gallop to each hand, and the cannoneers pass to the trot in order to change hand. When the horses be- come quiet and readily managed, the distance between them is reduced gradually to 4 feet. The rear rank is carried through the same exercises, and then both ranks at the same time. 219. When the cannoneers have been sufficiently exercised at the gallop on straight lines, the instructor causes them to take a few turns on the circle, following the principles already pre- scribed for exercises in the circle. The exercise will commence on very large circles, which will be progressively diminished as the cannoneers acquire skill in the management of their horses. 220. During the last few days of instruction in tlie forego- ing exercises, the men will repeat the movements, wearing their sabres sheathed, in order that both they and the horses may become accustomed to them. The first movements with the sabre worn, will be at a slow gait, which will not be increased until the horses become perfectly calm. MANUAL OF THE S.\BRE. 221. The cannoneers marching by flank as in No. 1 90, the instructor halts the front rank, and when the rear rank is disen- gaged, forms it to the left in line as directed in No. 200, after which the front rank is formed on its left in the same manner. The instructor then commands : Draw — Sabre. 2 motions. At the command Draw, iocline slightly the head to the left; SCHOOL OF THE PIECE: lYl carry the right hand above the reins, engage the wrist in the Bword knot, seize the gripe; draw the blade 6 inches from the scabbard, and turn the head to the front. At the command Sabre, draw qnickly the sabre, raising the arm to its full length; hold the sabre in this position an instant, then carry it to the right shoulder, the back of the blade supported against the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist upon the top of the thigh, the little finger outside the gripe. Present — S abre. 222. At the command Sabre, carry the sabre forward, the thumb opposite to and 6 inches from the neck ; the blade per- pendicular ; the edge to the left ; the thumb along the side of the gripe ; the little finger joined to the others. Carry — Sabke. 223. At the command Sabre, carry the back of the blade against the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist upon the upper part of the thigh, the little finger outside the gripe. Inspection of Sabre. 2 pauses ; 3 motions. 224. At the command Sabre, present the sabre. Two. Turn the wrist inwards, exhibit the other side of the blade, and turn the wrist back. Three. Carry the sabre to the shoulder. Eel urn — Sabre. 2 motions. 225. At the command Return, present the sabre. At the command Sabre, carry the wrist opposite to and 6 inches from the left shoulder; lower the blade along the left arm, the point to the rear; incline the head slightly to the left, and fix the eyes upon the mouth of the scabbard ; return the blade, disengage the wrist from the sword knot, turn the head to the front, and adjust the reins. 226. The cannoneers will be required to draw, and return sabre whilst marching at a walk in column, the instructor taking care that neither the seat, nor the position of the bridle hand is 172 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. deranged, that the right shoulder is not thrown back when the sabre is drawn, and that the horse is kept steadily at his gait. As they become more skilful, the sabre is drawn first at a trot, then at the gallop. In returning the sabre at a walk, the back of the blade rests against the left arm, until its point has entered the scabbard. The turns to the right and left with the sabre drawn, are executed at a trot and a gallop ; the reverses, at a trot only. SABRE EXERCISE. 22T. The cannoneers marching at a walk in two columns, the instructor caases one of them to halt until the other closes up. He then causes the cannoneers to take the distance of 2 yards from each other, and when they are upon a long side of the riding-house, commands: 1. By the right (or left) fiank. 2. March. 3. Halt. He causes them then to execute the sabre exercise, as taught on foot. For the exercise at a halt, the instructor employs only the time necessary to make the cannoneers comprehend the details. They then execute progressively, at the different gaits, the exer- cise of the sabre, taking care to preserve between each other the distance of 2 yards. TO LEAP THE DITCH AND THE BAR. 228. For this exercise the width of the ditch should be from 3 to 5 feet, and the height of the bar from 1 to 3 feet. The width and height of each should at first be the minimum ; they are increased as the men and horses become more habituated to leaping. The instructor forms the cannoneers in one rank, 30 yards in rear of the obstacle. At the warning of the instructor, each man moves off at a walk, directs his march towards the obstacle, and at a third of the way commences the trot. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. IfS TO LEAP THE DITCH. 229. On arriving near the ditch, give the hand and close the legs, to force the horse to make the leap. The moment he reaches the ground, raise slightly the hand in order to sustain him. TO LEAP THE BAR. 230. On arriving near the bar, rein up the horse slightly, and close the legs. At the moment of making the leap, give the hand, and elevate it slightly as soon as he reaches the ground on the other side. The cannoneer, in leaping, should cling to the horse with the thighs and calves of the legs, taking care to lean a little forward as' the horse is in the act of springing, and to seat himself well, by leaning to the rear at the moment the horse reaches the ground. Each man, after having made the leap, continues to move at the trot, and takes his place in the rank which is formed 30 yards beyond the obstacle, taking care to pass to the walk just before halting. During the first days of this exercise, the cannoneers leap with- out arms, the instructor causing them to take the snaffle in the right hand. Afterwards they repeat the same exercise with arms, and finally with the sabre drawn. Horses should not be made to leap more than two or three times in any one day. pa 174 SCHOOL 01? TUK PIGOK. ARTICLE SIXTH. THE DETACHMENT. Horse Artillery. 231. The detachment is formed in two ranks, with closed intervals ; the distance between the ranks 2 feet, measuring from head to croup. It is told off as in mounted artillery, excepting that two additional men, required as horse holders, and numbered 9 and 10, are posted. No. 9 in the centre of the rear, No. 10 in the centre of the front rank. The gunner, when not himself the instructor, takes his place on the right of the front rank. In battery manoenvres, No. 8 is posted with the caisson, of which he is chief, and mancEuvres with it. He is replaced in the detachment by the gunner. TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT IN TWO RANKS. 232. To mount. The instructor commands: 1. Prepare to mount. 2. Mount. (Plate 22.) At the command Prepare to mount, the gunner. No. 4, and No. 6, move 2 yards to the front, Nos. 3 and 5, 2 yards to the rear, covering their intervals; the mounting is then completed. The instructor then commands : Form — Ranks. At this command, the gunner and Nos. 4 and 6 stand fast, and the others form on them without jostling or precipitation, the rear rank closing up to 2 feet. W'HOOL OP THE PIECE 175 233. To diBmount. The instrnctor commands : 1. Prepare to dismount. 2. Dismount. (Plate 22.) At the first command, the gunner and Nos. 4 and 6 moye forward, and Nos. 3 and 5 rein back 2 jards, and the dis- moant is completed. The instructor then commands Form — Ranks, which is executed by the cannoneers leading their horses into the proper intervals, and closing up the ranks, as in the directions for mounting. TO FORM IN ONE RANK. 234. The instructor commands : 1. Left into single rank. 2. Makoh. 3. Halt. 4. Right-i}B.j,HS. 6. Fkont. At the command March, the gunner advances 5 yards, and halts. No. 8 turns short to the left, and moves forward ; he is followed by the other even numbers, who execute successively the same movement. At the command Halt, given in time to enable him to take his proper distance. No. 8 turns short to the right, and moves forward, until on a line with the gunner. The other even numbers turn in time to place themselves in rank succes- sively, on the right of the cannoneer, who precedes him. At the command Righl-JiRY.&&, the odd numbers move to their front, and align themselves on the gunner. At the command Fbont, all cast their eyes to the front. ALIGNMENTS. 235. General principles. The cannoneers in dressing must square their shoulders by those of the man uext to them on the side towards the guide, and cast their eyes in that direction, until they see the breast of the second man from them ; feeling lightly the boot of the man on that side, and keeping their horses straight on the line. When there are two ranks, the rear rank men cover their front rank men accurately, preserving the distance of 2 feet from head to croup. 176 SCHOOL OF the piece. 936. Successive alignment of files — ^to the front. Two or more flies of the rigbt are moved forward, and aligned by the com- mands Two (or — ) right files forward — March — Halt — Right- DEESS. The instjuctor then commands : 1. By file, Iiight-r>KESs. 2. Front. At the first command, the files move forward successively ; th« cannoneers turning the head to the right, and taking the last steps slowly, so as not to pass the line. Each file moves when the preceding one arrives on the base of alignment. When the last file is aligned, the instructor commands Front, and all turn their heads in that direction. 2.37. To the rear. Two or more files of the right are made to rein back 2 yards, and align themselves opposite their places ; by the commands Tico (or — ) rigJit files backward — March — Halt — Bight-DRESS. The instructor then commands : 1. By file, Bight backward-DRiiss. 2. Front. At the command dress, the files rein back in succession, keep- ing perfectly straight. The cannoneers turning their heads to the right, pass a little the files already formed, and then dress up. The cannoneers rein back slowly. When there are two ranks, the rear rank men regulate themselves on their file leaders, pre- serving always their proper distance. When the last file is aligned, the command Front is given. 238. To align the detachment. The instructor places the file of the flank on which he wishes to align it, in such position that no cannoneer will be forced to rein back, and commands : 1. Right-HR'ESs. 2. Front. At the first command, all the cannoneers align themselves promptly. At the 'Second, they cast their eyes to the front. The alignments are made to the left on the same principles. The alignment to the rear gives the means of returning to the alignment when it has been passed over, but it should be avoided as much as possible. The cannoneers should always align themselves on the breast of the second man towards the side of the alignment, and not SCHOOL OF THE PIECB. Ill upon the extremity of the rank ; the rear rank men being carefol to cover accurately their file leaders. The men will align them- Bclves promptly, that the horses may not be kept a long time gathered. 239. When the cannoneers are not aligned, it is generally because the horses are not straight in the ranks. In dressing to the right, if the men on the left of the detachment are in rear, it is presumed that most of the horses are turned to the left. If this is the case, the horse is placed on the alignment by carrying the hand to the right and closing the right leg. If, after squar- ing his horse, a cannoneer finds himself behind the line, he moves forward. If, in dressing to the right, the cannoneers on the left are in advance of the line, it is presumed that the horses are turned to the right. To rectify this, carry the hand to the left, closing the left leg; those who are still in advance will then rein back. In dressing to the left, the same faults are corrected by inverse means. 240. During the alignments the instructor places himself in front of the cannoneers, to see that they move steadily, and do not turn the head too much ; that they do not open the knee ii order to feel the boot ; that they prevent their horses from crowd- ing those already formed ; that they take the last steps slowly ; align themselves without losing time, and give the hand at once. The alignments will be occasionally interrupted by marches, in order to calm the horses. TO FORM IN TWO RANKS. 241. The detachment being formed in one rank, the instructor commands : 1. Bight into two ranks. 2. March. 3. Hight-BRESB. 4. Front. At the command March, the gunner advances 5 yards, and halts. No. 2 turns to the right, moves along the front of the odd numbers, and turns short to the left in time to halt square in 12 178 SCHOOL OF TUE PIECE. front of No. 1. The other eyeu numbers follow his movements, and form on his left. As soon as the front rank is in position, the rear rank takes the distance of two feet, and at the third and fourth command the detachment is aligned to the right. When formed in two ranks, the detachment will be taken throngh the foregoing movements together. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS. 242. To open the ranks. The instructor commands : 1. To the rear, open order. 2. March. 3. JB(gf/i^DRESs. 4. Front. At the command March, tlie front rank remains immovable; the rear rank reins back 6 yards, each cannoneer preserving the direction of his file leader. At the third command, the rear rank is aligned to the right. 243. To close the ranks. The instructor commands : 1. Close order. 2. March. 3. Bight-DREsa. 4. Front. At the command March, the rear rank closes to the distanca of 2 feet from the front, eaeh cannoneer accurately covering his file leader. At the third command, the detachment is aligned to the right. TO KEIN BACK THE DETACHMENT. 244. The detachment being at a halt, the instructor com- mands : 1. Detachment, backwards. 2. March. 3. Guide-RiauT. At the command March, all the cannoneers rein back at once, following the principles already prescribed for the movement, and regulating themselves by the guide. After they have reined back some steps, the instructor com- mands : 1. Detachment — Halt. -2. Right (or left) dress. 3. Front. SCHOOL OS THE PIECE. 179 TO MARCH THE DETACHMENT BY FILE. 245. To the front. (Plate 22.) The detachment being at a halt, the instructor commandB : 1. Double files from the right. 2. March. At the first command, the cannoneers of the right file gather their horses, as do the others, in succession, as soon as the file on their right is in motion. At the command March, the right file mores straight to the front. Each of the other files move as soon as the rear rank man of the file on its right is on a line with its front rank man These two cannoneers advance 5 yards abreast, oblique to the right; march in the new direction until nearly opposite their places, when they oblique to the left, so as to enter the column ; the rear rank man then quickens his pace, and takes his position at the side of his proper front rank man. To break the detachment by the left, the movement is executed according to the same principles, at the commands : 1. Double files from the left. 2. March. 246. To the right (or left.) The instructor commands : 1. By the right (or left) flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. (Plate 19, Fig. 4.) At the first command, gather the horses. At the.command March, the cannoneer on the right (or left) of each rank executes a turn to the right, (or left,) and moves forward, the one in the rear rank approaching his front rank man. This movement is executed by all the other cannoneers in'successi»n. When the gunner is in the ranks, he constitutes a file ; all the movements are made as if he were an even number, and the file complete. 247. To form the detachment by file when it is in march, the same commands are given as if it were at a halt. At the command March, all the cannoneers except the file which com- mences the movement halt, if the detachment is at a walk ; or walk, if it is at a trot ; and the movement is executed as already directed, in resuming the original gait. 180 SCHOOL OF THE PIECI. DIRECT MARCH IN FILE. 248. The even nnmbers are guides; they preserve the dis- tance of 2 feet from head to croup, move steadily, and regain the distances gradually when lost. The odd numbers dress on their guides, keeping np lightly the touch of the boot. CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN FILE. 249. The column marching, the instructor commands : 1. By file, left (or right.) 2. March. 3. Forwaed. At the command March, the left (or right) cannoneer at the head of the column executes the turn ; the cannoneer abreast of him conforms to the movement, increasing his gait and keeping up the touch of the boot. At the command Forward, both move to the front at the original gait The other cannoneers execute the same movement on the same ground. TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF. 250. To halt the column, the instructor commands : Column — Halt. To resume the m&rch, he commands : 1. Column, forward. 2. March. OBLIQUE IN FILE. 251. The column marching, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, left (or right) oblique. 2. March. At the command March, each cannoneer obliques to the left the leading cannoneer of the left file is the guide of the column, and moves straight forward in the new direction ; the other cannoneers of that file move in the same direction, and on a line with him. The cannoneers of the right file dress on their guides, each placing his left knee behind the right knee of his guide, keeping the head of his horse on a line with the shonlders of the horse on his left, and marches in this way during the oblique. SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 181 To retarn to the primitive direction, the instructor commands: FOBWAED. The oblique to the right is executed on the same principles. 252. In the oblique march, the guide is always on the side towards which the oblique is made ; and, at the command For WAKD, returns to the original side. The change of guides will be made without any special commands. If the guide of any rank ceases to be on the line of the guide of the column, he quickens or shortens the pace without changing direction, in order to recover his place. If the other cannoneers become disunited, they rejoin the guide of their rank, taking care not to lose their alignment, nor to retard those who march behind them. TO BREAK INTO SINGLE FILE. 253. The column marching in double file, the instructor commands : 1. In single file. 2. Mabcii. At the command single file, all the cannoneers, except the even number at the head of the column, prepare to halt. At the com- mand Maboii, they halt. As soon as the odd number of tlie first rank is passed by the horse of the even number, he enters the column by two successive oblique movements. Each rank of two executes in succession the same movement, the even numbers breaking as soon as the odd number of the rank in front com- mences obliquing to enter the column. The gait is regulated so as to keep the distances. When the column is at a trot or gallop, it is broken into single files according to the same principles and by the same commands ; the even number of the leading rank continues the gait; the others coming to a walk iu case the column ia at a trot, or a trot in case it is at a gallop, as soon as the command Makch is given, and resuming the original gait to enter the column. 254. The column by single file may be formed from the detachment when in line, by the commands : 1. Single file from the right. 2. March. Q l!i2 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. At lUe command Makch, the file indicated moves to the front. "When the croup of the rear rank horse is opposite the head of the leading horse of the nest file, that file puts itself in motion, ad- vances 5 yards, obliques to the right, and again to the left, so as to enter the colnmn. Each file takes up the movement in succes- sion, governing itself by that of the file on its right. The column is formed in single file from the left on the same principles. The movement in single file will never be used in the artillery except when unavoidable. TO FORM IN DOUBLE FILES. 255. The column being in single file, marching, or at a walk, the instructor commands : 1. Double files. 2. March. At the first command, all gather their horses. At the com- mand March, the odd numbers oblique to the right, if the right is in front; to the left, if the left is in front; and, by another oblique, place themselves at the sides of their even numbers, quickening the gait for the purpose if the column is in march. All close up to 2 feet from head to croup. TO FORM THE DETACHMENT IN LINE. 256. To the front. The detachment marching in double files, right in front, the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, into line. 2. March. 3. Oui^e-mauT. At the first command, all gather their horses ; the odd numbers slacken their gait until they are on a line with the next even number behind them. At the command March, the guide of the column continues to advance; the other cannoneers oblique to the left, quickening their gait, until opposite their places in line ; then they oblique to the right, and form in succession in line, each in his proper SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 183 rank. The instractor gives the command for the gaide imme- diately after the command March. When the detachment is at a halt, the leading guide, at the first command, moves forward 5 yards and halts, and the move- ment is executed as already directed, except that instead of the command for the guide, the instractor commands : 3. Iiighl-T)RZS3. 4. Front. 25T. To the right. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, on right into line. 2. March. 3. Bight-BUESs. 4. Front. At the first command, the odd numbers slacken the gait until they are on a line with the next even number behind them. At the command March, the guide of the column turns to the right, advances 5 yards, and halts; the other cannoneers con- tinue to advance, turn in succession to the right, and form in line ; each in his proper rank. 258. To the left. The instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, to llie left into line. 2. March. 3. liight-BKESS. 4. Front. At the first command, gather the horses. At the command March, each of the two leading cannoneers turns to the left, moves forward 5 yanls, and halts. The other cannoneers execute the same movement in succession, when they are nearly opposite their places, and take their proper positions in line ; each in his own rank. In forming line to the right, and to the left, the command HigM-DREss is given when the leading cannoneer halts. The command Front is given when the last file is aligned. 2.59. When the column is moving left in front, the line is formed to the front, left, and right, on the same principles. DIRECT MAUCII IX LINE. 260. It is important in the direct march to keep the horses straight in the ranks. To keep themselves aligned, the can- noneers should feel lightly the boot of the man on the side of the 184 SCHOOL Of TH£ PIEOE. guide, march at an equal gait, and preserve the head direct. They should yield to all pressure coming from the side of the guide, and resist that coming from the opposite side. The guide should march at a free and steady gait, and change it with steadiness, in order to avoid irregularity in the ranks. If the cannoneers are in front, or in rear of the alignment, too near or too far from the man on the side of the guide, they move from or approach him gradually, and in gaining ground to the front. When there is too much pressure on the guide, he extends his arm to the front, and the cannoneers carry the bridle hand to the opposite side, in order to relieve him. The cannoneer of the flank opposite the guide is not required to preserve the head direct; he aligns himself on the general front of the detachment, and on the guide, which is commanded alternately, to the right and left. When halted, the alignment is ordered towards the side of the guide. 261. The detachment being in line, the instructor com- mands : 1. To the left, (or right,) open files. 2 March. 3. Bight (or left) dress. 4. Front. At the command March, all the cannoneers, except the right file, passage to the left ; the next cannoneer straightens his horse, and halts as soon as he has gained an interval of 1 yard. Each of the other cannoneers executes the same movement, regulating the interval by the man on his right. The cannoneers of the rear rank follow their file leaders, and keep their proper intervals. The instructor orders the alignment as soon as the second man from the right has attained his interval. When it is completed, the instructor indicates to the guide of the right, or of the left, a fixed point, in a direction perpendicular to the front of the de- tachment ; he instructs him to take an intermediate point ; never to lose sight of these two ; and to select a more distant point as he approaches the one nearest to him. To give a point of direction, the instructor places himself SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 185 exactly behind the right file, or the left file, and indicates to the cannoneer of the front rank an object on the ground, which is ;m movable, and can be distinctly seen ; such as a steeple, a tree, or a honsc ; the cannoneer of the rear rank keeps himself always in file, and at his proper distance. 262. To march the detachment forward, the instructor com- mands : 1. Delachment, forward. 2. Mabch. 3. Cuide-RiQHT, (or left.) At the command March, which is immediately followed by that for the guide, all the cannoneers move straight forward, at the same gait with the men on the side of the guide, towards whom, as they are not boot to boot, they should give a glance from time to time. During the march, the instructor is sometimes at the side of the guide, to assure himself that the men march on the same line, and sometimes behind the guide, to observe that he follows the direction indicated. To halt the detachment, he commands : 1. Delachment — halt. 2. RicjlU (or lefl) dress. 3. Front. 263. The cannoneers having been sufficiently exercised in marching with open files, the instructor halts the detachment, and commands : 1. To the right, (or left,) close files. 2. March. 3. Right (or hft) dress. 4. Front. At the command March, all the cannoneers, except the right file, passage to the right, and resume their places, boot to boot. 264. After the files are closed, the detachment is put in motion by the commands prescribed in No. 2fi2. The cannoneers move straight forward; feeling lightly the boot towards the side of the guide. 2G5. When the men begin to manage their horses properly at the walk, they are required to open and close files whilst march- ing at the same gait, the instructor taking care not to repeat these movements too often, but to make them march some time i^er 186 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. baring opened the files before closing them, and after having closed the files before opening them. For this purpose he com- mands: 1. To the left, (or right,) open files. 2. March. At the command ^L\RCH, all the cannoneers, except the right file, obliqne to the left, quickening the gait so as to preserve their alignment When they are 1 yard from the man on the right, tjjey straighten their horses, and move forward. To close files, the instructor commands ; 1. To the right, (or left,) close files. 2. March. Each cannoneer, except the guide, obliques to the right until closed, preserves the alignment, and resumes the march to the front, without pressing on the man towards the side of the guide. The files are always opened from and closed towards the direc- tion of the guide. 266. These movements having been executed to the right, and to the left, in marching at the walk, are repeated at the trot, in passing frequently from the walk to the trot, and from the trot to the walk. The detachment is then exercised in commencing the trot from a halt, and in halting whilst marching at this gait. 267. To exercise the cannoneers in the direct march at the gallop, the same progression is followed as at the walk and trot, except that the ranks are neither opened nor closed. The rear rank preserves exactly its distance. When exercising at a gallop, the detachment should habitually pass to the trot and the walk before being halted ; but when the cannoneers are masters of their horses, it may be halted sometimes without changing the gait. WHEELING. 268. General principles. In executing a wheel whilst the detachment is in march, the conductor of the marching flank should increase his gait, and describe his arc so as to cause the files neither to open nor close. The pivot describes an arc of a circle of 2 yards radius in slackening the gait. The cannoneers from the centre to the marching flank increase, and those from the SCHOOL OF THE PIECK. 187 centre to the pivot decrease the gait progressively, so that the centre man preserves the gait at which the detachment; was marching. At the end of the wheel, all resume the original gait, and straighten their horses. The conductor of the marching flank shonld measare with his eye the arc of the circle he is to pass over, so that it may not be necessary for the files either to open or close. He tnrns his head occasionally towards the pivot ; if he perceives that the cannoneers are too much crowded, or too open, he increases or diminishes gradually the extent of his circle, in gaining more ground to the front than to the side. Each cannoneer of the front rank should describe his circle in the ratio of the distance at which he may be from the pivot; when opened, they should approach the pivot insensibly, diminishing their circle by degrees. When too much closed, they should increase the circle gradually. At the command Forward, they cease to wheel, and resume the direct march, at whatever point of the wheel they may be. The flanks which become pivots', or marching flanks, do not slacken or augment the pace until the command of execution is given. 269. The wheelings are executed at first in single rank ; for this purpose the detachment is formed in one rank, and, being aligned, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment in circle, right (or left) wheel. 2. March. At the command March, the cannoneers put themselves in motion, the pivot describing the arc of a circle of which the radius is 2 yards, at a slow gait; the marching flank moves briskly, and regulates itself by the pivot, avoiding all pressure in the ranks. 270. When the detachment has executed several wheels, to halt it, the instructor commands : I. DetachmeiU, halt. 2. Left (or right) dres.s. 3. Front. At the command halt, the cannoneers straighten their horses, and halt with steadiness. Before dressing the detachment, the ]88 SCHOOL OF THE I'lECE. cannoneer on the marchina; flank is made to come up abreast of the pivot man, so that the others will not have to rein back in order to align themselves. 271. The detachment is then marched forward, and made to recommence the wheel whilst marching, and by the same com- mands. At the first command the pivot man prepares to slacken, and the marching flank to quicken the gait, so that the centre man will preserve the gait at which he was marching; the wheel is then executed as prescribed. When the instructor wishes the detachment to take the direct march instead of halting, he com- mands : 1. Forward. 2. Guide right, (or left.) At the command Forward, the pivot resumes the gait at which it was previously marching, the other cannoneers straighten their horses, and the two flanks move forward at the same gait, con- forming to the principles of the direct march. When the cannoneers have executed several wheuls to the right, and to the left, intirrupted occasionally by direct marches, and when the horses become calm, the instructor causes them to pass to the trot. After several wheels at the trot, they resume the walk. '272. When sufficiently exercised in single rank, the can- noneers are formed in two ranks, and the wheels executed in following the same gradation. The instructor commands : 1. Diiachment in circle, right (or left) wheel. 2. INIakcii. At the command Maecii, the men of the front rank execute the movement as prescribed in No. 269, the cannoneers of the rear rank turn the head, and carry the hand towards the march- ing flank, so that each one may be out of the direction of his file leader by two men. For this purpose, the moment the wheel commences, each rear rank man executes a quarter turn to the left, if the wheel is to the right ; to the right, if the wheel is to the left, keeping, during the wheel, in the direction of his new file leader, and remaining at the distance of 2 feet from the front SCHOOL Of THE PIECI. 189 rank. The two rear rank men on the marching flank, who are without file leaders, should describe their circle without being farther outside of the front rank than is necessary, and be able to resume their places behind their file loaders easily. During the wheel they should regulate their gaits so that the rear rank, which aligns itself upon them, may be at its proper distance. 273. To stop the wheel, the instmctor commands: 1. Detachment. 2. Halt. 3. Left (or right) dress. 4. Front. At the command Delacftment, the rear rank men straighten their horses, and return to the direction of their file leaders. At the command Halt, all the cannoneers halt. The detachment is then marched to the front, and made to repeat the same movement. 274. When the instructor wishes the detachment to resume the direct march, he commands : 1. Forward. 2. Ouide left (or right.) At the command Forward, the rear rank men replace them- selves behind their file leaders, and march straight forward. When the cannoneers have acquired the skill necessary to avoid confusion in the execution of the foregoing movements, they are repeated at the trot. 275. The detachment being in line, at a halt, or in march, to place it in a position perpendicular to the original front, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Left (or right) dress. 5. Front. Which commands are executed on the same principles as the wheel in circle, a quarter of a circle only being described, and the command Halt given when the wheel is nearly completed. 276. The detachment being in line, at a halt, or in march, to place it in a direction oblique to the original front, the instructor commands : 1. Detachment, right-half (or left-half) wheel. 2. March. 8. H.\lt. 4. Left (or right) dress. 5. Front. 190 SCHOOL or THE PIECE. Which is executed as in the wheel, except that the eighth of a circle only is passed over. 277. The detachment being in line, at a halt, or in march, to place it in a position faced to the rear, the instructor com- mands : 1. Detachment, right (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Left (or right) dress. 5. Front. Which commands are executed as prescribed in No. 275, except that a semicircle is described. 278. In all the wheels, when, instead of halting, it is desired to move forward at their completion, instead of the commands 3. Halt, etc., the commands will be: 3. Forward. 4. Guide right (or left.) The command Forward is given as soon as the de- tachment is in the new direction; all the cannoneers resume the march to the front, and the command for the guide follows im- mediately. The foregoing movements being properly executed, from a halt and at a walk, are repeated at a trot. OBLIQUE IN LINE. 279. The detachment marching in line, to cause it to gain ground towards one of its flanks without changing the front, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. March. At the command March, the cannoneers execute an oblique to tne right, so that the head of each horse may be opposite the shoulders of the horse on his right, and that the right knee of each cannoneer may be in rear of the left knee of the man on his right. The men then move in the new direction, regulating upon the guide. When the detachment has obliqued sufficiently, the instructor commands : Forward. The cannoneers straighten their horses, and move forward. When in the execution of an oblique march, the guide is always on the flank of the detachment towards which the oblique is made ; S wiih his right hand, and fastens it to his wrist by means of the loop; then takes hold ^96 SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. of the conpling rein 20 inches from the liame, closiiia: his liancl and pressing his thumb strongly anainst the second joint of his fore finger, nails downward, the arms falling naturally. LSK OF THE COUPLING REIN AND WHIP. 290. The coupling rein and whip are, for the off horse, what the bridle reins and legs are for the near. If the off lior.'iL' moves too far forward, he is gently checked by carrying the right hand with the rein nearer to his neck; if he keeps behind, ninke hiin feel the whip on his right haunch; if he throws his shoulders in, or haunches out, touch him gently with the whip on his right haunch. The driver should be careful not to use the coupling rein abruptly, especially in halting and reining buck, otherwise he will throw the horse suddenly, and too much upon his haunches. 291. To gather the horses, the driver raises his right hand and moves it towards the neck of the off horse, at the same time executing for the near horse what is prescribed in No. 160 TO MARCH. 292. The instructor commands : 1. Drivers, forward. 2. March. At the first command, gather the horses. At the command Mabch, the driver starts his off horse by lowering his right hand and moving it forward, replacing it as soon as the horse obeys ; at the same time he moves the near horse as prescribed for the cannoneer. 293. To halt. The instructor commands : 1. Drivers. 2. Halt. The near horse is halted as prescribed for the cannoneer; the driver at the same time halts the off horse by gradually carrying the reins towards his neck, raising the right hand so as to make the bit bear. He replaces the hand as soon as the horse obeys SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 197 TO TURN TO THE KIGIIT OR TO THE LEFT. 294. The instructor commands : 1. Drivers, right vjhrd. 2. March. 3. Halt. At the first comraand, the driver gathers his horses. At the second, he wheels them to the right, malting the off horse describe a qaadrant of a circle whose radius is 3-25 yards or 10 feet. The off horse moves at the ordinary gait, the near horse quickens his movements to correspond with those of the off horse. At the third command, he halts and holds the horses in hand. The turn to the left is executed according to the same prin- ciples at the commands Drivers, left wheel, March, Halt. In this case the near horse, moving at the ordinary gait, describes the quadrant of 5 yards to the left, the off horse quickening his movements to correspond. 295. In all turns and wheels, the inner horse describes the arc of a circle whose radius is 3-25 yards; the outer horse in- creasing his gait, and conforming his movements to those of the inner one. TO REVERSE. 296. The instructor commands : 1. Drivers, right (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Halt. The movement is executed on the same principles as the wheel, the inner horse describing a semicircle of 10 yards, and the outer one of 12 yards, with such an increase of gait as will make his movements correspond with those of the inner horse. TO OBLIQUE. 297. The instructor commands : 1. Drivers, right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 3. Halt. ■Whicli is executed according to the principles of the wheel, jljMTving that the oblique is one-eighth of a circle, and that the r2 198 SCHOOL OF TUE PIECE. inner horse passes over an arc of 2'5 yards, the radius being 3'25 yards. TO lllilN BACK. 298. The instructor commands : 1. Drivers, backward. 2. March. 3. Drivern, halt. The movement is executed according to the principles pro- scribed for halting, the driver alternately raising and lovveriiiti; tho wrists as the horses obey, and taking care to move both horses equally. They sliould at first be backed but a few paces, and the aids prescriljed in No. 1()7 may be used if necessary. At tho command halt, slacken the reins and close the legs ; when the horses obey, replace them. TO DISMOUNT. 299. The instructor commands : 1. Prepare to dismount. 2. Dismount. At the first command, the driver lets go the coupling rein, and hangs the whip from the hook of the valise saddle, lie then finishes the movement as prescribed for the cannoneer, and, when it is worn, hooks up the sabre. TO FILE OFF. 300. The instructor commands : 1. By the right, (or left,) file off. 2. March. At the first command, the driver uncouples by pulling the running end of the coupling rein until it is detached from the hame ring, passing to the front of the horses for the purpose. He then passes the coupling rein over the neck of the near horse, and, holding it with the reins in the right hand, assumes the posi- tion of Stand to horse. At the command March, the drivers file off as already directed for the cannoneer. SCHOOL OF THB PIECE. 199 TO UNHARNESS. 301. The horses having been returned to their stalls, or the pickets, the off horse is secured by means of the check rein. The instructor then commands: Unharness. 4 pauses ; 5 motions. At this command, the driver takes off his leg guard, and hangs it up; unljridles the near horse, and puts up the bridle. Two. He unbuckles and frees the crupper; slips the breeching over the rump, and places it over the cantle of the saddle, resting the middle of it on the seat. Three. lie gi>es to the front, draws the breast straps well forward through their links; loosens the hame straps at the top, disconnects the branches at the bottom ; passes the breast strap over the hor,se's head; laying it, and then the hames, over the pommel of the saddle. Four. He loosens the liolly band, and then the girth; strips off the saddle ; places it properly on its peg, and covers it with the blanket. Five. He removes and puts up the collar, and secures the horse by his halter. The off horse is unharnessed in the same manner and by the same commands. 302. Before removing the harness from the horse, it should be wiped clean and dry, if practicable; if not, it should be put in good order at the earliest convenient moment, and covered with its sack. 303. After the drivers have learned to execute properly each motion of harnessing and unharnessing, which should be done under the eye of the instructor, or other non-commissioned oflBcer, or a well-instructed driver, they should be made to execute the movements in two motions. Afterwards, at the simple command IIarnk.'^s, they will harness both horses of their pairs, taking care to follow the directions in the order laid down in the different numbers. 200 srnooL of the piece. 304. To harness in two motions. The instructor com- mands : 1. la two motions. 2. Harness. At the command Habness, they execute the first three motions of No. 286 Two. The drivers execute the last three motions of the same number. 305. To unhamess in two motions. At the command : 1. In two motions. 2. Unharness, the drivers execute the first two motions of No. 301, and at the command Two, they execute the remainder. MARCHING. 300. Not more than eight drivers, veith their horses, are united for this part. The men are in spurs and sabres. The horses are harnessed, led out, formed in line, as prescribed in Iso. 287, and coupled. The instructor causes the drivers to mount, and again e.xjilains the uses of the coupling rein and whip, and the manner of gather- ing, moving, and halting their horses. TO BRE.\K INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT. 307. The instructor commands : 1. Drivers, from the right, front into column. 2. March. (Plate 23, Fig. 1.) At the first command, the driver on the right gathers his horses ; and at the command March, moves directly to the front. As soon as he moves, the next driver gathers his horses ; and so soon as the haunches of the first pair are on a line with the heads of his own, he moves forward 5 yards, obliques to the right, and again to the left, in time to enable him to enter the column. He then follows in the tracks of the pair that precedes him, preserving the distance of 2 yards from head to croup. Each of the other drivers executes the movement in succession, as prescribed for the second. SCHOOL OP THE PIECE. 201 The column is formed from the left on the same principles, the commands being, 1. Drivers, from the left, front into column. 2. March. CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 308. The drivers marching in colamn, to execute a change of direction to the right or left, the instructor commands : 1. Head of column, right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. At the first command, the leading driver executes the wheel, and moves directly to his front at the command FRIN'CIPLES. 322. The object of this school is the instraction of the se<,cioD in all its duties preparatory to its entering tlie battery of mauoiuvrc. This instruction is given by the chief of section under the direction of the captain. Each section consists of two pieces with their caissons. And the men, horses, and materiel required for their service. The chiefs of sections are at all times responsible to Cieir cap- tain for the instruction, good appearance, and serviceable con- dition of everything belonging or attached to their sections. The chiefs of pieces are in like manner responsible to the chiefs of sections for their pieces and everything pertaining to them. The gunner is responsible to the chief of his piece for the good order of the gun, its carriage, limber, and equipments, and for the instruction of the cannoneers in their duties at the piece. He will hold each of them responsible for the condition of the equip- ments belonging to his number. The chief of caisson (No. 8) is responsible to the chief of the piece for the caisson, its equipments, and the condition of the ammunition and other supplies belonging to it. The drivers are directly responsible, each for his horses, har- ness, and equipments, to the chief of the piece. It is the duty of both drivers and cannoneers to report at once to chiefs of pieces, any injury to their horses, or materiel, or any deficiency in the equipments. As soon as such injury or defi- ciency becomes known to the chiefs of pieces, they will at once take the necessary steps to remedy it, reporting the facts to their chiefs of section. (206) SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 207 ARTICLE FIRST. EXEKOISE OF SEVERAL DETACHMENTS. Formation of Detachments and Posts of Officers. 323. The gun detacliments, properly told off, are drawn up In line corresponding to the positions of their pieces in park, and touching each other. The cannoneers composing each of them retain their numbers, and are kept in a fixed relation to each other when in rank and file formation; but the detachment itself constitutes a unit. Ko notice is taken of inversions; the actual right and left detachments being the right and left of the line, which may be formed from colnmn by throwing the rear detach- ments either to the right or left of the leading one. 3:24. When the detachments are in line, the gunners are posted on the right of the front rank ; when in column, they are 1 yard in front of the centre; and when faced by flank, they are in their proper positions in the front rank. When the chiefs of pieces are present, they act as gunners, the latter taking their places 1 yard in rear of the right files of their respective detach- ments, and resuming their positions when the chiefs of pieces are out of the ranks. The ofiScers, when present, are posted as follows : — Chiefs of sections. In line, 2 yards in front. In column of detachments, 2 yards outside the wheeling flank. By flank, 2 yards from the front rank, in all cases opposite the centres of their sections, except that wlicn faced by flank the chief of the leading section marches at the side of the leading man. The chief of caissons. //; line, 4 yards in rear of the centre. In column, or by flark, 4 yards from the centre of the column, on the side opposite the chiefs of sections. 208 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. ALIGNMENTS. 325. The detachments are aligned by the instructor, as directed in No. 35, at the commands : 1. Rirjht (or left) DRESS. 2. Front. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS. 326. To open the ranks, the instructor commands : I. To the rear, open order. 2. Mabch. 3. .Rz'sf/ii-DRESs. 4. Front. At the first command, the gunners step back briskly 5 yards, and halt opposite their places in line. The remainder of the movement is executed as directed in No. 57. At the command Front, the gunners resume their positions in the front rank. To close the ranks, the instructor commands : 1. Close order. 2. March. At the command March, the rear rank closes on the front. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 327. The instructor commands: 1. By detachment, Bight-wHEHjj. 2. jMarch. 3. Halt. At the first command, the gunners step briskly 1 yard to the front of the centres of their detachments, face towards them, and repeat the commands in succession after the instructor. They are executed as prescribed in No. 45. As soon as each detachment is halted, its gunner dresses it to the left, the guides covering each other at distances equal to the front of a detachment, and then takes his place in column. The line is broken into column to the left on the same principles. MARCH IN COLUMN. 328. To put the column in motion, the instructor commands- 1. Column — Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left (or right.) SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 209 Tlie commands For\vari), March, and Guide left, are re- peated by the gunners. The guide of each detachment marches in the steps of the one preceding him, keeping his pr(i])er di^liDire accurately. The leading guide marches steadily to the front, in the direction given by the instructor. 329. When the instructor, after wheeling the detachments into column, wishes to put them in motion without halting, in- stead of commanding Halt, as prescribed in No. 327, he com- mands: 3. Column, Forward. 4. Guide left (or right.) The gunner repeats the command Forward, and that for the guide. TO HALT THE COLUMN. 330. The instructor commands : Column — Halt. The command Halt is repeated by the gunners. CHANGE OF DIRECTION IX COLUMN. 331. The column marching, the instructor commands: Head of column to the left. At this command, the gunner of the leading detachment wheels it to the left, and commands Forward as the movement is com- pleted. The other detachments wheel in succession on the same ground as the first, and at the same commands from the gunners, the men taking care not to commence the wheel until the command is given. To change direction to the right, the movement is executed on the same principles. TO MAUCn BV A FL.\NK WHEN IN COLUMN. 332. The column marching, the instructor commands: 1. Column bij the right (ov left) Jlank. 2. March. a. Forward. 4. Guide left (or right.) A.t the command by the right Jlank, March, repeated by the 14 s 2 2l0 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. gunners, the detachments face and continue the march. The guniiers take their places at the sides of their leadiiig files, dress on the guides, and preserve the intervals. The officers face with the detachments, and maintain their relative positions. 333. To resume the primitive direction, the instructor commands : 1. By the left {oT right) Jlank. 2. March. 3. Column forward. 4. Guide right (or left.) At the command March, the detachments face as directed. The gunners repeat the commands, and resume their places in column. OBLIQUE MARCH IN COLUMN. 334. The column marching, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, left (or right) oblique. 2. March. The gunners repeat the commands in succession after the in- structor, and each detachment obliques as prescribed in No. 54. The guide of the front rank of the leading detachment is the guide of the column. The other guides move in the same direc- tion and keep on a line with hiui, so that at the command Fob- Wakd, they will cover each other accurately at proper distances. The primitive direction is resumed at the commands : 1. Forward. 2. Guide left (or right.) Given by the instructor, and repeated by the gunners. BEING IX COLUMN TO FORM LINE. 335. To the front, gaining ground to the left. The column being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Forward into line, left oblique. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 4. Front. At the first command, the leading gunner commands Forward, and the others. Cannoneers, left oblique. At the command March, repeated by the gunners, the leading detachment advances 18 yards, and is halted by the gunner, who commands Might- DREss, and takes his place in line. The other detachments ohiiqne SCHOOL OF TUE SECTION. 211 until each is opposite its proper position, when its gunner com- mands Forward; Guide right; halts it abreast of the leading detachment, commands Bighl-BRH^s, and takes his place in line. The instructor aligns the detachments and commands Fku.nt. 336. To the front, gaining ground to the right. The line is formed on the right of the leading detachment, on the same principles, at the commands : 1. Forward into line, right oblique. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 4. Front. The gunners oblique their detachments to the right ; halt them abreast of the leading detachment; command Xe/i!-DREss, and take their positions in line, which is on the right of their respec- tive detachments. 337. On the right or left. The instructor commands : 1 . On right into line. 2. Marcu. 3. Guide right. 4. Front. At the first command, the leading gunner commands: Bight wheel, and at the second, which be repeats, wheels his detachment to the right, marches it forward until it unmasks the column, halts it, commands Bight-BB.'ESS, and takes his place in line. The other gunners repeat the commands for the guide, wheel their detachments to the right as soon as they are opposite the left of the preceding one, move them forward, halt them on the line, command Righl-HR^BS, and take their places in line. As soon as the detachments are properly aligned, the instructor commands F'kont. The detachments are formed in line on the left according to the same principles ; at the commands: 1. On left into line. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 4. Front, the gunners commaud Left-DRESS as soon as their detachments halt, and take their places in line on the right. 338. To the right or left; The instructor commands : 1. Bight (or left) into line, wheel. -2 March. 3. Halt. 4. Left (or right) dress. 212 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. The commands Bight (or left) wheel, M.uicii, and Halt, are repeated by the gunners, who take their places in both cases on the right as soon as the movement is executed. The instructor then aligns the detachments by the commands: Bight (or left) DRESS, Front. 339. In all formations and changes of front in line the oOBcers promptly take their proper positions, passing, if necessary, through the intervals during the execution of the movements. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 340. The column marching at a walk, to form the detach- ments in line gaining ground to the left, and to continue the march, the instructor commands : 1. Form line advancing — left oblique — double quick. 2. March. 3. Guide right. The leading gunner repeats the command for the guide, and his detachment continues the march ; the other gunners command Left oblique — double quick, and March, in succession after the instructor. As soon as each detachment has obliqued sufficiently, its gunner gives the command Forward — guide right, when it moves directly to the front, and on arriving upon the line resumes the ordinary step ; the officers and gunners taking their positions in line. The movement is performed gaining ground to the right on the same principles, the commands of the instructor being : 1. Form line advancing — right oblique — double quick 2. March. 3. Ouide left. J-O ADVANCE IN LINE. 341. The instructor commands : 1. Section, (or — ,) forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left (or right.) Which are executed according to the principles laid down in No. 50, the gunners remaining in their positions in line, which are always on the right of their detachments. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 213 To halt, the instractor commands : Section, (or — ,) hait. OBLIQUE IX LINE. 342. This movement is executed according to the principles prescribed in No. 54. For a detachment the commands are : 1. Cannoneerg, left (or right) oblique. 2. AIarch. TO CHANGE DIRECTIOX IN LINE. 343. The movements are according to the principles laid down in Nos. 45, 46, and 47 ; the commands are : 1. Section, (or — ,) left {or right) wheel (or reverse.) 2. March. 3. Halt. Or, 3. Foe WARD. 4. ffu/dc- left (or right.) TO MARCH By A FLANK WHEN IN LINE. 344. To the right or left. The line marching, the instruc- tor commands : 1. Section, (or — ,) hy the right (or left) flank. 2. Maech. 3. Forward. At the command March, the detachments face and continue the march ; the gunners remaining in the front rank. The chief of the leading section places himself at the side of the leading gunner or file. If the line is at a halt, it is first faced to the right, or left, by the command from the instructor: Section, (or — , ) right (or left) face. And then put in motion by the command : 1. Column, forward. 2. March. The chief of the leading section takes his place at the side of the leading gunner, or file, at the first command. 345. The march in line in the primitive direction is resumed at the command : 1. Column, hy the left (or right) flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide right (or left.) 2iJ SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 346. To the front. The iustructor commands : 1. Section, (or — ,) by (he right flank by file left, (or by the left flank by file right.) 2. Makch. 3. Forward. The movement is executed as prescribed in No. 52 for a detachment. TO CHANGE DIRECTION WHEN FACED BY A FLANK. 34T. The movement is executed on the principles laid down in Nos. 39 and 50 for a single detachment. MARCHING BY A FLANK TO FORM COLUMN OF DETACHMENTS. 348. The instractor commands : FOBM DETACHMENTS. At this command, each gunner forms his detachment into line, as prescribed in No. 53. The instructor then gives the command for the guide, which is repeated by the gunners. TO PASS FROM THE MARCH IN COL0MN TO THE MARCH BY FLANK. 349. The instructor commands : 1. By the right flank, by file left. 2. March. 3. Forward. At the command March, repeated by the gunners, each detach ment faces to the right, and then turns to the left, the gunners taking their posts in the ranlis. The column is marched by a flank, with the left in front, on the same principles, at the command : 1. By the left flank, by file left. 2. MARcn. 3. Forward. The gunners taking their positions next to No. 2 in the ranks. MARCHING BY FLANK TO FORM LINE. 350. Detachments are first formed as prescribed in No. 348, SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 215 after which they are formed in line, as prescribed in No. 335, and following. TO FORM THE LINE OR COLUMN FACED IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION. 351. The line or column being in march or at a halt, the instructor uomraands : 1. Detachments, right Cor left) reverse 2. !Marcii. 3. Halt. 4. Left (or right) dress. 5. Front. The commands are repeated by the gunners, and each detach- ment executes the reverse, as prescrilicd in No. 4(;. If the detachments are in column, the officers do not change sides ; but if they are in line, the oiBcers pass through one of the intervals during the execution of the movements, so as to take their proper positions in line. If the instructor wishes the detachments to move forward in the new direction, instead of the command Halt, etc., he commands Forward, or column Forward, as the reverse is about being completed, and adds the command for the guide. TO MARCH TO THE REAR. 352. The detachments being in line or in column, to gain ground to the rear, the same commands are used as in No. 5.5, the command for the guide being always given after tliut of execution. In this case the officers face to the rear at the proper commands, but do not pass through the line to take position. PO.STING THE DETACHMENTS WITH THEIR PIP.rES. 353. The detachments are marched to the battery either in coluMiu or in line, as circumstances may require. If approaching i"n column, in a direction parallel to the battery, the instructor, when near it, commands : Detachments, opposite your pieces. 216 SCHOOL OF THJB SECTION. Each detachment is halted by its gunner when opposite its piece, and wheeled into line. Approaching from the front or rear, the detachments are formed in line facing the battery, in the same order as their pieces, and the instructor commands : Detachments, opposite your, pieces. Each is wheeled or faced in the proper direction by its gunner, marched opposite to its piece, and formed in line, as directed in No. 120. The cannoneers are then posted and exercised together at their duties in the manual of the piece, and mechanical manoeuvres, under the direction of the officer commanding as instructor. EXECUTION OF THE MOVEMENTS AT THE DOUBLE QUICK. 354. The movements directed in the exercise for several de- tachments, may be made in double quick time, and the ordinary time resumed according to the principles of No. 61. EXEUriSE OF THE SECTION AND OF THE COMPANY. 355. When the section, division, or company is paraded, the principles laid down in the Article Exercise of Several Detach- ments apply. The commands are modified to suit the circum- stances, the terms section, company, etc., being used to designate the line. In the exercises, the platoon or sections may be made the unit at the pleasure of the instructor. The movements are conducted on the same principles as when the detachment is the unit, with the modifications in the words of command rendered necessary by the circumstances. In line or in column of aections, either when marching or at a halt, to form faced in the opposite direction, the reverse may be executed. by platoon or by section. In column of platoons the reverse should be executed by platoon. It may be executed by detachment in all cases, but this mode of changing the front should not be resorted to except in cases of necessity, or when the gun detachments only are paraded. SCHOOL OP TUB SECTION. 217 ARTICLE SECOND. EXERCISE OF SEVERAL DETACHMENTS— HORSE ARTILLERY. Formation of Detachments and Posts of Officers, etc. 35G. The detachments, properly told off, are drawn up in line corresponding to the position of their pieces in park, and touching each other. The cannoneers, as in dismounted detach- ments, retain their numbers and relative positions, but each de- tachment constitutes a unit, and no notice is taken of inversions in the manoeuvres. When the chiefs of sections are not present, there is an assistant instructor, who is mounted. 357. In line or column of detachments, the gunners are on the right of their respective detachments in the front rank. Each constitutes a file, unless the chiefs of pieces are present, in which case the latter take their places on the right of the front rank, the gunners covering thera in the rear rank and completing the files. 358. The officers, when two or more sections are united, are posted as directed for dismounted detachments, except that in column of detachments the chief of the leading section is 2 yards in front of the centre of the column. The assistant instructor is posted : In line, 4 yards in front of the centre of the detachments. In column, 2 yards in front of the centre of the leading detachment. Bxj flank, at the side of the leading file. TO MOUNT AND D1SM(JUNT. 359. (Plate 22, Fig. 1.) The detachments are mounted and dismounted as in Nos. 232 and 233. T 218 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. ALIGNMENTS. 360. The detachments are aligned as in No. 238. TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANKS. 361. The ranks are opened and closed as in Nos. 242 and 243. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN. 362. To the front. The detachments being in line at a halt, to break from the right, the instructor commands : ]. By detachment from the right — frord into column. 2. March. 3. Guide left. At the command March, the right detachment moves to the front, the assistant instructor taking his place 2 yards in front of its centre. The other detachments gather their horses and move off in snccession, each as soon as the haunches of the horse of the rear rank of the detachment on its right are on a line with the heads of its own front rank horses. They move directly to the front 6 yards, and then oblique to the right, as prescribed in No. 2Y9, until they intersect the column, when, by a left oblique, they enter it, and resume the dress towards the guide. The gait is so regulated that upon entering the column there should be 2 yards distance between the detachments. The detachments are broken into column from the left, accord- ing to the same principles. The commands are : 1. By detachment from the left — front into column. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 363. If the detachments are marching in line, the commands of the instructor are : 1. By the right, (or left,) break into detachments. 2. March. 3. Guide left (or right.) At the command March, all the detachments except the right (or left) halt, if they are marching at a walk ; or walk, if they are marching at a trot, and the movement is completed as in No. 362, SriTOOL OJ THE SECTION. 219 each detachment rcsaming the original gait, to commence the movement. 364. To the right or left. The detachment being in line, at a halt or in march, the instructor commands : 1. By detachment, right (or left) wJieel. 2. Makch. 3. Forward. 4. Guide left (or bight.) At the command March, each detachment execates the wheel as in No. 275, and moves to the front at the command Forward, so regulating the gait that there shall be a distance of 2 yards between the detachments. MARCH IN COLUMN. 365. The guide of the leading detachment marches steadily to the front, and in such manner as to keep his detachment 2 yards behind the assistant instructor. The other guides follow accurately the leading one at such distances that there shall be a space of 2 yards between the detachments. If the distances are lost, they will be regained gradually. TO HALT THE COLUMN. 36G. The instructor commands : Column — HALT. To resume the march in column, the commands are : 1. Column, forward. 2. March. 3. Guide LEFT (or right.) CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 367. The column marching, the instructor commands: Head of column to the right (or left.) The assistant instructor commands : 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. The leading detachment wheels to the right at the command March, and, at the command Forward, moves to its front; the 220 scnooi. of the sECTHiy. other detacliments wheel, on reaching the same ground, without further commands. The assistant instructor should give the first command in time to command Makoh, when the detachment is 2 yards from the turning point, as that distance to the front is gained in wheeling An oblique change of direction is executed on the same prin ciples, at the commands from the instructor : Head of column, riglil (or left) half-wheel. OBLIQUE MARCH IN COLUMN. 368. The column marching, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. March. At the command March, each detachment obliques, as pre- scribed in No. 219. The guide of the leading detachment is the guide of the column. The other guides move in the same direction, and keep on a line with him, so that at the command Forward, they will cover earh other accurately at proper distances. The primitive direction is resumed at the commands : 1. Forward. 2. Guide left (or right.) THE COLU.MN MARCHING TO FACE IT IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION. 369. The column being in march, the instructor commands: 1. Detachments, right (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Column, forward. 4. Guide right (or left.) At the command March, each detachment executes the reverse at the gait at which it is marching, and the assistant instructor passes to the head of the column. At the command forward, the column marches to its front. If the chiefs of sections are present, they do not change to the other side of the column, but each executes the reverse on his own ground. The chief of the section which has become the leading one takes his place at the head of the column, the oce SCnOOL OF THE SECTION. 221 who has been at the head of the column returning to his proper place on the flank. BEING IN COLUMN TO FORM LINE. 370. To the front, gaining ground to the left. The column being in inarch or at a halt, the instructor commands : 1. Forward into line, left oblique. 2. Maech. 3. Guide right. 4. Front. At the command Maech, the leading detachment advances 14 yards, and is halted by the assistant instructor, who then com- mands Right-im.^s&, and takes his place in line. The other detachments oblique to the left until opposite their places in line, when they move to the front, dressing to the right, and form in succession on the left of the preceding detachment. 371. To the front, gaining ground to the right. The line is formed on the same principles, at the commands from the in- structor : 1. Forward into line, right oblique. 2. Maech. 3. Guide left. 4. Front. The detachments, obliquing to the right, form in succession ou the right of the leading detachment, and dress to the left. 372. On the light (or left,) Being in march, the instructor commands : 1. On the right into line. 2. ^Iarch. 3. Guide right. 4. Feont. At the command March, the leading detachment wheels to the right, advances until it has unmasked the column, and is halted by the assistant instructor, who then commands .fli^^^-DRESS, and takes his place in line. The other detachments continue the march, dressing to the right; wheel in succession opposite their proper positions, on the left of the first, advance to the line, halt, and dress to the right. The detachments are formed in line on the left according to the same principles, the commands being : T 2 222 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 1. On the left into line. 2. Mabcu. 3. Guide left. i. Front. 373. To the right or left. The detachments being in marcl), the instructor commands : 1. Bight into line, wheel. 2. Makch. 3. Halt. 4. Ze/iS-DRESS. 5. Tkont. At the command March, the leading detachment wheels to the right. When it has unmasked the column, the assistant in- structor commands IIalt, Left-DR'Ess, and takes his place in line. The other detachments wheel in succession opposite their proper positions, advance and take their places in line, on the right of the first, dressing to the left. In all the formations into line the instructor gives the commands for the guide, immediately after the command March, and the command Front as soon as the last detachment is aligned. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 3t4. The column marching at a walk, to form the detach- ments in line gaining ground to the left, and to continue the march, the instructor commands : 1. Form line advancing — left oblique — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide right. At the command March, the leading detachment continues to advance at a walk. The other detachments oblique at a trot until opposite their positions, and then move forward, and form in succession on the left of the first, resuming the walk as they reach the line, and dressing to the right. The assistant instructor repeats the command for the guide, and takes his position in line. When the column is marching at a trot, the movement is executed on the same principles; but the instructor does not add trot to the first command. The assistant instructor gives the commands walk and March to the leading detachment in suc- cession, after the first and second commands of the instructor; repeats that for the guide ; and takes his place in line. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 'H^i The moTement is executed so as to gain ground to the right, on the same principles. TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 375. The instructor commands : 1. Section, (ov — ,) forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or left.) These commands are executed, as in No. 262, at the different gaits, the assistant instructor keeping his position in line. The guide should never put himself in motion suddenly, and should pass gradually from a slow to a quick gait, or from a quick to a slow gait. He should move carefully and steadily in the direction indicated, taking up points in advance by which to regulai/3 his march. These points should be in a line perpendic- ular to the front of the detachments. OBLIQUE IN LINE. 376. The detachment being in line, to cause it to gain ground to the front and towards one of its flanks, without a change of front, the instructor commands : 1. Cannoneers, right (or left) oblique. 2. March. These commands are executed as prescribed in No. 376 for a single detachment. When sufficient distance has been gained towards the flank, the instructor commands Forward. TO CHANOE DIRECTION IN LINE. 377. The detachments being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands : 1. Section, (or — ,) right wheel (or reverse, etc.) 2. March. 3. Forward. These commands are executed as prescribed in Nos. 275, 276, and 277, for a single detachment, except that the radius of the arc described by the pivot is about eight yards, so that the arc in the wheel is twelve yards ; in the reverse, twenty-four yards ; and in the half-wheel, six yards. 224 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. MARCHING IN hlSE TO MARCH IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION. 378. The instrnctor commands : 1. Detachments, right (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Ouide right (or left.) At the. command March, each detachment executes the reverse vrithout confusion, and as it is about being completed, the instruc- tor commands Forward, and adds the command for the guide. When the detachment presents a front of less than five men, this movement will be difficult or impossible to execute. In such case the instructor will cause the reverse to be executed by section instead of by detachment. It would generally be better to exe- cute the change of front by section. The officers pass through the line during the execution of the movement, and take their proper positions. TO MARCH BY FILE. 379. The detachments being in line are marched by file. To the front. (Plate 22.) According to the principles and by the commands prescribed in Nos. 245 and 247. To the right or left. (Plate 19, Fig. 4.) According to the principles and by the commands prescribed in Nos. 246 and 247. CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN FILE. 380. The detachments marching by file, the direction is changed by the commands and means prescribed in No. 249. TO HALT AND TO MOVE OFF. 381. The column is halted and moved forward again as pre- scribed in No. 250. OBLIQUE IN FILE. 382. The oblique is executed at the commands and by the means prescribed in Nos. 251 and 252 for a single detachment. Pluir _ -Y' ////'///// f///// //a^////'// /// /// ///t' >/////. K M M M 5 H' i a m^ hhm )^h\ m}\ i] ] )) i <^//.'///A JJ//////////> \m hhm hhm hhm '->>'- ///// //■// / // ///'/■////' '//Viy . SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 225 CHANGES OF GAIT. 383. The gaits are changed as prescribed in Nos. 281 and 282. TO BREAK INTO SINGLE FILE. 384. When the column is marching in double files, it may be formed in single files, as prescribed in No. 253. The detachment being in line may be moved to the front in single file by the commands and means prescribed in No. 254. TO FORM DOUBLE FILES. 385. The column is formed in double files as prescribed in No. 255. TO FORM LINE. 386. When the detachments are marching by flank, the line may be formed as prescribed in Nos. 256, 257, 258, and 259, pro- vided it does not change the relative positions of the cannoneers in the detachments. 387. The foregoing movements are executed by the detach- ments as if they constituted a single detachment. When marching by a flank, the line may be formed directly as in No. 386, but it would always be better first to form the column of detachments, and afterwards form this column into line by the means prescribed in No. 370, and following. MARCHING BY A FLANK TO FORM COLUMN OF DETACHMENTS. 388. The instructor commands : 1. Form detachments. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or left.) At the first command, all the detachments except the leading one halt, if they are marching at a walk, or walk if they are marching at a trot. At the command M.MicH, the leading detachment forms as directed in No. 2.'i6. The other detachments take up the move- 15 220 8CII00L (IF THE SECTION. ment in succession, at the origiual gait, as soon as the cannoneers of the one in front of them begin the oblique. The gait is regu- lated so as to take their proper distances promptly, bnt without confusion. The instructor gives the command for the guide as soon as the leading detachment is formed. IN COLUMN OF DETACHMENTS TO MARCH BY FILE. 389. The instructor commands : 1. Double files, from the right (or left.) 2. Mabch. At the command Marcu, all the detachments except the leading one halt, if the column is marching at a walk, or walk if it is marching at a trot. The leading detachment forms in double files as in No. 247, the others taking up the movement in suc- cession at the original gait, and closing to the proper distances. POSTING THE DETACHMENTS WITH THEIR PIECES. 390. The detachments are marched to the park, either in column or line, and posted at their pieces as directed in No. 353, or, should it be more convenient, they may be marched each in rear of the teams belonging to its piece. When the nature of the ground requires, the detachments are halted outside the park and marched to their posts successively as the pieces file out. The position of the detachment is habitually in rear of its piece, but positions may be changed by the means laid down in No. 122. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 227 ARTICLE THIED. EXERCISE OP SEVERAL PIECES. The Team. 391. The team consists of two or more pairs of horses, with their drivers. In manoenvring with empty ammnnition chests, two pairs are considered to be sufficient. With fall chests, or for the road, three pairs are required, and for the heavier classes of field guns four pairs. The instruction is given for three pairs; they are denominated the lead, middle, and wheel horses. At first not more than four teams should be united; but as soon as the drivers are sufficiently instructed, the number may be increased to six or eight. The instructor is mounted. He is aided by one assistant, also mounted, to every two teams, who will see that all the movements are properly performed by the teams under their charge. In the movements, the instructor goes wherever his presence may be necessary. In line, the assistants take post each on a line with the lead drivers, and midway between their teams. In column, they are 4 yards from the left flank, and opposite the centres of their teams, with the exception of the assistant, whose teams are at the head of the column, who takes post on the left of the leading driver. ARRANGEMENT OF THE TEAMS. 392. The drivers, dismounted, are in one rank, each pre- gerving an interval of 2 feet between his off horse and the near horse of the man on his right. The leading horses are on the 228 SCHOOL OF TUE SECTION. right, and the wheel horses on the left in each team ; this rule is invariable. When the pieces are parked in more than one line, the teams of the second line are placed, each on the left of the correspond- ing team in the first ; the teams of the third line are placed in like manner on the left of the teams of the second, and so on ; the teams of the same file of carriages being always drawn up in the same line, from the right to the left. The teams may be drawn np in two or more lines if the nature of the ground requires it. The drivers couple their horses without command, and the in- structor, after aligning them, causes them to mount as prescribed, and commands: 1. Bight-DRiisa. 2. Feont. The drivers align themselves, each preserving an interval of 2 feet between his off horse and the near horse of the driver on his right. The assistant instructors are 4 yards in rear of the centres of their teams. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN. 393. The instructor commands: 1. By team from the right-front into column. 2. Makch. (Plate 23, Fig. 1.) At the command March, the lead driver on the right, and all the others in succession, execute the move- ment explained in No. 307, each driver regulating the obliquity of his march according to his distance from the right. The column is broken from the left at the command : 1. By team from the left- front into column. 2. March. (Plate 28, Fig. 2.) At the command March, the lead driver of the left team moves to the -front and is followed by the other drivers of this team, who break successively, as has beec pre- scribed; the lead driver of the second team from the left com- mences his movement in time to get his proper distance ia the column and is followed in succession by the other drivers of this SCHOOL OF TUE SECTION. 229 team ; and so on to the right, the drivers regulating the obliquity of their march by their distance from the left flank. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 394. The in-structor commands: Head of column to the right (or left.) The assistant instrnctor at the head of the column commands : 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 3. Forwabd. And the change of direction is executed by the teams in succes- sion on the same ground as in No. 308. TO HALT TUE COLUMN. 395. The instructor commands : Go lumn — halt. The column halts as in No. 309. To resume the march in column, the instructor commands : 1. Column forward. 2. March. OBLIQUE IN COLUMN. 396. The instructor commands: 1. Teams right (or left) oblique. 2. March. At the command March, the lead driver in each team oblique* to the right and moves in the oblique direction. He is followed by his middle and wheel drivers, who turn on the same ground and follow in his tracks, so that each team is formed in columns of pairs. The lead drivers keep on a line with each other, and at such distances, that at the command Forward, they will move accurately in column in the primitive direction. The oblique to the left is executed according to the same principles. 350 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. TO FORM LINE. 397. To the front. The teams, being in column, in morch, or at a halt, the instructor commands : 1. Forward into line — left oblique. 2. March. 3. Ouide right. 4. Front. At the command March, the lead team advances 18 yards, and is halted by its assistant instructor. The other teams oblique to the left, as in No. 396, and when they have gained sufficient ground in that direction, each in succession moves forward, places itself on the line 9 yards from the team which preceded it, and dresses to the right. The assistant instructors oblique with the teams and take their places in line. The line is formed gaining ground to the right on the same principles. 398. To the right or left. Being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. Bight (or left) into line, wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Right-DViEss. 5. Front. At the command March, the lead drivers each execute a wheel to the right, as in No. 294, except that when the wheel is com- pleted they move straight to the front. They are followed by the middle and wheel drivers, who wheel successively on the same ground and follow in the tracks of the leaders. As soon as the wheel drivers are in the new direction, the instructor commands : 3. Halt ; 4. Bighi-T)'B.'ss&, and the assist- ants take their places in line. The line is formed to the left according to the same principles. 399. On the right or left. Being in march, the instructor commands : 1. On the right into line. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 4. Front. .At the command March, the lead team wheels to the right, moves forward, and when it has unmasked the column, is halted by its assistant instructor. SCHOOL or THE SECTION. 23' The other teams continae to adrance. Each passes the one immediately preceding it, wheels to the right, and forms 9 yards on its left, the assistant instructors taking their places in line. The teams are formed on the left into line according to the same principles. 400. In the formations into line, the instructor gives the commands for the guide immediately after the command March, and the command Fkont as soon as the last team is aligned. The alignment is made on the lead drivers. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 401. The column marching, the line of teams is formed in continuing the march, gaining ground to the right or the left by the commands and according to the principles of No. Sli, the teams preserving their Intervals of 9 yards in line. TO ADVANCE IN LINE. 402. The instructor commands : 1. Teams— forward. 2. Mabch. 3. Guide right (or left.) The teams move forward, dressing upon the guide indicated. The lead drivers maintain the dress and intervals ; the middle and wheel drivers, preserving their distances of 2 feet from head to croup, follow in their tracks. "Wliilst marching in line, in order to secure the proper control of the movements of tlicir horses, the instructor will occasionally cause the drivers to move from the front to the rear of the teams, and the reverse. For this purpose he commands, Lead driver to the rear. The driver designated reverses in a direction opposite to the guide, and, by another reverse, takes his place in rear of the team. The middle driver gathers his horses, keeps them direct to the front, and becomes responsible for the dress and intervals. He is passed in his turn to the rear, at the command. Middle driver to the rear, when the wheel driver keeps the dress and interrals 232 SCHOOL OP TOE SECTION. until passed to the rear by the command, Wheel driver to the rear. In passing from rear to front, at the commands, Sear (or — ) driver to the front, the driver invariably obliques to the right, qnickens the gait, and takes his place at the head of the team by inclining to the left. To advance in line of teams from the position occupied by the pairs in Xo. 392, the commands are the same. At the command Maboh, all the lead drivers advance, dressing towards the guide, and gradually opening out to 9 yards. The middle and wheel drivers form in column behind the lead drivers, as already directed. TO HALT. 403. The teams being in line, the instructor commands: Teams — halt. 404. The teams being formed and in line, are broken into column from the right or left by the commands and according to the principles of No. 393, the middle and wheel drivers following in the tracks of their leaders, and the latter commencing the movement in time to take their proper positions in column with- out disorder. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 405. The teams being in line, in march, or at a halt, th» instructor commands : 1. Teams, by the right (or left) flanh. 2. March. 3. Column — Foewaed. If the teams are in column, the commands are : 1. Column, by the right (or left flank.) 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Ouide right (or left.) Each team executes the wheel and moves forward, the assistants taking their proper positions. SCHOOL OP THI SECTIO}». 233 OBLIQUE IN LINE. 406. The teams being in line, in march, or at a halt, the instmctor commandB : 1. Teams, right (or left) oblique. 2. Marcu; which are execated as prescribed in No. 3ff6. Daring the oblique, the guide is on the flank towards which the oblique is made. At the command Foeward, the guide reverts to tlie original flank, or, if the oblique commenced from a halt, the command for the guide will be added to the command Forwakd. THE REVEKSE. 407. The teams being in line or in column, in march or at a halt, to form, faced in the opposite direction, the instructor commands : 1. Teams, right (or left) reverse. 2. March. 3. Halt. At the command Maroh, the lead drivers execute the reverse and move forward, as in No. 317, at the gait at which they were marching when the movement commenced. The middle and wheel drivers, preserving their distances, execute the reverse on the same ground, and follow in the tracks of the leaders. When they are all accurately in the new direction, the instructor com- mands Halt, or Column, halt. If he wishes to move forward at the completion of the reverse, instead of the command Halt, the instructor commands : For- ward, Guide right, (or left,) or Column, forwabd, as the case may be. CHANGES OF GAIT. 408. The movement at the difi'erent gaits are executed ac- cording to the principles and by the commands laid down in No. 318. TO REST. 409. The teams being in line or column, are halted, the drivers dismounted, and the rest ordered as in No. 184. To rest in marching, the means prescribed in No. 185 are used u2 Hi SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. TO FILE OFF. 410. The teams being in line, in front of the stables or picket, the drivers are dismounted, and file off as in No. 300. If the teams approach the parade or picket by a flank, the drivers may be formed into line on the right or left in the same order as in No. 392 by the commands and means prescribed in Nos. 312 and 313. THE PIECE HORSED. 411. From four to eight pieces may be united for instruction. As the movements of the carriages of the pieces and caissons are the same, the caissons may be horsed and considered as pieces. There is an assistant instructor to every two carriages. Their posts in line or column are the same as directed for the teams ; they see that all the movements are correctly performed. The carriages are taken in park, either in one line, or, as usually parked, with the caissons in rear of their pieces. The teams are always formed as if the carriages were in one line, the teams of the rear carriages on the left of those of the leading carriages of the same file. TO ENTKR THE PARK. 412. The teams being formed in line, and in the same ordei as the carriages to which they belong, approach the park as cir- cumstances require. If they are to enter by its left, they are broken into column from the right. If they are to enter the park by the right, they are broken into column from the left. The instructor directs the column towards the flank of the park, and when its head is near the first carriage, he commands: 1. Teams, to your posts. 2. Mahch. (Plate 23, Fig. 3.) At the command March, the column takes such a direction as will lead it in front of and near the poles of the carriages, and parallel to the line of the j^ark; each team, when within 3 yards of its carriage, changes its direction to the left, and halts. SfnoOL OF THE SECTIOS. 235 If there are several lines of carriages, the teams of the second break off from those of the first at the command March, and form a column which executes, with reference to the second line, a similar movement to that jnst described. The teams of the third line execute for that line what has been prescribed for the second, etc. If the teams are in line, in rear, or in front of the park, and the spaces between the carriages sufficient, they are marched towards the park in line, and the instructor commands : Teams, to your poets — March. The teams, passing to the right of their re- spective carriages, take their positions in front of the poles. HITCHING THE TEAMS. 413. The instructor dismounts the drivers, and commands: HlTOE. At this command, each driver goes in front of his horses, faces towards them, seizes with his right hand the reins of his near horse, and, with his left hand, the coapling rein of his off horse. The wheel driver then backs his horses so that they may be easily hitched, opens the branches of the pole yoke, fixes the toggles to the sliding rings, commencing with his off horse, and fastens the pole strap to the sliding loops of the breast straps, commencing with his near horse. He then goes in rear of his off horse, pass- ing by the right, detaches his traces and hitches them to the splinter bar, commencing with the inner trace of the near horse and ending with the outer trace of the off horse. He then passes round the rear of the carriage at double quick, detaches the outer trace of the near horse, hitches it to the splinter bar, and resumes the position of Stand to horse. The middle driver, as soon as the pole straps are secured, backs his horses, lashes the reins of the near horse to the coupling rein, 'n order to secure them, moves behind his off horse, passing by the right, detaches the traces, and when the off wheel horse is hiiched, fastens them, commencing with the outer trace, and being careful to put the inner traces above the pole straps. He finishes 236 scirooL or the section. by hitcliing the outer trace of the near borse, and resumes the position of Stand to horse. The lead driver regulates himself by the middle driver, con- forming to what has been prescribed for that driver. The instructor carefully examines whether the traces are equal and well stretched, and of the proper length ; whether the leathers are on the flat side, and the breeching well placed, etc., and finally passing from one part to another, causes whatever is wrong to be corrected. 414. When the cannoneers are at their posts in time, they may be required to hitch instead of the drivers. When this is to be done the drivers are not dismounted. At the command Can- noneers, Hitch, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 hitch the horses of the caissons, the gunner and Nos. 5, 6, and T those of the piece. Each hitches on his own side, Nos. 1, 2, 5, and the gunner attending to the wheel horses. "With reduced numbers, the four highest, including the gunner, hitch the horses of the gun ; the others hitch those of the caissons, commenciog with the wheel horses, and each number on his own side. The command, Cannoneers, Unhitch, is executed in a corre- sponding manner. TO UNPARK. 415. Everything being in proper order, the instructor com- mands : Stand to horse. At this command, the drivers come to attention, the wheel driver runs to the end of the splinter bar, lifts it, raises and fastens the pole prop, and resumes his position; the instructor then mounts the drivers and commands : 1. By piece, from the right — -front into column. 2. Makch. (Plate 23, Fig. 4.) At the first command, the drivers gather their horses. At the second command, the carriages of the right file move * IIOOL OF THE SECTION. SSV straight to the front, and are followed by those of the file next on the left, the leading one of which, commencing to move when the hind wheels of the rear carriage of the right file are opposite its leaders, obliques to the right and takes its place in column in rear of that file ; it is followed by the other carriages of its file, which march directly in its track. This movement is executed successively by the other files, the leading carriage of each increasing the obliquity of its march ii proportion to its distance from the right flank. The carriages preserve in column the distance of 2 yards from each other. When the pieces are parked in one line, the movement is executed in the same way, each carriage moving when the hind wheels of the one on its right are opposite its leaders. TTnparking from the left is executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. Before a carriage moves, the traces should be equally stretched, 80 that at the com maud March, the horses may pull steadily and together. This precaution prevents those jerks which fatigue the horses and frequently break the harness. TO HALT. 416. When the carriages are accurately placed in column, the instructor commands : 1. Column. 2. Ham. At the first command, the drivers gather their horses without Blackening the gait. At the command IIalt, they halt according to the principles of No. 293. The wheel drivers musfexert more utrength in halting than the other drivers, as their horses have to act against the impulsive force of the carriage. When the car- riages are halted, the traces must be stretched by carefully moving the horse a step or two forward. To resume the march, the instructor commands : 1. Column, forward. 2. March. 238 senile iL OF THE SECTION. TO WHEEL. 417. The instructor commands: 1. Pieces, left wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. (Plates 25 and 23, Fig. 5.) At the first command the drivers gather their horses, at the second the teams wheel to the left, as in No. 398, and move directly to the front. The command Halt is given the moment the carriages are fully in the new direction. In the wheelings, and in the movements which depend on them, the lead driver enters the new direction without making his horses pnll; the middle driver does the same; and it is not until the wheel driver is in the new direction that the traces are stretched. This principle is not rigorously applicable on difficult ground. Wheeling to the right is executed according to the same prin- ciples. TO OBLIQUE. 418. (Plates 25 and 23, Fig. 6.) The pieces being in line, or in column, the instructor commands : 1. Pieces, left (or right) oblique. 2. March. 3. Halt. Which are executed by each piece according to the principles prescribed for wheeling, observing that the oblique is a half- wheel. TO REVERSE. 419. Being in line, or in column, to establish the carriage* in the opposite direction, the instructor commands: 1. Pieces, left (or right) reverse. 2. March. 3. Halt. (Plate 23, Fig. 1.) At the command March, the teams re- verse as in No. 401, so as to turn the carriage on the shortest curve its construction will permit, and then moves to the front. I'hit.' i:'.. i^S u.y^y //, y./,:r'. i^ ^i^?^^ M^^ il ^] .9 #^ a is $ M ^ +c5f -fcb^ -&^ -ejf n+ n^ T T .# ,-^- p^ ^. iVl/'yit-. G. ,# ,x^ Tvl .-i. ** I'M :'i> t$t^ Kg.^. i) ... p /^ .>c ^ '■'in-/ +1+ SCHOOL OF THC B£CTIO!T. 239 The comtDaDd ualt will be given when the carriage is straight in the opposite direction. THE ABOUT. 420. To establish the carriages in the opposite direction and on the same ground, the instructor commands : 1. Pieces, left about. 2. Makch. 3. Halt. (Plate 23, Fig. 8.) At the command Makch, the drivers oblique the horses to the right; and the leading driver, after moving t yards in that direction, reins his horses to the left in such a man- ner that the extreme part of the curve they describe shall be 14 yards from their point of departure, and that, after passing 3 yards to the left of the original line of direction, they shall return to the ground on which the carriage first stood. The other drivers direct their horses so that the limber wheels shall describe a loop, which, extending 1 yards to the right and 11 to the front of the position occupied by the leaders before starting, shall pass a little to the left of the line of direction, and return in such a manner that the hind wheels, without crossing that direction, shall be brought to the position from which the leaders started. The command Halt is given as soon as the leading horses reach the ground on which the hind wheels stood at the com- mencement of the movement. In order that the preceding movement may be better under- stood, the instructor causes the carriages to execute it in suc- cession. In each instance he precedes on foot the leading horses, and passes over the curve which they are to describe. 421. When it is desired to move forward, at the completion of the foregoing movements, instead of the command Halt, the instructor commands : Forward ; and the pieces move direct to their front. 240 SCIKiOL OF THi; SECTION. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 422. The instractor commands : Head of column, to the right (or left.) The leading assistant commands : 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. (Plate 23, Fig. 9.) The leading carriage executes the wheel, and at the command Forward, moves directly to the front. The other carriages wheel successively on the same ground, keeping their distances of 2 yards. THE ABOUT IN COLUMN. 423. The column being in march, or at a halt, the instructor commands : 1. Pieces, left about. 2. March. 3. Forward. The drivers of each piece execute the about as prescribed in No. 420, and without halting move forward at the third com- mand. The drivers of the last carriage, which is to become the head of the column, must be careful to execute the about without slacken- ing the gait, in order not to delay the other carriages. This movement is performed at a walk, and the instructor, without requiring all the carriages to come about at the same time, must carefully observe and correct, if necessary, the means employed by the drivers for executing it. CHANGES OF GAIT. 424. The gaits are changed according to the principles of No. 318. The column being at a halt, is moved forward at a trot, by the command : 1. Column, forward — trot. 2. March. SCHOOL OP THE SECnO.V. 241 Care shoald be takeu that all the drivers start their horses off together. Marching at a trot, to halt, the instrnetor commands : Column — HALT. The drivers halt their horses quickly, bat not suddenly ; a car- riage moving at a rapid rate cannot be halted at once, bat mast advance 5 or 6 yards after the command halt is given. TO MARCH BY A FLANK. 425. The column being in march, or at a halt, the instrnetor commands : 1. Column, by the rigJU (or lefl) Jlank. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide right (or left.) At the command March, each piece wheels to the right, (or left;) and at the command Forward, moves to the front, dressing towards the guide, and preserving the intervals, which are 14 yards. TO HALT. 426. When in line, the instructor commands: Pieces — HALT. To resume the march, the commands are : 1. Pieces, forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or left) 427. The pieces being in march, or at a halt, to resamc the march in column, the instructor commands: 1. By the left (or right) flank. 2. March. 3. Column, forward. TO REST. 428. The instructor wheels the pieces into line, halts, and dismounts the drivers. Whenever the drivers are dismounted, and immediately on dismounting, the wheel driver lets down the pole prop, raising the splinter bar so as to enable the prop to rest 16 V 242 SCUOOL OF TUB SECTION. upon the ground, and support the pole. He then commands jiEST. The drivers remain near their horses. During the rest, the instructor sees that the drivers arrange every part of their harness which may have been displaced during the drill. He should occasionally question the drivers, to ascertain whether they understand the principles they have been applying. In executing the various movements when in march, the in- structor will see that the drivers apply the principles prescribed for the same movements at a halt. 429. To resume the exercise, the instructor commands: Attention 1 At this command all take their posts, and the wheel drivers raise and fasten the pole props. TO REIN BACK TO THE RIGHT. 430. The instructor commands: 1 . Pieces, to the right and backward. 2. March. 3. Halt. At the first command, the drivers direct the poles to the right without advancing or backing the carriage. At the second, they rein the horses back as prescribed in No. 298, taking care to keep them to the right. At the command Halt, they place the team and carriage in line and halt, stretching the traces. Backing to the left is effected according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The instructor directs the drivers to make the off wheel horses back a little sooner than the others. Whenever carriages have to execute an about in a narrow space, as a street, for instance, this mode of backing is necessary. In this case the drivers, after obliquing to the right (or left) until within 4 yards of the wall, back to the right (or left) until the hind part of the carriage touches the wall, and then execute a reverse. SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 343 TO DISMOUNT WHILST MARCHING. 431. The horses marching qnietly, and the distance being well observed, the instructor commands: {such) driver — Dis- MOU.NT. The driver designated lets the reins slip on his horse's neck, and dismounts without abandoning his whip, observing to plant his right foot as far as possible in advance of the horse's shoulder; he quickly disengages his left foot from the stirrup, and moving opposite the near horse's head, seizes the left rein with his right hand. TO MOUNT WHILST MARCHING. 432. The instructor commands: (such) drivrr — Mount. The driver designated lets go the reins, faces to the right about, places his left hand on the head of the collar, seizes the stirrup with his right hand, and quickly insurts his left foot; he then rests his right hand on the cantle, raises his right leg, and, passing it over the croup, places himself lightly in the saddle. To avoid accident, the instructor first practices the men in executing these movements at a halt, not exacting that all shall dismount or mount at the same time. TO PARK. 433. The instructor directs the column towards the park, and gives, according to the position of the ground on which the pieces are to be parked, one of the following commands : ^ . , ( Forward into jiark — right (or left) oblique. . , . \To the right (or left) into park. ( On the right (or left) into park. 2. March. To form forward into park. The column approaches the park from the rear, the leading piece being in rear of the ground on which it is to rest. At the command Maech, the leading piece marches direct to the front and halts, on the caution of the assistant instructor, at 244 cicuooL or the sectkin. its proper place; all the other carriages oblique to the right (or loft) until near their places in park; when they change direction to the front so as to come up square ou the line. They halt a little in rear of the line, and dress forward on the carriage already established. To form to the right into park. The instructor, approaching the park by its right, directs the column parallel to the front and 40 yards behind it. At the command March, which is given when the leading piece is 3 yards from the point opposite the position which it is to occupy, the assistant instructor wheels it to the right, moves it forward, and halts it at its position. The other carriages move straight forward ; each one wheels to the right when 3 yards from the point opposite to the position it is to occupy in park, marches forward, and places itself on the right of and in line with those already established. To form to the left into park is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. To form on the right into park. The instructor, approaching the park by its right, directs the column parallel to the front and 40 yards in rear. The leading piece is wheeled to the right and established in its position as before ; the next, passing in rear of it, places itself in line on its left in like manner, and so with the others. When the park consists of two or more lines, the same prin- ciples are observed ; each carriage of the rear ranks follows its file leader in its movements. The park should be formed on the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO UNHITCH. 434. The park being formed, the instructor causes the drivers to dismount as prescribed, and commands: Unhitch. The lead driver goes in front of his horses, faces towards them, backs them in order to unhitch more easily, lashes the reins of the near horse to the coupling rein, then passing by the left of SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. 24S his near horse, nnhitches his traces, commenciug with the ontc' one, bends them and fastens them by means of the trussing straps Tie unhitches the oflF horse in the same manner, commencing, however, with the inner trace, and, having finished, he passes to the rear of his horses, and resumes the position of stand to horse, first nnlashing the reins. The middle driver nnhitches, conforming to what has been prescribed for the lead driver. The wheel driver goes to the splinter bar, lets down the pole prop, unhitches, bends and fastens the traces of the near horse, and the inner trace of his ofif horse, passes at double quick around the carriage, nnhitches and fastens the outer traces of the off horse ; then goes in front of his horses, and, commencing with the near horse, unfastens the pole straps ; detaches the toggles from the sliding rings, commencing with the off horse ; nnites the branches of the pole yoke, and resumes the position of stand to horse. TO LEAVE THE PARK. 435. The instructor mounts the drivers, and commands: 1. By team, from the right (or left) — front into column. 2. March. At the command March, the right (or left) team moves to the front until it is disengaged from the pole, and then changes its direction at the command of the instructor. If the carriages are in two or more ranks, the teams of the same file follow each other, if the intervals between the carriages are sufficient for their passage. They are followed by the other teams or files of teams, which enter the column so as to leave the proper distances between the pairs. If there are not suflficlent intervals between the carriages for the passage of the teams, the instructor commands : 1. Teamn, by the right (or left) flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. Each team wheels as directed, and moves forward. As the v2 H6 SCUOOI. or THE SECTION. heads of the column pass out of the park, the teams of the rear rank oblique to the left or right, and take their proper places in column, in rear (or front) of the teams of the front carriages of their files. The teams are then marched to the stables, or pickets, by the means already prescribed. Note. — The method of instruction prescribed in the riding-house drill may be used with advantage in the elementary instruction of the driver, the team, and the piece. For this purpose a proper drill ground should be laid out, and the prescribed movements executed, so far as practicable, in the manner directed for the cannoneer mounted. SCHOOL or THE SECTION. -241 ARTICLE FOURTH. THE SECTION. 436. In the battery of manceuvre, the section is composed of two pieces and two caissons, horsed and prepared for service. The piece and its caisson are kept in a fixed relation to each other, and may be said to constitute a unit ; the word piece being often used to designate the piece and its caisson taken together. They are separated only in the formations in battery, and this simplifies the manoeuvres greatly, rendering it generally unneces- sary to give separate commands to the caissons. In the manoeuvres, it is immaterial which carriage leads. All the movements should be executed with the caissons in front, after they have been executed with the pieces leading, in order that the drivers may become familiar with their duties under all circum- stances. 437. When the pieces are in column, each being followed or preceded by its caisson, the section is said to be formed in column of pieces. The distances between the carriages, or between the carriages and detachments in horse artillery, are 2 yards. 438. (Plate 28.) In the order in line, the carriages are formed in two lines, fronting in the same direction, the pieces limbered, and each followed or preceded by its caisson. The intervals between the carriages are 14 yards, the distances 2 yards. In horse artillery the intervals are 17 yards, the distances between the carriages, or between the carriages and detachments, 2 yards. When all the carriages are drawn by four horses, the intervals are diminished 3 yards ; when they are drawn by eight horses, the 248 SCHOOL OF THE SECTION. internals arc increased 3 yards, the distances being the same in each case. Should a portion of the teams be reduced a pair of horses or more, allowance must be made for the deficient horses by increas- ing the distances of those carriages accordingly, estimating the length of a pair of horses in harness at 3 yards. In both kinds of artillery these arrangements are the same, whether the pieces or caissons lead. 439. (Pl.\te 29.) In the order in battery, the pieces are un- lirabered and prepared for firing. The pieces, limbers, and cais- sons are turned towards the enemy, each piece having its limber and caisson behind it. The intervals in both mounted and horse artillery are the same as in line. The distances in battery are the same for both kinds of artil- lery. Between the piece and limber it is 6 yards, measuring from the end of the handspike to the heads of the lead horses; between the limber and caisson it is 11 yards, measuring from the rear of the limber to the heads of the lead horses of the caisson. The cannoneers are at their posts, (No. 95,) and, in horse ar- iillerii, the detachment of horses is 4 yards in rear of the limber, and held by the horse holders. The pieces, whether in line or in battery, are designated ac- cording to their actual position in the section, as the right piece and left piece. POSTS OF OFFICERS AND NON-COMMISSIONED OFFICERS. 440. The chief of the section is ordinarily the instructor. His position is, in line, midway between his leading carriages and on a line with their lead drivers; but he moves to any point at which his presence may be required, or from which he can best superintend the movements. In battery, his position is in the centre of his section and half-way between the lines of his pieces and limbers. When the captain is instructor the chief of the section acts as assistant, and repeats the commands. SCUCOL OP THE SECTION. 24> The chiefs of pieces act as guides, and direct the movements of the carriages. Their positions, both in line and in column of pieces, are on the left of and near the lead drivers of their leading carriages. They wear the sabre sheathed, unless it is ordered to be drawn, and mount and dismount at the commands given foi the drivers. In horse artillery they are also guides, except when the caissons lead, in which case the chiefs of caissons are guides. In battery each chief of piece is ordinarily outside the file, on the left of his piece, but near it, and opposite the middle of the trail handspike. During the real execution of the firings, he dis- mounts and gives the reins of his horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the limber. In horse artillery the thief of caisson also dismounts and gives the reins of his horse to the wheel driver of the caisson. 441. Alignments are made on the drivers of the wheel horses, except in battery, when they are made on the wheels of the pieces. 442. The section is taken at the park, the teams bitched, the chiefs of pieces and drivers dismounted; the detachments formed either in front or rear of their pieces ; the cannoneers equipped for the service of the guns. The chief of section super- intends the preparation of his section, and sees that the duties are correctly performed. In mounted batteries the cannoneers wear the sabre belts only, the sabres being carried on the ammunition chests. The drivers, and, in horse artillery/, the cannoneers also, wear their sabres, unless special directions are given to the contrary. 443. The instructor explains the meaning of the terms in- tcrcal, distance, etc., and such other terms as may be used in the course of instruction. He also explains the objects of the dif- ferent movements before executing them. During the rests he questions the men, and especially the non-commissioned officers, to see that they understand the movements and the princip SCHOOL OF TUE BATTERY. The detachments, formed in two ranks, are 2 yards in rear of their pieces. In both isinds of artillery, these arrangements for the column are the same whether the pieces or caissons lead. ORDER IN LINE. (Plate 28.) The order in line is that in which the carnages are formed in two lines; the horses all facing in the same direc- tion, the pieces limbered, and each followed or preceded by its caisson. The captain is generally 4 yards in front of the centre. But, during the manoeuvres, he goes wherever his presence may be most necessary, and where his commands may be best heard. Each chief of scJttion is in line with his leading drivers, and midway between the leading carriages of his section. The chief of the line of caissons is opposite the centre, 4 yards behind the rear line of carriages. Each chief of piece and caisson is in the same position as in column. The trumpeter, when he does not accompany the captain, is in line with the leading drivers, and 4 yards from the right flank. The guidon is on the left of the trumpeter. In foot artillery. The interval between the carriages is 14 yards. The distance between the two lines is 2 yards. The cannoneers are at their posts as in column. In horse artillery. The interval between the carriages is 17 yards. The distance between the lines of pieces, detachments, and cais- sons is 2 yards. The detachments are 2 yards in rear of their pieces. In both kinds of artillery, these arrangements for the line are the same whether the pieces or caissons lead. 8CH00L OF THE BATTEKY. 271 ORDER IN BATTERT. (Plate 29.) The order in battery is that in which the pieces are prepared for firing; the pieces, limbers, and caissons being turned towards the enemy, and formed in three parallel lines. The captain is generally on the left of the chief of the centre section ; but he may go wherever his presence is required. Each chief of section is habitually in the centre of his section, half way between the lines of pieces and limbers. The chief of the line of caissons is opposite the centre, 4 yards in rear of the line of caissons. Each chief of piece is outside the file on the left of his piece; hut near it, and opposite the middle of the trail handspike. Dur- ag the real execution of the firings, he habitually dismounts and gives the reins of his horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the limber, and takes his place on the right or left of the piece, in such position as will best enable him to observe the effect of the shot. Each chief of caisson is on the left, and 4 yards in rear of the limber of the piece. In horse artillery, he gives the reins of his horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the caisson. The trumpeters are near the captain. The guidon is on the flank of the line of caissons. In mounted batteries. The interval between the pieces is 14 yards. The distance between the lines of pieces and limbers is 6 yards, measuring from the end of the handspike to the heads of the leading horses. The distance between the lines of limbers and caissons is 11 yards, measuring from the rear of the limbers to the heads of the leading horses of the caissons. The cannoneers are at their posts. In horse artillery. The interval between the pieces is 17 yards. T 278 SCHOOL OS THE BATTERY. The distance between the lines of pieces and limbers is 6 yards; measared as before. The distance between the lines of limbers and caissons is 11 yards ; measured as before. The cannoneers are at their posts. The detachments of horses are 4 yards in rear of the limbers. The regular formation in battery should be always preserved in the mancEuvres. But on the field of battle the front would bo commonly more extended ; the pieces being posted so as to obtain the greatest advantage from the nature of the ground, and the caissons sheltered as much as possible. When the battery retires firing, the horses and drivers in both kinds of artillery remain faced to the rear, after the first retrograde movement, that they may be ready to continue it. REMARKS ON THE FORMATIONS OF THE BATTERY. During the manoeuvres the captain is followed by the trumpet- ers, who must not leave him. On receiving an order from the captain for that purpose, they take the places assigned them in the order in line. The guidon takes the place assigned him in the order in column, in line, or in baUery, unless otherwise instructed by the captain, who directs him to take such position as he may think neces- sary. The double column is a particular case of formation in column with a front of two pieces. It is formed on the centre section as head of the column ; each of the other sections being in column of pieces in rear. When the battery contains four or eight pieces, the double column is formed upon the two central pieces as before. When the caissons are detached, which is frequently the case with horse artillery, and sometimes with mounted batteries, the intervals and distances between the pieces for mancenvring will be the same as though the caissons were present; so that the necessary ground for wheeling into line, etc., may be preserved. PlalH f'y.tA/f^/it^//f// /•/ ///'• .ff^///.f /// ///f ///^//f-i. (tfit/irni/ /iitrniir/ /tift f. hotsi' tirtfllrry. (liiri III' ini-vc, nmuiitetl hafU'ty. Chii-r I't'tiiis.son hnr\f ,trtif(rr\\ ( /lir/ i'f rifi-^i-yofi ninlinti'l h,i/frr\ [I'fil,-/ n/ plfi-r. liitrxe no( nttiiiutnf- it /Ut/'l'/ ItlUvOfi. Crtitntuwr/- tit hix //csV . Biitifrr or liumjn'tri\ I'hif/'ol'fjint- ,li\iiii>tuiti'IJ l ,t luif iif'unriiii/M or of a ilfliii hint'iit in 'III oriilhtiil ittti-fnirifhttc.or tiiiiil /ni.'r ui It ifiiuii/f I't' dllftrtit'ti . Imliciitrs tin uttrrmeilintf fmsition , Tlie ilirrition ill which the /ilnlfs x/iuiilil be sern . TO i O Si i.l<- ..1 Yanl.t. S- ,. i Hgs^^ iSssaJ^ i:5=a::i5-f ^S ? ! I 3 j J-;;3>a-TO ■l3iSS3-$ g33»)-f- i5Tsis.3$ -:S-3:S5^ i ■■ ■ .. ^i::3?bjij-f- : 4* ' ' 44 ' ■K-t \ psal-t- ^ 'y..-S=^^^ ^ 44 - -; ^' ~ +,4 ,y/ "s^ ■N. V ■' ' ' ' V Sf ■■■■"■ — '■ \'- -? « '-v. ; ■ i ' I -|..i---- : - *^ ' ! 4 ■- ■•^-' 1 ' ( l / /, (',•/// M.'iinlrJ Irlill.n ir,T.s,- .\i1illfn- .i) •to* '\ ■■■w :+K" ^, •tv t )) ■Hit 4: Hit '))) ^ mh •HI I f '5 'J -W +t+ ))))) )))1J J] -, -HtJt t /p J r f Mountfil Biillrt^' :4*;..__; ^: ^11 'I "^jU"') :^: :h+: I •J *6» i|^ §5 3^::i5 5 2=:i^H SS 2::i=i=J^ sssj^gg S=^==;1^ 5 \ ■^^ tr*-- S=:i:3^ S§ '^^^'-l4 ;^=5t^S2 2c:i==^|§ ^^jsJ-J- 22 ^^^^ J//'////// // .!rfi//i-n ^1,. :t»'; ..;r i- / 1 ']]' • 3) 1 j: ') n •» i i J) m, ■■■m "')M '-])) :^ M M u-^ « i) ^) ^) 1) I i 4 KJt *M 4^ kk (■->t *vt A- . «- >-->-t :*:■ '}- 5] II M ; 5^ ^ <-»-«■■" .n- '-»---■■--'«-- i.r?=i3 SS ^^^J 7 i- ■=^^l ■■11 -i- ■^ . 333^- yy SSg I 15 SCHOOL OP THE BATTERY. 2?9 Batteries should be practised in this kind of manoeurring accord- ingly. MEASURES OF THE ELEMENTS COMPOSING A BATTERY, AND OF ITS FORMATIONS. 480. The measures given in the three orders of the battery, and those which will be given hereafter, result from the dimen- sions of the diflFerent elements embraced. Those dimensions are given in the following table. The numbers adopted, having been chosen to avoid fractions, will be found to differ slightly from the exact measures. But as it is extremely difficult, and not very important, to secure pre- cision in the manceuvres, the difference is of little consequence. D«plh. Front. Pieces drawn by six horses ,. yards. 14 14 11 6 6 yardt. 2 2 2 2 5 Caisson drawn by six horees Limber drawn by six horses Piece in baltery with handspike DetachmcnL of horse cannonocrs Column of sections. Line of battle Line in battery Section in line Section in battery. . Monntod battery. Hone artillery. Depth. Front. Depth. Front. yds. ydt. yds. yds. 94 18 115 21 80 82 37 97 47 82 47 97 30 18 37 21 47 18 47 21 MANNING THE BATTERY. 481. The gun -detachments and teams, having been properly told off, are marched to the park with the teams in front 2S0 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. The (.hiefs of pieces and caissons, wheu mounted, march with the teams. The whole are conducted to the battery, the teams hitched, and detachments posted, as prescribed in the school of the section. As soon as the teams are hitched and cannoneers posted, a minute inspection is made by the chiefs of pieces, who report to the chiefs of sections, and a similar inspection is made by the chiefs of sections, who report to the captain. The officers, after reporting, will draw their sabres without wait- ing for a command to that effect. The chiefs of pieces will draw theirs on an intimation from the captain. SCHOOL OP THE BATTERr. 2?1 ARTICLE SECOND. MOVEMENTS IN COLUMN. TO UNPAEK. 482. EvBEYTHiNG being prepared for manoeavring, if the captain wishes to nnpark by the right, he commands : 1. By piece— from the right— front into column. 2. March. At the command Mauch, the right piece, followed by its cais- son, marches direct to the front, and the captain indicates the direction it should take. The other pieces and caissons follow the movement of the right piece, each so regulating its march by that which precedes it as to march in the same direction and 2 yards behind. Each chief of section directs the march of his carriages, which are so conducted by their chiefs as to enter the column by the most simple movement. The column of pieces is thus formed with a distance of 2 yards between the carriages ; and in horse artillery with the same distance between the car- riages and detachments. The captain goes wherever his duty may require, but generally remains on the left flank, opposite the centre of the column. The chief of the leading section places himself near the chief of the leading piece, and on his left ; the other chiefs of sections 4 yards from the left flank, abreast the centres of their respective sections. The chief of the line of caisson is opposite the centre of the column and 4 yards from the right flank. Each chief of piece and caisson, when mounted, is near his leading driver on the left. y 2 282 SCHOOL OF THE battery. The Irnmpeters are near the captain. The guidon is near the chief of the leading piece, on his left. When the battery is parked with the caissons in front, the cap- tain causes it to nnpark by the right by the same commands ; the movements being execated in the same manner. The battery may be nnparked by the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The commands are : 1. By piece— from the left— front into column. 2. March. 483. The colamn of pieces is not to be considered a column of manoeuvre. It will be changed into a column of sections as soon as the nature of the ground will permit. But the exigencies of service sometimes require that formations into line and battery should be made directly from the column of pieces. In such cases, the principles and commands laid down for similar formations from the column of sections will govern. In the formations to the right or left, the pieces must close up, and wheel successively when opposite their proper places. TO HALT. 484. To halt the battery, when marching in column of pieces, the captain commands : 1. Column. 2. Halt. At the second command, repeated by the chiefs of sections, all the carriages are immediately halted. CHANGE OF GAIT. 485. The changes of gait, in column of pieces, are executed by the following commands from the captain : To pass from the walk to a trot. 1. Trot. 2. March. To pass from the trot to a walk. 1. Walk. 2. March. srnoOL OP THE BATTERY. 2S3 At the first command, repeated by the chiefs of sections, al] the drivers and others on horseback prepare to change the gait; and at the second, repeated in like manner, they pass at once to the gait indicated by the first command. TO FORM SECTIONS. 486. When the battery is marching at a walk in column of pieces, to form sections at the same gait by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands : 1. Form sections — left oblique. 2. Makch. 3. Guide right. (Plate 30.) The chief of the leading section repeats the com- mands. Form section — left oblique — Makch — Guide right, in succession after the captain, which are executed as prescribed in No. 450. The other sections continue to march in column of pieces, and are formed successively by their chiefs j each commanding, Form section — left oblique, in time to command March, when the leading carriage of his section has arrived within 5 yards of its distance. The chief of section then commands : Guide right. When the column of pieces is marching at a trot, the formation is executed according to the same principles and by the same commands. But the leading carriages, instead of advancing 5 yards and halting as before, pass to a walk as soon as the com- mand March is repeated by the chief of section. The other sections continue to march at a trot, and execute the movement at that gait ; the two leading carriages of each section passing to a walk at the command March, which must be given when they have closed to their proper distance. When the column of pieces is at a halt, the formation is exe- cuted as prescribed for the column at a walk. In this case the carriages all move at the command March, and the leading ones halt after advancing 5 yards. When the column of pieces is marching at a walk, to form as 4 SCHOOL OF THE BATTEKY. EectiOQS at a trot, gaining ground to the left, the captain com- mands : 1. Form sections — left oblique — trot. 2. Makch. 3. Guide right. The chief of the leading section repeats the commands, Form section — left oblique — trot — Maeoh — Guide right, in succession, after the captain. At the first command, the chiefs of the other sections com- mand: Trot; and at the second, which they repeat, their sections commence the trot. The chiefs of the second and third sections command, Form section — left oblique, in time to command Marcu, when the leading carriage of each section has nearly gained its distance. The leading carriage then resumes the walk, and the chief of sec- tion commands : Guide right. The chiefs of sections superintend their carriages, and take the posts assigned them in the order in column as soon as their sections are formed. Sections are formed by gaining ground to the right according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The commands are: Form sections — rigid oblique — March — Guide left; or Form sections — right oblique — trot — Mabch — Guide left. THE BATTERY BEING IN COLUMN OF PIECES, TO FORM THE CAISSONS ON THE FLANK. 48T. When the battery is in column of pieces with the cais- son.! in rear, to form the pieces and caissons into separate columns, as in the flank march of a battery in line, the captain commands : 1. Caissons left, (or Caissons left — trot.) 2. Maech. 3. Guide right. These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, the caissons oblique at once to the left, gain the interval of 14 yards, and place themselves opposite their pieces; the pieces closing SCHOOL OF THE BATTKET. 285 upon each other at the same time to the usual distance. The gait is regulated as in the formation of sections ; and when the movement is performed at a walk, the leading carriage halts after advancing its own length. The chiefs of sections take their places as in column of sections. The caissons are formed on the right according to the same principles and by inverse means. When the pieces are in rear, they are formed on the right or left of their caissons in the same manner and by corresponding commands. TO MARCH IN COLUMN. 488. The battery being in column at a halt, to advance, the captain commands : 1. Column— forward. 2. Makoh. 3. Guide left (or right.) The commands, /orward — March — Guide left (or right,) are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the command Maeoh, all the carriages advance, the guide maintains the direction, and the carriages, as well as the detachments of horse cannoneers, pre- serve their intervals and distances. TO HALT THE COLUMN. 489. The column is halted as in No. 416. TO CHANGE THE GAIT. 490. The gaits are changed as in No. 424. TO MARCH BV A FLANK. 491. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to gain ground to the left, the captain commands: 1. Column— by the left flank. 2. Mahch. (Plate 31.) The commands, By the left flank — March, are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the command March, each 286 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERT. carriage wheels at once to the left, and when the wheel is nearly completed, the captain commands: 1. Forward. 2. Ouide right. These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the command Forward, all the carriages march direct to the front. The line is regularly established, and the carriages aligned in each rank, with their distances of 2 and intervals of 14 yards. The chiefs of sections talie their places between the leading car- riages as in line. To cause the battery to resume its original direction, the cap- tain commands : 1. Battery — by the right flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Ouide left. The commands, By the right flank — March — Forward — Ouide left, are repeated and executed according to the principles before described. After the flank march, to march the battery in a direction opposite to the original one, the captain commands : 1. Battery — by the left flank. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Ouide right (Plate 32.) In horse artillery, the flank march is executed according to the same principles, and by the same commands. The carriages and detachments conform to what is prescribed in No. 454. When the intervals between the carriages of the same section are 21 yards, those between the sections will be 14 yards ; when the intervals in the sections are 14 yards, those between the sec- tions wUi be 21 yards. The flank march, to gain ground to the right, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 287 In each case the captain and the chief of the line of caissons change their direction to the left or right, and conform to the movements of the battery. OBLIQUE MARCH. 492. The battery being in column, in march, or at a halt, to cause it to march obliquely to gain ground to the front and left, the captain commands : 1. Column — left oblique. 2. March. (Plate 33.) The chiefs of sections repeat the commands, Left oblique — March, after the captain. These commands are exe- cuted as in No. 455. The guide of the leading section is the guide of the column. The ofiScers conform to the movement and preserve their rela- tive positions. To resume the original direction, the captain commands: FORWAKD. This command is repeated by the chiefs of sections, and the car- riages resume the original direction by obliquing to the right. If the captain wishes to halt the column for the purpose of rec- tifying its alignments, intervals, or obliquity, he commands : 1. Column. 2. Halt. And to resume the march in the oblique direction : 1. Column. 2. March. The commands. Halt — March, are repeated by the chiefs of sections. (Plate 34.) In horse artillery, the carriages oblique to the left according to the principles prescribed for mounted artillery. They also form ranks whose fronts are parallel to the original front of the column. 288 SCHOOL or the battery. PASSAGE OF CARRIAGES IN COLUMN. 493. When the battery Is marching in column, to change the relative positions of the front and rear ranks, without altering the gait, the captain commands: 1. Pieces, pass your caissons, (or Caissons, pass your pieces.) 2. March. These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections ; and at the command March, they are executed as prescribed in No. 460. To continue the march without halting the carriages of the rear rank, the captain commands : Forward, when the passage is nearly completed, and the command is repeated by the chiefs of section. When the column is marching at a trot, the passage is executed according to the same principles and by the same commands, ex- cept that the carriages of the front rank move at a walk instead of halting at the command March. The carriages of the rear rank execute the passage at a trot, and then change the gait to a walk. When the column is at a halt, the passage is executed accord- ing to the same principles and by the same commands. If the captain wishes to put the column in march immediately after the movement, he commands : Forward, when the passage is about being completed, and then, Guide left (or right.) These com- mands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. When the column is marching at a walk, to execute the pas- sage at a trot, the captain commands : 1. Pieces, pass your caissons — trot, (or Caissons, pass your pieces — trot. 2. March. These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the command March, the carriages of the front rank in each sec- tion continue to march at a walk. Those of the rear rank execute the passage at a trot, and resume the walk as soon as the passage is completed. SCHOOL OF THE BATTEEY. 289 ABOUT IN COLUMN. 494. The battery being in column, in jnarch, or at a halt, to face it to the rear, the captain commands : 1. Pieces and caissons — left about. 2. March. These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections ; and at the second, all the carriages execute the about. When the move- ment is about being completed, the captain commands: Column — Halt; or Forward — Ouide right (or left;) the commands, Halt, or Forward — Ouide right (or left,) are repeated by the chiefs of sections. COUNTERMARCH IN COLUMN. 95. The battery being in column, in march, or at a halt, to execute the countermarch in each section, the captain commands : 1. Countermarch. 2. March. These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and at the second, each piece and its caisson execute the countermarch. When the movement is about being completed, the captain com- mands: Column — Halt; or Forward — Ouide rigJU ot (left.) These commands are repeated as in the preceding paragraph. TO CHANGE DIRECTION IN COLUMN. 496. The battery being in column, in march, or at a halt, to cause it to change direction to the left, the captain commands : Head of column to the left. (Plate 35.) The chief of the leading section commands: Left wheel March; and afterwards: Forward. These commands nrc cxernted ns jtroscribod in No. OSS. Kach of (he other sections, on arriving at the point where the first wheeled, executes the same movement, and by the same com- mands from its chief. Each chief of section must give the command Left wheel in 19 z 290 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. time to command March, when the heads of his leaders are 3.25 yards from the wheeling point. And the command Forward ranst be given as soon ^^ ^^^ leading pivot carriage has entered the new direction. The change of direction to the right is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. An oblique change of direction is executed according to the same principles, by the command : Head of column — left (or right) half-wheel. The chiefs of sections command, successively : Left (or right) half-wheel — March — Forward; the command Forward being given, in this case, when the leading pivot carriage of each sec- tion is about finishing the left or right oblique. TO DIMINISH THE FRONT OF A COLUMN ON THE MARCH. 497. The battery marching at a walk in column of sections, to form column of pieces from the right, at that gait, the captain commands : 1. By the right — break sections. 2. March. (Plate 30.) The chief of the leading section commands, suc- cessively, after the captain : By the right — break section — March. At the command March, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 461. The other sections are broken in succession by the same com- mands from their chiefs; the command March being given when the wheel horses of the left carriages of the next preceding section enter the right oblique. The battery marching at a walk in column of sections, to form column of pieces from the right at a trot, the captain commands : 1. By the right — break sections — trot. 2. March. The chief of the leading section commands, successively, after the captain : By the right — break section — trot — March ; and I'lnt. ,^11 N "5 '55:5) lot -}« 1)1 i)) )) ]) (--4 i51 ■^) !» ■, , , +-•» ,^v ^ ^ •i ft] 4-4 4' ,13 '3) 81. 89 ■ *ut f '5 1)1 s y,' ,„„,,/ /,■ //,r /,// //„„/■ .Ui'illl/,;/ Ji/i//,-rv 3SSl-$- 33S33 s«s2-5- aasli- s?ii=i]!-J- 'Ih :S;S«J-i-- f=j;3:3"'i5 fSSSSJj.:^ S 3 55) 8J 3) S3 ^5 tM* Kit •f - + *tH tot ^ -^f 'W ^3 a) .^i^-- ^ J] ♦g. / / FlriiH x: ^M ss:^'}; % sgt^SrJ $.; ^:i:jSS-$- ^ssssj-j- r^=:J J i- S=^:5|-i- t::3-ri5SiJ 5■ ::={- 5??,- i - •(» g^3S$^ g3iS,| 5 •'' -ViT. '»' ! M 31). 3.J3 '33 33 tot in ■J. itjt; i;3;3 --M353 53^3 %\ M +^ ■J i33 +ot I ; t-4 i+tt ^5333 -33533 353 A5 33 \ -+ f--t 'y/li I'llii/iir III in I /l M,iiinli;/ /Siidi-iy V\M~ :i:? ^^ V ^. ^ V, X r>*; i-^. •P<,.x ^ i^>N ^ i^. -^ "X '^^ V % V? •^^ X ^SS % \ ^ X ^ ^. ^. % % *? •*» A- i +f* « ■■■-., I ■■■• S3 ^ I (a ^ x-^ n^ '^. ^. %L s..^^ 4.' ''\--- ^; 55) ^% ■^^ m -^i •^cx N ■.•^^ ■^ V^^ W *X N^ ^ •^^ "^^ *? <>. <^ ^^ ^ - M) ■H533. m 5) ^5 Ofli 5 '5J) llorsr .\rt,U.-ry % mil \ + iS I'h.l,- .1.-, '^' /,,/„,/,■ ,-/ ,/n, ,/','„ /,///, /■/ 3^Hg^ 3^";^-$ s^s^-J- sa^^j;^ ') 3.!^ +0t '5 3i % ^ i3i. SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 291 the right carriages of the leading section move forward at a moderate trot. The left carriages of the same section commence the trot on obliquing to enter the column. The other sections are broken successively by the same com- mands from their chiefs ; and the carriages are regulated by each other, as in breaking sections at a walk. This formation is executed from the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. IN COLU.MN WITH THE CAISSONS ON THE FLANK, TO REPLACE THEM IN FRONT OR REAR. 498. The battery being in column, with the caissons on the flank, to re-establish them in rear of their pieces, the captain commands : 1. Caissons, rear, (or Caissons, rear — trot.) 2. March. Each chief of section repeats the commands in time to command March, when the leading piece of his section is to commence the movement; and they are executed as prescribed in No. 463. TO FORM THE PARK. 499. The battery being in column of pieces, and near the ground on which it is to be parked, will be formed by the com- mands, and according to the principles, prescribed in No. 464. Each chief of section directs the march of his carriages, and each carriage is conducted to its place in park by its particular chief. When the nature of the ground requires, the detachments are ordered to leave their pieces successively, when they are about entering the park. I'laU /„/,' /,„,■/',>.,;//,.//,■ >,■„). 1 ■■ ■->?■' y,i S"^ ^ R: ;ij +1 + tp H+ w \:;;.; 1| i i ■ S:::: — ■ *,-'»-\ n1 -T---Y f(4 t /I ^1' . ^ 1 I ^1 ^ ^1 * * SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 293 The movement is execnted on the opposite flank according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In this case the commands are : Forward into line — right oblique — March — Guide left — Front. The fonnation forward into line, by'a right or left oblique, is executed in a similar manner when the column is in march. In this case the chief of the leading section gives no command except for the guide, until he has advanced the distance before prescribed. He then halts his section as before. TO FORM LINE FACED TO THE REAR. 501. The battery being in column at a halt, to form it into line faced to the rear, on the head of the column gaining ground to the left, the captain commands : 1. Into line faced to the rear — left oblique. 2. March. 3. Ouide right. 4. Front. (Plate 31.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section— forward ; and those of the other sections: Section — left oblique. At the command March, re- peated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as in No. 600, with the exception of the alignment. When the lead- ing section has advanced 18 yards, or for horse artillery 22, it is halted by its chief until the centre section arrives upon the same line. He then commands : Countermarch — March ; and when the countermarch is nearly completed, Section — Halt — Left- DRESS. The centre section is halted upon the line in like manner until the left section comes np, and is then countermarched and aligned by the same commands. When the left section arrives upon the line, it is countermarched before halting, and then aligned like the rest. When the centre and left sections are countermarched, the commands. Halt — Left-Dwsss, should be given, if possible, z 2 I'l.'lr Vl ■W ■■•^■- ^5e W^- -f^- ■ft-^ISSSS r|-.ilES:S&^ [ti-J'-Sgca: 4^-jjKx:sr:S H-«:S: ^-e£::SsS f^^iffigs -^.$I®MB J) m" ym I ^. m 5 ^55 I 3) SCHOOL OP THE BATTKUY. 295 TO FORM LINE ON THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 503. The battery marching in colamn, to form it into line on the right, the captain commands : 1 . On the right into line. 2. March. 3. Chiide right, i. Feont. (Plate 39.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section — right wheel; and at the second, which he repeats, the section wheels to the right. As soon as the leading pivot carriage enters the new direction he commands : FoawARD — Ouide right; and as the section completes the wheel, and anmasks the column, he commands : Section — halt — Right- DRESS. The chiefs of the other sections repeat the command for the guide, and their sections continue to move forward. As each section passes the one preceding it in the formation, its chief establishes it on the line, with the proper interval, by the same commands. The commands. Section — halt — Bight-D&zsa, are given when the section is 4 yards in rear of the line. When the battery is aligned, the captain commands : Front. The line is formed on the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The commands are: On the left into line — March — Ouide left — Front. When the column is at a halt, the line is formed on the right or left in the same manner. In this case, the chiefs of the two rear sections command : Section — forward, and afterwards repeal the commands, March — Ouide right (or left.) TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT. 504. The battery being in line at a halt, to break into column to the front from the right, the captain commands : 1. By section from the right— front into column. 2. March. 3. Ouide left. I'l.llr '.l. J,' />,■„/■ /«/. ,v//,w/, A' //,,■ /,■/'/ Mi \ 1% I % I z ■^-:^^?-< -^B&S-S §(^ i iHiSiTss:^ -ti;s;ayS &s&^f&efe n> f[+ % I. rial. y,./;,;,//,.'^,, //- ly// A. „,„>,/, A.//,- /y? % eHsSs$| ^ SCHOOL or THE BATTEEY. 297 TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE BIGHT OR LEFT. 606. The battery being in line, in march, or at a halt, to break it into column to the left, the captain commands : 1. By section — left wheel. 2. Mabch. 3. FOKWAKD. 4. Ouide left. (Plate 41.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections command: Section — left wheel; and at the second, repeated by those chiefs, all the sections wheel to the left. When the wheels are nearly completed, the captain commands : Fohwaud — Ouide left; and the chiefs of sections repeat the commands. When the column is not to advance, the command. Column — Halt, is substituted for Forwakd — Guide left. The battery is broken into column to the right according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT FROM ONE FLANK, TO MARCH TOWARDS THE OTHER. 50T. The battery being in line at a halt, to break from the right to march to the left, the captain commands : 1. By sfc/ion — break from the right — to march to the left. 2. March. 3. Ouide left. (Plate 42.) At the first command, the chief of the right sec- tion commands: Section — forward; and at the second, which he repeats, the section moves forward, and he commands: Ouide left. After advancing 11 yards, he changes the direction to the left by the commands: Section — left wheel — March — Forward. Each of the other chiefs of sections commands: Section — for- ward, in time to command March when the limbtT wheels of the rear carriages in the section preceding his own arrive in front of him. He then conducts the section to the front, changes its direction to the left, and places it in rear of the preceding sec- 298 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. tiou by tlie commands already prescribed for the section on tlie right. The battery is broken from the left to march to the right according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE REAR FROM ONE FLANK, TO MARCH TOWARDS THE OTHER. 508. The battery being in line at a halt, to break to the rear from one flank to march towards the other, the captain first exe- cutes an about or countermarch, according to the kind of caiTiage he may wish in front. He then halts the battery and executes the preceding manoeuvre. TO BREAK INTO COLUMN TO THE FRONT, WHEN THE BATTERY IS MARCHING IN LINE. 509. The battery marching in line at a walk, to break into column to the front from the right, and at the same gait, the captain commands : 1. By the right — hj-eak into sections. 2. Mauch. 3. Guide left. The chief of the right section repeats the command for the guide, and his section continues to move at the same gait. • At the command March, the other sections are halted by the com- mand, Section — HALT, from their chiefs. The halted sections are put in motion successively by their chiefs; each commanding. Section — right oblique, in time to command March, when the leaders of the rear carriages in the section on his right arrive opposite to him. The sections oblique and enter the column as described in No. 504. When the battery is marching at a trot, the movement is exe- cuted according to the same principles. But the sections which halted in the preceding case slacken the gait to a walk at the commands. Walk — March, from their chiefs. They again trot and enter the column by the commands, Section — right oblique — /ro/— March — Forward. SCHOOL OF THE BATTEaY. 299 When the battery is marching in line at a walk, to brea* into Lolnmn from the right at a trot, the captain commands : 1. By the right — break into sections — trot. 2. March. 3. Ouide left. At the first command, the chief of the right section commands : Trot; and at the second, which he repeats, the section changes its gait to a trot. He afterwards repeats the command, Ouide left. Each of the other sections continues to march at a walk until required to enter the column, when its chief conducts it, as already described, by the commands. Section — right oblique — trot — ^1 ARCH — Forward. The battery is broken into column from the left according to tlie same principles, and by inverse means. TO FORM LINE ADVANCING. 510. When the battery is marching in colnmn at a walk, to form it into line at a trot gaining ground to the left, and continue the march, the captain commands : 1. Form line advancing — left oblique — trot. 2. March. 3. Ouide right. The cliicf of the leading section repeats the command for the guide, and his section continues to more at a walk. At the first command, the chiefs of the other sections command : Scclion — left oblique — trot. The command March is repeated by the same chiefs; and when the oblique movement is com- menced, they repeat the command, Ouide right. Each chief commands : Forward, as soon as his section has obliqued suffi- ciently to the left, and Walk, in time to command March, as it arrives on the line. When the battery is marching in column at a trot, the move- ment is executed according to the same principles. In this case the captain does not command Trot; and the chief of the leading SCHOOL OF TUE BATTEET. 301 The chief of the line of caissons follows the movement, sees that his carriages do not enter the column too soon, and, whep the column is formed, places himself 4 yards in rear of its centre. When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double columu at the same gait, the captain commands : 1. Double column on the centre. 2. March. 3. Ouide right (or left.) The chief of the centre section repeats the command for the guide, and the section continues to advance. At the command March, the other sections are halted by the command, Section — Halt, from their chiefs. They are after- wards formed into column by the commands and means prescribed for forming double column from a halt. When the battery is marching at a trot, the double column is formed according to the same principles. In this case the flank sections pass to a walk, instead of halting as before, and resume the trot, to oblique and enter the column. The commands from their chiefs are : Walk — March — Section — left (or right) oblique — trot — March, and. By the left (or right) — break section — March. When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double column at a trot, the captain commands : 1. Double column on the centre — trot. 2. March. 3. Ouide right (or left.) At the first command, the chief of the centre section com- mands : Trot. At the second, which he repeats, the section moves forward at a moderate trot, and he repeats the command for the guide. The flank sections continue to walk until the centre has ad- vanced sufficiently to allow them to oblique, and are then formed into column as already prescribed; their chiefs commanding: Sec lion — left (or right) oblique — trot — March; and, By the left (or right) — break section — March. 2 a BCHOOL OF THE BATTEET. 303 pieces arrive in rear of their proper places on tlie line, tliey move forward, halt, and dress towards the centre without command. As soon as the battery is aligned, the captain commands: Feont. When the column is marching, the movement is executed in the same manner. In this case the chief of the centre section does not command, Section — -forward — Makch; but halts and aligns his section after advancing 6 yards. 518. When the column is marching at a trot, to deploy it into line to the front at the same gait, without discontinuing the march, the captain commands: 1. Form line advancing. 2. Maech. 8. Guide right (or left.) At the first command, the chief of the centre section com- mands : Walk; the chief of the right section : Section into line — right oblique; and the chief of the left section : Section into line — left oblique. At the command Maech, repeated by these chiefs, the centre section slackens its gait to a walk, and the flank sec- tions deploy. As each piece arrives upon the line, its gait is changed to a walk without commaud. The movement is exe- cuted as in the preceding cases ; but when the line is formed it continues to advance ; the captain commanding. Guide right (or lef/,) which command is repeated by the chiefs of sections. When the column is marching at a walk, to deploy it into line to the front at a trot, without discontinuing the march, the cap- tain commands : 1. Form line advancing — trot. 2. ]Maech. 3. Guide right (or left.) At the first command, the chief of the right section commands : Section into line — right oblique — trot; and the chief of the left section : Section into line — left oblique — trot. At the command Maech, repeated by these chiefs, the flank sections deploy at a trot; the centre section continues to march at a walk; and, the 304 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. iine having been formed as in the preceding case, the captain gives the command for the guide. When the battery consists of four or eight pieces, the double column is deployed into line to the front by the same commands from the captain as when it consists of six. The chiefs of sec- tions give the same commands as in the other case, and the centre sections are formed as in No. 486. "When the line is to be halted, as in forming forward into line, the leading chief commands : Halt — Right (or left) dhess, as soon as the leading carriages have advanced 5 yards ; and the alignment is made upon the cen- tral carriages. TO FORM THE DOUBLE COLUMN INTO LINE TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 514. The battery being in double column at a halt, to form it into line to the right, the captain commands : 1. To and on the right into line. 2. March. 3. Front. At the first command, the chief of the leading section com- mands : Section — right wheel; and the other chiefs of sections: Forward. At the second, repeated by those chiefs, tho leading section vpheels to the right, and is established on the line, as in No. 503. The other pieces advance under the direction of their chiefs and of the chiefs of sections, wheel to the right in succes- Bion as they arrive opposite their places, establish themselves on the line, and dress upon the pieces already aligned. When the alignment is completed, the captain commands : Front. When the column is marching, the line is formed to the right in the same manner, except that the chiefs of the flank sections omit the commands, Forward — March. The line is formed to the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery consists of four or of eight pieces, the double column is deployed into line to the right or left by the same com- mands from the captain as when it consists of six. In this rase, SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 305 the leading pieces are wheeled to the right or left, as a section, and established on the line, as in No. 503. For this purpose, the leading chief of section commands : Right (or left) wheel — Mabch — FoEWAED — Guide right — (or left) — Halt — Right (or left) DRESS. The other pieces move forward, wheel in sncces- BioD as they arrive opposite their places, and form on the line, aa already described 20 2a2 N; S-l^-J- 3S:3S ^ 3:315 t ))} ^' 4* 4ft» W W ?], 4+ <^ ^e^ ^ w |)'1 1]) ? , ^ N; X '^ ^ •CO Z 4+ !:3i5 ^ W5 ^/ 9J 40t 7) "^ ))) V 1) t 111 % . I I'l.ll.' _-•"■ |=i^^ 3i^ g-.3Sj^5 i.^-3:3$-^ ig^ :g3-3$-f i;^^^-^ ;^5 iiSii:} \^^ir -^^ 5S:iElSi |l rim lir ')' t^ mi 'It ^S-t M 2 -3^lH '11 .^31- I,: 5); 44 I 4,P 40t let I 133 ■iri* ^ V \fl y//f l'///:/'/r ///•'>(/i . J/,,„nfr:/ /:,a/,;T U&^--^ 4-J-^:&S Jf .# h if ,# i^ 5^ I C C^^; '+!^- ^^^ 4-fe£:£:i ^$fcfc£:^-tfc&e^ ■ ^t£:£;&-4-S£^:Sr:; .^/ ,# vs. ./,. J/„r.yr Ailill.n % iV # 9 V .:4 X^- ..'<:^- 5^./ . ; w '"^ ^<* ^ tut lis .., % % %'■ % . < % ^. *% :-T?3*^$- ::S^:a$-J- r-5S3$^ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 309 as short a time as possible iu rear of the line, without urging their horses injuriously, and so aa to arrive upon it in succession. The carriages of the rear rank follow at the proper distance in the tracks of those in front. At the command Forward, which is given when the leading pivot carriage has described its arc of 22 yards, that carriage moves direct to the front ; and when the rear pivot carriage is in the new direction, the captain commands: Battery — Hait — jBi'grW-DRESs. The commands. Forward — Halt — Right-\)?xsa, are repeated by the chief of the right section immediately after the captain ; and by the other chiefs in time to be applicable to their sections; the pivot carriages halting at the command Halt, and the others halting and dressing towards the pivot as they arrive in succession on the line. When the battery is aligned, the captain commands : Front. The battery is wheeled to the left according to the same prin- ciples, and by inverse means. 524. When the battery is at a halt or marching in line, to wheel it to the right and continue the march, the captain com- mands: 1 . Battery — right wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. The movement is executed as already described, except that the pivot carriage, after wheeling, continues to march in the new direction, and the others conform to its gait and direction as they arrive on the line. The direction is changed to the left according to the same principles, and by inverse means. TO CLOSE INTERVALS IN LINE. 525. When the battery is marching in line at a walk or trot, to diminish its intervals, the captain commands : 1. On right (or left) piece, of ■ section, to yards — close intervals. 2. March. 310 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. (Plate 50.) The chief of the section designated repeats the poamand, On right (or left) piece, to yards — close in- tervals ; and the other chiefs of sections command : Right (or left) to yards — close intervals. At the command March, repeated by the same chiefs, the piece designated as the one of direction moves forward at a walk, and the others oblique towards it at a trot. Each obliquing carriage regulates its march by the one next towards the carriage of direction, and, after closing to the prescribed interval, moves forward on the alignment of the directing carnage and slackens the gait to a walk. As soon as the intervals are closed, the command for the guide is renewed by the captain, and repeated by the chiefs of sections. When the intervals are to be closed towards one of the flanks, the captain commands : 1. On right (or left) piece, to yards — close intervals. 2. March. ABOUT OR COUNTERMARCH WITH DIMINISHED INTERVALS. 526. The battery being in line with diminished intervals, in march or at a halt, to execute an about or countermarch, the captain commands : 1. Pieces and caissons — left about, (or countermarch.) 2. BiglU pieces forward, (or right pieces forward — trot.) 3. March. The chiefs of sections repeat these commands. At the second, the right carriages of each section move forward, and as soon as they are disengaged from the line, the captain commands : Mahch. All the carriages execute the required movement at this command, with the gait corresponding to that of the carriages in front. In regard to the change of gait, these movements are executed according to the principles of No. 493, in order that the right carriages may move out of the line and return to it again at the completion of the movement. Jf/ f/f'^f / ///f / / ff/.J % ^ 3|W i «> M 'ii Ji ii> ji) '" ej 4-^ t-ri +-r* ■'•-i f ;i +1+ +}4 -l-j-l +-|4 -l-j-t t-J4 .ii -U .11 W ,\i .ii i)l ..\i W iM ;ii lii ii i I i^ ii a liU 'li* V^ f^ *!» i0t Hpi :. -t4jf -(^ -itiH- i 4ot 310 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. (Plate 50.) The chief of the section designated repeats the command, On right (or left) piece, to yards — close in- tervals; and the other chiefs of sections command: Right (or left) to yards — close intervals. At the command March, repeated by the same chiefs, the piece designated as the one of direction moves forward at a walk, and the others oblique towards it at a trot. Each obliquing carriage regulates its march by the one next towards the carriage of direction, and, after closing to the prescribed interval, moves forward on the alignment of the directing carriage and slackens the gait to a walk. As soon as the intervals are closed, the command for the guide is renewed by the captain, and repeated by the chiefs of sections. When the intervals are to be closed towards one of the flanks, the captain commands : 1. On right (or left) piece, to yards — close intervals. 2. March. ABOUT OR COUNTERMARCH WITH DIMINISHED INTERVALS. 526. The battery being in line with diminished intervals, in march or at a halt, to execute an about or countermarch, the captain commands : 1. Pieces and caissons — left about, (or countermarch.) 2. Right pieces forward, (or right pieces forward — trot.) 3. March. The chiefs of sections repeat these commands. At the second, the right carriages of each section move forward, and as soon as they are disengaged from the line, the captain commands: March. All the carriages execute the required movement at this command, with the gait corresponding to that of the carriages in front. In regard to the change of gait, these movements are executed according to the principles of No. 493, in order that the right carriages may move out of the line and return to it again at thu completion of the movement. ' y^f //f'.tr / // /r / / 'f//j ■I04 -KSt *3t 1 ■ — - - - >'T. " .■33:3;$ $- ^ \ g:=i3)-t ^■::i^^^ :=rf:^^^$ 2^=i>t =i:=3:=;}:5 ::3:=3:55^- 2--i5:=:]-J- =i:;5:=i55 •=i-^sU \^ i;:=;::3-J-J- :S_3^^^ :^i3Si5^ ^ \\ \ *^ -; \. ■^ i- ■■ ?^-$ ■<3 + \^ SCHOOL or THE BATTERY. SH The commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. In horse artillery, when the pieces are limbered to the front, the horse holders advance within 2 yards of their pieces; and there the cannoneers mount. When the pieces cannot be wheeled about by hand, the captain commands: Limber to the rear; and when this i.s executed, if he wishes to retain the pieces in front, he commands : 1. Fieccs, left about — caissons, fovKard. 2. March. 3. Ballcry — HALT. (Plate 54.) The command Limber to the rear is repeated by the chiefs of sections. The first and second commands are also repeated by the chiefs of sections, and the pieces execute the about; the caissons closing at the same time to 2 yards. The third command is given as soon as the about is completed, and the word HALT being repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces halt and place themselves squarely on the line. The captain rectifies the alignment, if necessary, and com- raand-s: Front. "When the battery is to advance immediately, the captain com- mands: Forward — Guide right (or left,) instead of Battery — HALT ; and the caissons close on the march. (Plate 54.) When the captain wishes to place the caissons in front, he may cause the pieces to be limbered to the rear as before, and commands : 1. Gi'i!+ lit 4^ -K^ E i) ■tot ft) ^ .„ 13 i) % \ \ 1 i^ ■k|it '. -Hlrt- \ -tat- -HJt 6CH00L OF THE BATTEET. 319 IN COLUMN WITH PIECES IS FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTEltT TO THE FRONT. 536. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the pieces in front, to form in battery to the front by gainiDg ground to the left, the captain commands : 1. Forward into battery — left oblique. 2. March. 3. Guide right. (Plate 56.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section — forward; and those of the other sections : Scclion — left oblique. The chief of the line of caissons moves quickly to the right of the leading section, to cause the caissons to halt at the proper time and to superintend their align- ment. At the command March, repeated by the chiefs of sec- tions, the movement is executed as prescribed in Xo. 500, for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it in battery to the front by the commands: In b.a.ttery — March, which are executed as prescribed in No. 465. The formation in battery to the front, by gaining ground to the right, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The commands are: Forward into battery — right oblique — March — Guide left. When the battery is marching in column, it is formed in battery to the front by applying the principles of Nos. 500 and 465. IN COLUMN WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO THE FRONT. 537. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the caissons in front, to form in battery to the front by gaining grouna to the left, the captain commands: 1. Forward into battery — left oblique. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 320 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. (Pl_\te 57.) At the first command, the chief of the leading sectior. commands: Section — forward; and those of the other sections : Section — left oblique. The chief of tlie Hue of caissons moves quickly to the right of the leading section, to halt the caissons at the proper time and to superintend their align- ment. At the command March, repeated by the chiefs of sec- tions, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 500, for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it in battery to the front by the commands, Piecex, pass your caissons — March — In battery — JIarch, which will be executed as prescribed in No. id. The formation in battery to the front, by gaining ground to the right, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is marching in column, it is formed in battery to the front by applying the principles of Nos. 500 and 46T. IN COLUMN WITH PIECES IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY TO TOE REAR. 538. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the pieces in front, to form in battery to the rear, by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands : 1. Into battery faced to the rear — left oblique. 2. March. 3. Guide right. (Plate 58.) At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands: Section — forward; and those of the other sections: Section — left oblique. The chief of the line of caissons goes to the right of the leading section, to direct the reverse of the caissons, as prescribed in Xo. 532, and to superintend their alignment. At the command March, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 500, for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it in battery to the rear by the commands: Fire to the rear — Caissons, pass your pi/ices trot ri.rtr 57. y// /■/'■/■''/////'_. ^/ .'//• /■-,■/ At J f'/^,^ . // //,''/// A'/r'; /// +i; ,4-, ' 4/ t i ft5 +^1 i: i i:t.l Oil f'y ^^ A 4-- I iii B 1 4.U aj 0^ FIril,' .1,'! r- ^\ -. ^/ 'r^/^.^y,, y^y/A /„y.,,j ,^^ ■K-H 1^) ■tt.+ ii ./^-/;-.. I r; 7r ^'/ fe?:^ ') i ^V, to; i! 4--+ 'i) \\) \ •\\ ])) i\ ■J.I .« '-, J] +_+ :jj ■■■., tJj +_+ H+ n+ ^'] a'l (ii .11 lij ,11 -li^ ■Kit K-J*- •let n:u.' :•'■'■ ■ /// if/ii i/i II , i/t//i (if/.i.ii>/i.i I It / ii' /I f, /(■ //• III /ii //f) 1/ Ai //if >/■">. V* +-» ¥^ t-"^ (■■^ <^ fS trt 01 w i >ji 'n k % 1/ /i> //if U1//1/ i/iiiiiiiii/ yii'ii III/ /n /,ii- /,•// %^me^ W^ 1 -* ^ws -4- 333 • i H) ...4. ^5 —4- *f* r^esi ^^^sm- ^ssm. 0-j8:e£ irfc^ -^ 1, 3.^3/'^ 3 ft3' ♦1+ 'i^ m /i> //ii' /<-//, t/tii/i//ii/ i/tcii /ii/ /i' //le l/tj/if .^- ^ X.- % '-t -Si fl(5, 111* ft) ■-■■ --^3:=iS$ -iS^SlJ-^ -33^15 y/i /■>•////// /I , //■/// fnt,tji'/i-j I II /) r/i/./f /I'l m III /ii/Aii/ /i' //if //■//, //a/ iir/iit /III'// ml /ji //i,- /f// Ir//, //a/ iir/iit /III'// ml /ji //i,- //■// «-=i§5 ■■ anHK^ ■J— ass$ ^sa^' ^^1 s«al ■ aa^0; % •ssaJS' k >& +t+ SCHOOL OP THE BATTERY. 323 trol — March— In battery; (Plate 62.) Or, Fire to the right — by section, right wheel — March — In battery — March. IN COLUMN WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IX BATTERY TO THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 541. When the battery is in colnmn, in march, or at a halt, with the caissons in front, to form it in battery to the left, by gaining ground to the right, the captain commands : 1. Fire to the left — by section, right wheel. 2. March. 3. In battery. (Plate 63.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections com- mand : Section — right wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, the sections wheel at once to the right, and move to the front at the commands. Forward — Guide right, from their chiefs. At the command In battery, which is given and repeated as Boon as the pieces are square on the new line, all the sections form at once into battery to the rear, as prescribed in No. 533. To form in battery to the left, by gaining ground to the left, the captain commands : 1. Fire to the left — by section, left wheel. 2. March. 3. Pieces, pass your caissons. 4. March. 5. In battery. 6. March. (Plate 64.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections com- mand: Section — Iffl wheel; and at the second, which they re- peat, the sections wheel at once to the left. The third and fourth commands are given and repeated just before the completion of the wheel; and the fifth is given when the pieces have passed their caissons, and the latter are square upon the new line. The sections are then formed In battery to the front, as prescribed in Nu. 529. The formations in battery to the right, by gaining ground to 324 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. the right or left, are executed according to the same principles, and by Inverse means. (Plate 65.) IN COLUMN WITH PIECES IN FKONT, TO FORM IN BATTEEY ON THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 542. When the battery is marching in column with the pieces in front, to form in battery on the right, the captain com- mands: 1. On the right into battery. 2. March. 3. Ouide right. At the first command, the chief of the leading section com- mands: Section — right wheel; and the chief of the line of cais- sons goes to that section, (No. 536.) At the command March, repeated by the chief of the leading section, that section wheels to the right, and its chief conducts it to the line by the com- mands. Forward — Ouide right, as prescribed in No. 508. And then, without halting, it is formed into battery to the front, as prescribed in No. 465, by the commands. In battery — March — from its chief. The other sections continue to advance; and as each arrives opposite its place in battery, after passing the one preceding it in the formation, it is formed into battery by its chief, by the commands. Section — right wheel — March — Forward — Ouide right — In battery — March; the command In battery being given as the caissons arrive in line with those already established. The formation in battery on the left is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is in column at a halt, it is formed in battery on the right or left according to the same principles. In this case, the chiefs of the two rear sections command : Section— for- ward, immediately after the first command of the captain, and then repeat the commands March — Ouide right (or left.) I'l.iti- BS. /// It'/////, /,; //■///, , "'■'J"//J /,/ /,,.„/,/„/„,,„ ,„ /„//^^ /'■////■ i'//'/.//„//,//,y, ,,„„„,/ ^„ //^ , A. '///: ss -^ $ss.^fe ^ec-- -^ SSK J- ^»«fe MVK. ^ ^|K.ee ^-s& 1^ -0^^e. _^. -^ m SCHOOL OP THE BATXEEY. 325 IN COLUMN WITH CAISSONS IN FRONT, TO FORM IN BATTERY ON THE RIGHT OR LEFT. 543. When the battery is marchiDg in colnmn, with the cais- Bons in front, to form in battery on the right, the captain com- mands : 1. On. the right into hattery. 2. March. 3. Ouide right. At the first command, the chief of the leading section com- mands: Section — right wheel; and the chief of the line of cais- sons goes to that section, (No. 536.) At the command March, repeated by the chief of the leading section, that section wheels to the right, and is conducted to the line, by the commands, For- ward — Ouide right, from its chief; as soon as it reaches the line, the section is formed in battery to the front by the com- mands. Pieces, pass your caissons — March — In battery — March, from its chief, (No. 4Gt.) The other sections continue to advance, and as each arrives opposite its place in battery, after having passed the one pre- ceding it in the formation, it is wheeled to the right, and formed into battery by its chief, in the same manner as the leading sec- tion. The formation in battery on the left is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the battery is in column at a halt, it is formed in battery on the right or left according to the same principles : the chiefs of the two rear sections giving the additional commands pre- scribed in No. 542. TO DEPLOY THE DOUBLE COLUMN INTO BATTERY TO THE FRONT OR REAR. 544. The battery being in double colnmn at a halt, to deploy H into battery to the front, the captain commands : 1. Forward into battery. 2. March. 2c 32B SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. At tho first command, the chief of the centre section com- mands: Section— forward ; that of the right: Section into line — right oblique; that of the left : Section into line— left oblique; and the chief of the line of caissons goes to the leading section, (No. 536.) At the command March, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the centre section advances 5 yards, and, without halting, is formed into battery to the front, as prescribed in Nos. 465 or 4G7, according to the kind of carriage in front. The pieces of the flank sections are brought upon the line by obliquing, and placed successively in battery without command ; regulating by the centre section. When the battery is marching in double column, it is deployed into battery to the front in the same manner, except that the chief of the centre section does not command. Section — -forward — March. When the battery is in double column, marching, or at a halt, it is deployed into battery to the rear according to the principles prescribed in this number and in Nos. 538 or 539, according to the kind of carriage in front. The commands are : 1. Into battery faced to the rear. 2. March. When the battery consists of four or eight pieces, the double column is deployed into battery to the front or rear, by the same commands from the captain as when it consists of six. The sec- tions are formed into battery as prescribed for the flank sections in this number. The leading chief of section, besides superintend- ing the formation of his own, gives the commands required for the centre section, and the leading pieces conform to the move- ments of that section. TO DEPLOY THE DOUBLE COLUMN INTO BATTERY TO THE EIGHT OR LEFT. 545. When the battery is in double column, marching, or at a halt, to form it in battery to the right, the captain commands: 1. To and on the right into battery. 3. March. //I /ii//,i I/. /i' i/iiili/i //• //ir fry/ a /III /I'l /ii ni/ii/ii i/i rii//il'/- ^W^iS. -* Kit ^:|f & «*:. .i/Jo (^-i-±_ M §5£:Se ^:; //fr n// /t /tff/rim /ff/ff//f /// r/fZ/fi// Jlnne AHifl.i^ rS ^ $S^* -^ X:tUi£& II .^ it:bb ■is :J 5 &-.:--r-^ KA ■ +-i>* •kJt H+ E ^- +^ .. . : ;■-.%' 5 ^ '■ sn:,; ^ A'i.! :>?.'■ ^^v. +-H- +J- '■ n^ Vi-CiSfc ■ :. : i^ . £ic ££'*&: -i- tti 0SJJ§ -* ;tE£i^ si i;^t& ^ §CHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 329 direction, it may be formed into battery to the right or left, by the command Action eight or Action left. In horse artillery, this mode of coming into battery should not be resorted to, when the caissons are required to pass their pieces, unless the horses may be easily conducted to their places by the horse holders. In this case the captain commands : Dis- mount, immediately after Action right or Action left. 2o2 33ft SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. ARTICLE SIXTH. FIRINGS. 548. "When everything is prepared for firing, the captain commands : Commence firing. This command, given by itself or after Load, is repeated by the chiefs of sections, and the firing is immediately commenced. The firing by battery, by half battery, by section, and by piece, will be governed by the principles laid down in No. 47 Y, the captain giving the directions prescribed for the instructor. To fire by battery, the captain commands : 1. Fire by battery. 2. Battery — Fire. The first command is repeated by the chiefs of sections; thf second is not repeated. To fire by half battery, the commands of the captain are : 1. Fire by half battery. 2. Right (or left) half battery — Fiee. To fire by section : 1. Fire by section. 2. Right {centre or left) section — Fire. To fire by piece : 1. Fire by piece. 2. Right section — right (or left) piece — Fire. The chiefs of half batteries or sections repeat the first com- mand, and immediately designate their respective commands aa Right or left half battery — Right or left section. They do not repeat the second commands. The firing is discontinued by the command or signal : Cease pmiNQ. I'hiio cm '/r/>U ,//r/iiri/tt/ /y /hi// //i/Zily .t .t t ■"'■SI ^ •KJ* f_tt ih * * +0+ + 0!! .t -t- .t -t 3) 1 3,3 oa oa ttil^ Vj 3\ 'J-," lij ij i;/; pj Y-^ tot +-^ t-Jt \ ttSi teH- lij t<» I SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 331 This command is repeated by the chiefs of sections and of pieces, and the loaded pieces discharged or the load drawn, except in the case when the battery is retiring with the prolongs. 549. To move and fire with the prolonge fixed, the captain gives the necessary directions, which are executed as prescribed in No. 476. It is but seldom that this mode of moving and firing is necessary, and it will only be resorted to when circum- stances require it. TO FIRE ADVANCING. 550. When the battery is firing, to advance by half bat- teries, the captain commands: 1. Fire advancing — hy half hallery. 2. Right half battery — Adnance. (PI4ATE 68.) At the second command, the chief of the right half battery discontinues firing, causes his pieces to be limbered to the front, and commands: Forward — March — Guide left. Or, he may cause them to be limbered to the rear, and, after exe- cuting the about, command : Forward — Guide left. The half bat- tery advances and the caissons preserve their distance in battery. As soon as the right half battery reaches the new position, previously indicated by the captain, its chief places it in battery by the commands, Halt — Action front ; or In battery — March ; the two last commands being given in quick succession. The caissons halt at these commands; and as soon as the pieces are unlimbered, the firing is renewed by command from the chief of half battery. The fire of the left half battery is continued during the move- ment of the right; care being taken to direct the pieces, so that their fire shall not injure the half battery in advance. As soon as the right half battery commences firing, the left moves forward with the guide to tiie right; and, after passing the right half battery ns far as the latter has advanced, is formed into battery and the firing commenced. The movements of the left half battery are efiected by commands and means correspond- ing to those of the right. 332 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. The right half battery again advances, as soon as the left com- mences firing; and the two continue to advance alternately until the captain causes the firing to cease. The battery is then aligned, or formed into line to the front or rear by the proper commands from the captain. While advancing by half battery, the captain places himself habitually with the most advanced portion of the battery ; and in six-gun batteries is accompanied by the chief of the centre section. The chief of the line of caissons remains habitually with the rear half battery. In horse fertillery, while advancing by half battery, the detach- ments preserve their distance in battery. When the pieces are limbered to the front, the horse holders advance, to enable the cannoneers to mount more readily ; but as soon as the pieces advance, the detachments resume their distance in battery. To fire advancing by half battery, commencing with the left, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The movement may also be executed by section ; the sections advancing in succession according to their positions in the battery, TO FIRE IN RETREAT. 551. When the battery is firing, to retire by half batteries, the captain commands : 1. Fire retiring hy half battery. 2. Right half battery — Retire. (Plate 69.) At the second command, the chief of the right half battery discontinues firing, limbers to the rear, and com- mands : Caissons, left about — March. As soon as the about is completed, be commands : Forward — Ouide right; and conducts the half battery to the ground previously indicated by the cap- tain ; the pieces preserving their distance in battery by marching 19 yards in rear of the caissons. As soon as the ground has been reached, the chief of half battery commands : Halt Fire to the rear — In battery, and commences firing; taking care not to injure the other half battery. The limbers and caissons remain facing towards the rear, as long as the firing in retreat continues. PlnU' fin. y"/r,r i r/i i I /,,//',/ /i„ //'/,„//,. iy .t .t .t .t .t .t a) a] 3] ♦in 40 tit 4r4 t^: t .t .t w K +7* 991 )H 7?) •;/ :/7 • 7) ;] ■]] 1) +-H rn ■I--H +-1+ f*rt ■t-T+ •« .7) 7) 7/ ■'n 77 W » •/] IM.il.' 7(1^ r y (^ r//f/,>, on n Mi *) 5i M , ■^ 3 953 W '>J 4» \] a) 0) a] :•!! +_* ■kit +J- +•> 3« JO J) -t-jt f_rt a) 535 3 ai. ,i} ill liJ 4-4 ? J^i H^ +f n^ ai • a3 i-)j ai ,K BJ liO 3) tJJ +=j+ +-if +-jt K> 4-Jf +ijt BCnOuL OP THE BATTERY. 333 As soon as the right half battery commences firing, the left relirea with the guide to the left; and, after passing the right half battery as far as the latter has retired, it is formed into battery, and the firing again commenced. The movements are exe- cuted m a manner corresponding to those of the other half battery. The half batteries continue to retire alternately, until the cap- tain causes the firing to cease. The battery is afterwards aligned, or formed into line to the front or rear, by appropriate commands from the captuin. ANhile retiring by half battery, the captain remains habitually with the portion of the battery nearest the enemy, and is accom- panied by the chief of the centre section. The thief of the line of caissons accompanies the other half battery. In horse artillery, the detachments move to the left, to facili- tate the about of the caissons. They afterwards place themselves behind and follow them during the retrograde movement at the distance of 2 yards ; remaining faced to the rear as long as the firing in retreat continues. To fire retiring by half battery, commencing with the left, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. The movement may also be executed by sections; the sections retiring in succession, according to their positions in the battery. MOVEMENTS FOR FIRIXU IN ECHELON. 552. When the battery is in line at a halt with pieces in front, to advance in echelon of pieces, the captain commands: 1. By piece from the right— front into echelon. 2. March. (Plate 70.) At the last command, the right piece moves for- ward, followed by its caisson. The next piece moves forward in like manner as soon as its leaders are abreast the wheel horses of the rear carriage on the right; and the otlier pieces commence the movement in succession according to the same rule. The officers preserve the same relative positions as in line. When the battery is marching in line at a walk or trot, the echelon is formed according to the same principles, and by the 334 SCHOOL OF THE BATTKRY. same commands; the gaits being regulated as in breaking sec- tions. The battery advances in echelon of pieces from the left accord- ing to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the caissons are in front, the battery advances in echelon of pieces from the right or left according to the same principles, and by the same commands. When the battery is in echelon, marching, or at a halt, it may be formed into battery to the front, rear, right, or left, as ex- plained in N //ir i,-,ri I'l.dr 71, inf *■? •rtf-^ " +0+""" vyt f-v t^Pt ' ' t-> » ')) '?1 w !i1 ft] 71 ''il. : '].! %\ ' )] : ■]'1 : V] \ t->t t?t ! *rt+ '■; 't)i ■1-) 'iJl f:^j : 7) '"/I ■] ]J ■W H' : 3 ' ] ; Ift if+ i m a fl' 35 la li +-6H ■j.' 4-6+ I 9'] ao ti S-/J ■>■ ^:3 9), S3 1',-^ ■i^ ivt Wt »-> (VH- SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 335 If the battcrj is in echelon and firing, to form it in the order in battery, continuing the fire, the captain causes the pieces behind the line on which the formation is to be made to cease their fire, and commands: 1. On. the right (or left) piece — -forward into hattery. 2. Makch. At the first command, the chief of the right section places his left piece on the line, the right continuing its fire. The chiefs of the other sections cause them to be limbered to the front, and at the command March, which they repeat, move them forward, and establish them in battery on a line with the right section. TO FIRE TO THE REAR. 554. When the battery is firing, to fire in the opposite direc- tion, the captain causes the firing to cease, and commands : 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Limbers and caissons, pass your pieces — trot. 3. March. (Plate 71.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At tiie command March, the pieces are wheeled about by turning the trails to the left; and the limbers and caissons oblique to the right, pass them, and take their places in battery by a left reverse. In horse artillery, the horses follow their limbers, pass them, and take their places by reversing to the left. When the horse holders cannot conduct them alone, they are assisted by Nos. 1 and 2. When the pieces cannot be wheeled about by hand, the captain 'commands : 1. Fire to the rear. 2. LliMBER TO THE REAR. 3. Caissons, pass your pieces — trot — March. 4. Picce.H, left about— yiAiica. 5. In BATTERY. 336 SCHOOL OF THE BATTEBT. AETICLE SEVENTH. CHANGES OF FRONT IN BATTERY. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE RIGHT, LEFT WING FOR- WARD, AND THE REVERSE. 555. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a perpendicular change of front, to fire to the right, throw- ing forward the left wing, he discontinues firing, and commands : 1. Fire to the riijM. 2. Change front forward on the right piece. 3. March. (Plate 72.) At the second command, the chief of the right section places the right piece in the new direction, by causing the trail to be moved to the left. He also causes the left piece of his section to be moved forward by hand, and established on the new line. When the ground is unmasked, the limbers and caissons of these pieces oblique to the left, move forward, and take their places in battery by wheeling to the right; the caissons aligning themselves by the chief of the line of caissons established on the right. The other chiefs of sections cause their pieces to be limbered by the command, Limber to the front; the caissons, and in horse artillery the horse holders also, closing upon the pieces while they are limbering. As soon as they are limbered, the chiefs of sections command : Forward. At the second command, the chief of the line of caissons places himself on the left of the right piece of the centre section, facing to the front, to mark the right of the new line of caissons. At the command March, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, these sections move to the front ; and, when each has arrived opposite its place on the new line, its chief PlaU> Tl. '^/.y. Y'/l,..,,Y'>. A.y/. .y//, /yy „.,„^^:.>„,,,/ i-re&s ^ fefc -^ M+ t f i&t " "■"! ■" .-•* .?i::; 3 .t ■^.J 'V; 9 # 8 +--J4 :ij 33 « 33 '"^j +jl ■A t-4 33 33) Hi 53 o;3 33 33 J3 33 ,&3 t6t SCHOOL OP THE BAlTJiUY. 331 commands: Section — right wheel — March — Foewaed; and afterwards, In battery — March, bo as to form upon the align- meut of the right section. When the caisson of the right piece of the centre section reaches the point where its piece wheeled, it wheels to the left, takes its distance in rear, wheels about and dresses to the right upon the line of caissons. The other caisson of the same section obliques to the left when its piece commences the wheel; and, after gaining its distance, establishes itself on the line by wheeling and dressing to the right. When the pieces are too heavy to be moved or wheeled about by hand, the chiefs of sections cause them to be limbered, with the exception of the right piece, by the command Limber to the REAR. The chief of the right section then commands: Piece, left about — caisson, forward; and the chiefs of the other sec- tions : Pieces, lift about — caissons, forward. At the command March, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces are wheeled about and directed to the front by the command Forward from the chiefs of sections. The left piece of the right section is established on the line by the commands. Eight wheel — March — Forward — In battery — March, from the chief of the section. The caisson wheels to the left when it reaches the point where its piece wheeled to the right ; and, after taking its distance, wheels about and dresses to the right upon the chief of the line of caissons. The other sections are established upon the line as already described. The pivot piece commences firing again, as soon as it is in position, and the others as they arrive on the line. . The change of front to fire to the left, right wing forward, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the detachments follow their pieces, and halt at the proper distance from the line. That of the left piece of the right section, when limbered, wheels to the left when its piece wheels to the right, allows its caisson to pass it, and takes its place by wheeling about to the left The horse holders of the pieces not limbered oblique to the left with their limbers, and, 22 2d 338 SCHOOL OF TUE BATTERY. like tkem, take their places in battery by wheeling to the right. When it is deemed advisable, the captain may retain the can- noneers at their pieces, and allow all the horse holders to conduct their horses to the new line. The same may be done in the other changes of front. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE LEFT, LEFT WING FORWARD, AND THE REVERSE. 556. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a perpendicular change of front to fire to the left, throwing forward the left wing, he discontinues firing, and commands: 1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front forward on the right piece. 3. Mahch. . (Plate 73.) At the second command, the chief of the right section causes the right piece to be placed in the new direction at once, by moving the trail to the right ; and the limljcr and caisson of that piece will oblique to the right, and take their places in its rear by wheeling to the left; the caisson dressing upon the chief of the line of caissons. He also causes his left piece to be moved to its place and established on the line by hand ; the limber of this piece, passing it on the right, takes its place by wheeling to the left, its caisson obliques to the right, passes on the right, and in rear of the right caisson, and takes its place also by wheeling to the left. The chiefs of the other sections cause them to be limbered to the front ; and while limbering they command : Caissons, pass your pieces — trot — March. When this is executed, the chief of the centre section commands : Section — right wheel, and that of the left : Forward. At the command ilAEcn, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, these sections move as ordered, with the caissons leading. The centre section is conducted to the line by its chief, and formed by the commands. Forward and In battery. The left section advances 5 yards, and is conducted to the line by two ''S/n,,./, ? y ity, Hi -A .4+' ^' 4^' 4^ SS;;^ -$- S^-5 ^- aS::55 4- iBs^jl -.^5§i •'■^^3* S '■^■' f' •: ^'5* SJs SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 339 saccessive right half wheels. It is there formed in like manner upon the alignment of the right section. At the second command from the captain, the chief of the line of caissons places himself in prolongation of the line, 32 yards on the right of the right piece, and faces to the front, to mark the left of the new line of caissons. When the pieces are too heavy to be wheeled abont or moved by hand, the chiefs of sections cause them to be limbered to the rear, with the exception of the right piece. While the pieces are limbering, the chiefs of the centre and left sections cause the caissons to pass as before; and all the chiefs of sections give the cautionary command for their pieces to wheel about. At the command March, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the pieces are wheeled about, and tlie sections conducted to the new line by the appropriate commands. The caisson of the left piece of the right section takes its place in the same manner as when its piece is moved by hand. The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked ; and the others when they arrive on the line. The change of front to fire to the right, right wing forward, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the horse holders of those pieces which are placed on the line by hand conduct the horses to their positions in battery by following their limbers. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE LEFT, LEFT WING TO THE REAR, AND THE REVERSE. 557. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to mak;B a perpendicular change of front to fire to the left, throwing the left wing to the rear, he causes the firing to cease, and commands : 1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front lo the rear on the right piece. 3. March. (Plate 1i.) At the second command, the chief of the right section places the right piece in the new direction, by causing the 340 SCHOOL OF TUE BATTEHY. trail to be moved to the right. He also causes the left piece of his section to be moved to the rear by hand and established on the new line. The limbers and caissons of these pieces move at once to the right, obliquing sufficiently to place themselves in rear of their rpspective pieces, and take their places by wheeling or reversing to the left. The other chiefs of sections command : Limber to the rear, and immediately afterwards, Caissons, in front of your pieces — trot — March. The caissons place themselves in front of their pieces, while they are limbering, and halt as prescribed in No. 4T2. The chief of the centre section then commands: Section — left wheel; that of the left section : Section— forward. The chief of the line of caissons places himself in the pro- longation of the line, 32 yards on the right of the right piece, and faces to the rear to mark the right of the new line of caissons. At the command March, given by the captain, and repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, those sections are put in motion and placed in battery on the line, the chief of the left section wheeling it to the left when it is opposite its position. When the pieces are too heavy to be moved by hand, the chief of the right section causes his'left piece to be limbered to the rear with the rest, and then commands : Left wheel. At the com- mand March, repeated by this chief, the piece wheels to the left, and is conducted by him to its place by the commands. Forward ■ — In battery. The caisson takes its place, as before described. The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked ; and the others when they arrive on the line. The change of front to fire to the right, right wing to the rear, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the detachments, at the command In bat- tery, take their places by the regular movement, described in No. 469. The horse holders of those pieces which are moved by hand follow their limbers and conduct the horses to their posi- tions, by movements corresponding to those of their caissons. When the left piece of the right section is limbered, the horses PLrt.- 6:J.,,,y. .^/!,>„/ /„/,,,■ /„//,,. /,// /,/'/ ,rnn, /,.//,,■ U 3 4- i^StS5 tl fl fl .|.' 4/ s^re-^gj ■ Jt> ':s^mi A A :s>^^n * ■sw^^'H ^mm§^ ■ I "^ /„y^,.;- ,■//!■■,,/ A /„■ ^ Av i,y// /// ^r/y./ /' Z^' ■'T+ ■tvt 4?^ QttS e^F -K- 4 ■j- li! 4Cif »ia +.3* Ktlt >\^^'^- I or; tH;£i f^ 'I *> ■M -I- ^C^r -i- SCnOOL OF THE BATTERY. 841 of the detachment are conducted to their places in the same manner as though the piece were nnlimbered, except that the detachment moants. CHANGE OF FRONT TO FIRE TO THE RIGHT, LEFT WING TO THE REAR, AND THE REVERSE. 658. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a perpendicular change of front to fire to the right, throw- ing the left wing to the rear, he discontinues firing, and com- mands: 1. Fire to the right. 2. Change front to the rear on the right piece. 3. March. (Plate 75.) At the second command, the chief of the right Bection commands : Limbers and caissons, in rear of your pit^ces — trot — March. The limbers and caissons oblique to the right, and pass their pieces, with the limbers leading. As soon as the limbers have passed, they wheel twice to the left and cover their pieces. The caissons pass their limbers and cover them in like manner. The chief of the section causes the trail of his right piece to be mo.ved to the left, and his left piece to be placed upon the new alignment by hand. The chiefs of other sections command : Limber to the rear, and CaiKsons, in rear of your pieces — trot — M.iacH. When this is executed, they command : Forward. At the second command, the chief of the line of caissons places himself on the left of the right piece of the centre section, facing to the rear, to mark the left of the new line of caissons. At the command March, from the captain, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and left sections, those sections, as well as the limbers and caissons of the first, are established upon the new line, as described in No. 555. When the pieces cannot be moved by hand, the chief of the right section causes his left piece to be limbered like the rest; and then causes the remaining limber and the caissons to pass, as 2 D 2 342 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. before described. When the piece is limbered, he commands: Lefl wheel. At the command March, from the captain, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the piece is wheeled and conducted to its place on the line, as in No. 555. The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is placed in the new direction ; and the others as they arrive on the line. The change of front to fire to the left, right wing to the rear, is executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. In horse artillery, the horse holders of the pieces which are raoved by hand follow their limbers, and wheel into their places in like manner. The remainder is executed as in No. 555. TO PASS A DEFILE IN FRONT. 559. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile in front of the right section, the captain commands : 1. To the front — by the right section — pass the defile. 2. March. (Plate 16.) At the first command, the chief of the right sec- tion discontinues firing, limbers his pieces to the front, and com- mands: Forward. At the command March, repeated by this chief, who also commands : Guide left, the section moves forward, passes the defile, and is again established in battery, and the firing commenced by his command. When the pieces are too heavy to be wheeled about by hand, the chief of the section causes them to be limbered to the rear, wheeled about, and the caissons closed, before giving the com- mand Forward. As soon as the right section commences firing, the centre is put in motion in like manner. Its chief conducts it through the defile by successive wheels, and forms it into battery in line with the first. As soon as the centre section commences firing, the left passes in like manner. While one section is passing the defile, the others continue firing ; care being taken not to injure the section in advance. Ila-te 76. '' // /'^///r } y, //' ////.tj // //^y/ /r y // y?r/// f/ ///r f/y/// /////y. t|( i-h 44 (J4 i :;-4$-- ■: •- --iJS iB;;a$^::^:-^% 4 M M dd .*! da - - i» . % 51 ii li^t gif (of f-Jf ^4* 3 4+ 4+ »<4 M t|4 +t+ *y* 4ti» ot lM;vtfJ7T /// /■,///'■>// /y //".i., r,- //i//^^' /// //'/I / ,■////'■ '-'■/'''>'■ +U 4+ +1+ +4+ +1+ +1+ \ ' ' ] '. ■ i 'i ^ A) M M ^ ^ (5) ^ c*. K •ft;* 4i> / .t .t «^ -1^- * <(?*■ ^ $ .t .1" V +04 1^ W 4^ _«3-. SCHOOL (IF THE BATTERY. 343 When the defile is in front of the left section, it is passed accord ing to the same principles, commencing with that section. When the defile is in front of the centre section, it is passed according to the same principles, commencing with that section, and by the commands. To the front — by the centre section — pas* the defile — March. Unless there is some reason to the contrary, the right section will pass before the left. When the flank or oblique march is better suited to the natnre of the ground, the chiefs of sections will give the required com- mands. When the defile will admit but one piece at a time, the sections are broken by their chiefs in such a manner as to cause the nearest piece to enter first. The sections are re-formed by their chiefs immediately after passing the defile. TO PASS A DEFILE IN REAR. 560. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile in rear of the centre section, the captain commands : 1. To the rear — hy the right section — pass the defile. 2. Makoh. (Plate 11.) At the first command, the chief of the right sec- tion discontinues firing, limbers to the rear, and commands : Gaia- sons, left ahovl— pieces, forward. At the command March, repeated by the chief of the right section, the caissons of that section execute the about, and the pieces close to their proper distance at a trot. As soon as the about is completed, the chief commands: Forward — Guide left, conducts the section through the defile by successive wheels, and forms it into battery in rear of its first position. The left section is put in motion as soon as the right com- mences firing. It is conducted through the defile by its chief, and formed into battery in rear of its first position, by the principles already described. The centre section moves as soon as the left commences firing. 344 scnoOL of thk BATTERr. It is formed into battery in rear of its first position, and in line with the other two sections. The passage of the defile may be executed, commencing with the left section, according to the same principles, and by inverse means. When the defile is in rear of one of the flanks, the movement should commence with the other. It should always end by passing the section or piece covering the defile. When the defile will admit but one piece at a time, the sections are broken by their chiefs in such a manner as to cause the piece farthest from the defile to enter first ; and the sections are again formed, as soon as possible after leaving the defile. PARADE FOR REVIEW AND INSPECTION. 561. The battery being in line, with the pieces in front; the first sergeant 2 yards from the right; the Jjugler and guidon in one rank, 6 yards on his right ; the quartermaster-sergeant 2 yards from the left; the artificers in one rank, 6 yards on his left; all dressed on the lead drivers of the pieces; the captain commands: 1. Attention. 2. Prepare for review 3. Action front. 4. Right-DR'E.sa. 6. Front. (Plates 78, 79.) At the third command, the batteiy is formed ns directed; the chiefs of sections take their places in the centres of their sections, 3 yards in front of the line of muzzles; and the chiefs of pieces, without dismounting, take their places at their posts, in battery. The pon-commissioned staflf, buglers, guidon, and artificers reverse with the limbers, and take their places, in the order already directed, on a line with the lead drivers ; the cannoneers are at their posts. At the fourth command, the battery is aligned — the chiefs of sections, the pieces, and the limbers by the captain ; and the cais- sons by the chief of the line of caissons. Flale 78. S«S)$: , 25SSrK> ."E:— . sssij : . 3s?;iJ >f-. 55^^1- . :^?B|0 ■4y-_ SS?2?|. _ ^-^}^ i:-. ^3^1: . ^:=:^?^ ir- ?s^5 _.^^.. s?3^=:;,5: . s^sgigrjfi X 11 ,r, ;:/, '^- . ^1-2? 33:31-) (Tl \^ .-§— • . ^^'-??i5-. 5^3 S3_«5 1' ^ \ t; . oS^JJ'. s>5 ■--^-"'Si&J-^ ^f- . 3SS}-}. g§:3-as?!-5i ;ir-. =?^=:sl S5^=^^5 t' '< i-- . ^am-^ aa ^-^^i 5 SCHOOL OF THE BATTEBY.' 345 At the fifth commaDd, given by the captain when the alignment is completed, the chief of the line of caissons takes his position in battery. The captain then commands : Draw — SABRES. This is executed by the staff sergeants, chiefs of pieces, and arti- ficers only; and the captain takes post 12 yards in front of the centre of the battery, (8 yards, if there are two or more batteries in line,) faces to the front, and awaits the approach of the review- ing ofEcer. When the reviewing ofiBcer is midway between the camp-color and the captain, the latter reverses to the right, and commands : Present — sabres. He immediately resumes his front and salutes, as do all whose sabres are drawn ; and the music plays according to the rank of the reviewing officer. The reviewing officer having halted, and acknowledged the salute, the captain brings his sword to a carry, reverses as before, and commands : Carry — sabres. He immediately resumes his front; the reviewing officer turns off to the right of the battery, passes along its front, and returns to the right by passing between the lines of carriages, or in rear of the Caissons. While the reviewing officer is passing around the battery, the music plays. It ceases when he turns off to take his post at the camp-color. When the music ceases, the captain faces the battery, and com- mands: Limber to tub front, and all assume their places in line. The reviewing officer having taken a position near the camp- color, the captain causes the cannoneers to mount, and breaks the battery into column of sections to the right by the usual commands He then commands: Pass in review, 346 SCHOOL OF the battery. and puts the column in march, at a walk, with the guide to the right. The captain then places himself at the head of the column, 4 yards in advance of the chief of the kading section ; the trum- peters or buglers march 4 yards in advance of the captain ; the chief of the line of caissons outside the column, opposite the cen- tre, and 4 yards from the left flank ; the first sergeant and quar- termaster-sergeant outside the column, 4 yards from the left flank, the former abreast tte lead drivers of the leading section, the latter abreast the lead drivers of the rear section ; the artificers in one rank, 4 yards in rear of the column ; the guidon at the side of the chief of the directing piece. When the head of the column has arrived within 40 yards of the reviewing oflBcer, the music begins to play, and as soon as the latter has passed, it wheels out of the column to a position in front of the reviewing officer, where it faces him, and continues to play until the column has passed. It then ceases, follows in rear of the battery, and resumes its place at the head of the column, after the next change of direction. All the officers salute in succession, as they arrive within 6 yards of the reviewing officer, casting their eyes towards him at the same time, and bringing their sabres to a carry after having passed him 6 yards. As soon as the captain has saluted he places himself on the left of the reviewing officer, passing by his rear, remains until the battery has passed, and then rejoins it, again passing by the rear. The column is so conducted as to march parallel to the line on which the battery is to form, and far enoogh in its rear to enable the column to wheel into line. It is then wheeled into line, formed in battery, and the review terminated by a salute as at the beginning. When instructions have been previously given, to pass a second time, either at a trot or gallop, it will be done before wheeling into line, the officers passing the second time without saluting. 562. When artillery is reviewed with other troops, the pieces, on coming into battery, are dressed on them, the wheels scnooL or tub BATTEKy. 341 being in the prolongation of the line of the front rank, the chiefs of sections place themselves on the line of company officers, and the captain on the line of field officers. At the command. Close ordee, instead of limbering to the front, the captain commands : 1 LiMBEB TO THE REAR. 2. Pieces, left about — Caissons, forward. 3. March. 4. Battery — halt. These commands are executed, and the pieces halt with their lead drivers on a line with the other troops. After passing in revievif and reaching the ground on which it is to form, the battery may be wheeled by section to the right, and after gaining the necessary distance to the rear, countermarched, and established on the line. 503. When a battery is to march past in line or in column of half batteries, it will be done according to the principles already described. In line, the officers, etc. will be at their usual posts. In column of half batteries, the captain will be 2 yards in advance of the chief of the leading half battery; each chief of half battery 2 yards in front of the centre of his command ; the chief of the centre section on the left of the leading half battery 4 yards from its centre, and the chief of the line of caissons in the same position with respect to the rear half battery. In eight-gun batteries, when the column is formed by half battery, the chiefs of sections who do not command half batteries retain their places in their sections. The buglers are 4 yards in front of the captain. The first sergeant and quartermaster-sergeant are outside the column of half batteries, 4 yards from the left flank, the former abreast the lead driver of the leading, the latter abreast the lead driver of the rear half battery, the artificers in one rank, 4 yards in rear of the column, the guidon at the side of the chief of the directing piece. 348 SCHOOL OF TUE BATTERY. OFFICERS' SALUTE WITH THE SABRE. 564. When officers are to salute, whether on horseback or on foot, at a halt or in march, they execute it in four motions : 1st. At 6 yards from the person to be saluted, raise the sabre perpendicularly, the point upwards, edge to the left, the hand opposite to and 1 foot from the right shoulder, the wrist 6 inches from the body. 2d. Lower the blade, extending the arm to its full length, the hand in quarte, until the point of the sabre is near the foot. 3d. Raise the sabre quickly, the point upwards as in the first motion, after the person saluted is passed 4 yards. 4th. Bring the sabre to a carry. INSPECTION. 565. Batteries of field artillery will always, for inspection, be formed either in line or in battery. The knapsacks of the cannoneers are strapped on the foot- boards of the ammunition chests. If the inspector wishes to examine the clothing of the men on the field, the knapsacks and valises will be unstrapped, laid at the feet of the men and opened, the drivers being dismounted for the purpose. THE END. l'l..t.- .MO JiiHt Arii't Si/iiiiir Kiiol . ■ Siihi/r h'n.il \Vi-iIvit'.s ImiiiI /•rniiiiii h'lu't. .blilici-n- Kiiol. \lfiTniii hiii'l •, ^j.U>>>>;>jV j,-'-*'*^'" -»WU^^~-^!i^>\J>X.v4.ii. .ii^Ai-^gi^;:jrr.->'*^"**^ w\^-'j^>;;i>XUVUW>6kI>X^! ;N^^^4i4. >isi>iii>V^i;i^i:^v.^,^::ii^;ikXiis::k^i^^^ -i>i*i.A^ Fl:lt, Pi. nr(4i.F. si(;\Ai,s. I. MAh'i-ji j'l/j; j.'/:i'/j:ir. "^^^ ^ :«-BUi - ^ffl^^ i^aJ*: fi^^SSEii ":-r U\ ^^^mmUii^ ^msm -m i'. UAI.K . i331j-^:g.f-* .(. ritdv. msm. i. CALLUV. 3-fe^-=^ ^fet Flail' 8: .5. HALT. t;Siei;^:i|l?^^^ rl,T -3: -I: 6 Fi)i7H.lf!/) r' n4^mi 7. ///•; I/; z'//.' ri'/./-.);x ru nil-, incur .7. Kif.iir om.ii.iri: .1/,. ./»,.,. ^ F^;4^ //;. /,/.7'y (>iirii.>ri:. // .iiiiirr. ;:'. foi-yrrnMAKcn . \i:i:iis moixt Ml.-ilr.: w- f^ li;. IS lIATIT.liV All,,,,, t^ f^p=Ti3?:p 17. COM,\lt:.\CK JIIU.XC Ipi^fefHii. IS. CKA.SK l-IIUXlr ^^-^ ^^ .i.-i. juii)r.< .i.vj) s.xDDj.KS. '■ '■■■"■■•■ :' l» "$W^WW ['l:i;r ;i^ WW^ w ^^^ ^ TFuf^^ :^^^^ m :j. 11' IK IK si: /W. • a • g — ^ j ^ -Pf I* r ^ gsp l?:^32trJ? i ^sapipi^^ppei •iV;. in; ILL CM.L. ^^P^PP^ li^pp^^^^^i I'latc 8; ■11. 7J7.Y.V/;/C lA/.l. ^^^m^^M ./_'. .SICK CM. I.. ^^m^^^m^ ^^^^^^p^pi^ ■«. lATTlK). 1 '.":■■ fi^ m m ^ m^ s=§ M ^ ^^^^ m '^m # ^^ s ^^ fsep^ l -tffc^^ l '''^''-'I^I^ ■ii. JtJ-.mF.AT. i|#g.zlli^J=^ |Sl-^s?^^E^fe"ffM#?-Si* -JS_ f^ ip f^E^^ilSl '^P^ i^ qt^ji eS? P^ ?^ iiii^ ^^^fep^^Sil^^ig • • ,• ,• rgi 3f-=^jc: 3r m.. '4e^. ^i^ ^ ^E^S ^^1 f(^